Mirage 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL Mirage - Mitsubishi Motors ...origin.static.mitsubishicars.com/pdf/owners/owners...Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon

Mirage2017 / OWNER’S MANUAL

Mirage / 2017 O

WN

ER’S MA

NU

AL

© Copyright 2016 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

Table of contents123456789101112

OverviewQuick indexGeneral informationSeat and restraint systemsFeatures and controlsDriving safetyComfort controlsFor emergenciesVehicle care and maintenanceCustomer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

SpecificationsAlphabetical index

Instruments and controls

1-1

1

Overview

N00100202717


Instrument cluster P.5-60

Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-77

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-74Turn-signal lever P.5-76Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-77

Wiper and washer switch P.5-77Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-79

Cruise control switches(if so equipped) P.5-52

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13Ignition switch (if so equipped)P.5-34Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch

P.5-50Electric remote-controlled outside rearview mirror switch P.5-33

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-bag (for driver)P.4-21, 4-27Horn switch P.5-80

Steering wheel height adjustment P.5-32

Steering wheel remote control switches (if so equipped) P.5-82, 7-40

Supplemental restraint system-driver’s knee airbag P.4-21, 4-28Fuse box P.9-22


Overview 1-2

1Center vents P.7-2

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-air-bag (for front passenger) P.4-21, 4-27

Heater (if so equipped) P.7-4Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-7

Audio (if so equipped) P.7-19Clock (if so equipped) P.7-26 Electric rear window defogger switch

P.5-80

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped) P.7-12Side vents P.7-2

Glove compartmentP.5-109

Engine hood release lever P.9-4Cup holder (for the front seat) P.5-109 12 V power outlets

P.5-107 Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-80

Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-20

Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-37Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-39

Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3

Parking brake lever P.5-31

Cup holder (for the rear seat)P.5-109

BK0235100US.book 2 ページ２０１５年１１月２０日　金曜日　午後３時１２分

Interior

1-3 Overview

1N00100302431

Interior

Bottle holders P.5-109Power window lock switch P.5-29

Microphone P.5-82

Sun visors P.5-106Vanity mirror P.5-106Card holder P.5-106

Power door lock switch (if so equipped) P.5-25

Dome light P.5-107, 9-29

Inside rearview mirror P.5-32

Head restraints P.4-7

Power window switch P.5-28

Seat belts P.4-8

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-curtain airbags P.4-21, 4-32

USB input terminal (if so equipped)P.5-102Manual window control

(if so equipped) P.5-28Heated seat switches (if so equipped) P.4-4

Cargo room lightP.5-108, 9-29 Front seats P.4-2

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-side airbag (for front seat) P.4-21, 4-32

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped) P.5-110

Jack P.8-5Rear seats P.4-5

Assist gripsP.5-111


Luggage area

Overview 1-4

1N00100501566

Luggage area

Tether anchors for child restraint system P.4-17

Tools P.8-5Spare wheel P.8-7


Outside

1-5 Overview

1N00100602652

Outside

Antenna P.7-44 Power window P.5-28

Windshield wipers P.5-77 Outside rearview mirrors P.5-33Side turn-signal lights (if so equipped)P.5-76, 9-27

Fuel tank filler P.3-3

Engine hood P.9-4

F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped) P.5-9Keyless entry system (if so equipped) P.5-6Locking and unlocking P.5-24

Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)P.5-76, 9-27

Front side- marker lightsP.5-74, 9-27, 9-29

Front fog lights (if so equipped)P.5-77, 9-27, 9-31

Front turn signal lightsP.5-76, 9-27, 9-30

Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped)P.5-74, 9-27, 9-29

Parking lightsP.5-74, 9-27, 9-31

Headlights P.5-74, 9-27, 9-29

Front side- marker lightsP.5-74, 9-27, 9-29

Front turn signal lightsP.5-76, 9-27, 9-30

Parking lightsP.5-74, 9-27

Halogen headlights type Bi-xenon High intensity discharge (HID) headlights type


Outside

Overview 1-6

1

High-mounted stop light P.9-27

Rear spoiler

Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) P.5-56Changing tires P.8-6Size of tires and wheels P.11-6Tire inflation pressure P.9-15Tire rotation P.9-17Tire chains P.9-18

Rear window wiper and washer P.5-79

Liftgate P.5-27

Rear side- marker lights P.5-74, 9-27, 9-32

Rear turn signal lightsP.5-76, 9-27, 9-32

License plate lightsP.5-74, 9-27, 9-33

Back-up lights P.9-27, 9-32

Tail and stop lights P.5-74, 9-27, 9-32



2-1

2

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index

N00200702263


NOTE These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

Charging system warning light

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-tance.

P. 5-73

(Illuminates and intermittent sounds)

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-tance.

P. 5-14

Oil pressure warning light

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil level.If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-73



2-2 Quick index

2 or

Brake warning light

If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.

If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check the brake fluid level.

If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.

P. 5-71

Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes rapidly

(once per second)

Park your vehicle in a safe place.Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.If the indicator does not go off, have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-42

or

Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or

“Check engine light”)

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local towing company for assistance.

P. 5-72

Electric power steering system (EPS) warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-49




Quick index 2-3

2

Anti-lock braking system warning light

When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only the ordinary braking system is functioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Test the system as described on page 5-48.

If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

P. 5-48

SRS warning light

Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. P. 4-27

Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly

(every 2 seconds)

Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible. P. 5-42

and

ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.

P. 5-51




2-4 Quick index

2

ASC indicator

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.

If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.

When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.

P. 5-46

Tire pressure monitoring system warn-ing light (if so equipped)

If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.)Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.

If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

P. 5-56



If this problem occurs...

Quick index 2-5

2N00200901981


Problem Do this Ref. PageUnable to turn the key.(except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

From “ACC” to “OFF”Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):Check the position of the selector lever.The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.

P. 5-35

The engine does not start when the engine switch is pressed.(for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.Vehicles with manual transaxle:Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way down, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.

Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.

P. 5-16

The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-ate.(for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or change the operation mode.

P. 5-18, 5-19



2-6 Quick index

2 Cannot shift the selector lever from the “P” (PARK) position.(for vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT))

Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON. P. 5-39

The windows are fogged up.Vehicles equipped with the heater without air conditioning function or the manual air conditioning:

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.2. Turn on the blower.

Vehicles equipped with the automatic air conditioning:Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode.

P. 7-6, 7-10, 7-14

The engine does not start.The lights do not come on.The lights are dim.The horn does not honk.The horn sound is weak.

Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed. P. 8-2, P. 9-10

The high coolant temperature warning light is illuminated.

Steam comes out of the engine compartment.

The engine is overheated.Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place. P. 8-4

Problem Do this Ref. Page



Quick index 2-7

2The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-13

WARNINGWhen attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to

suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.

If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

Problem Do this Ref. PageThe brakes are not functioning properly after crossing a puddle or stream.

Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5

The continuously variable trans-mission (CVT) makes no shift change when accelerating. The initial movement of the vehicle is slow when the vehicle starts moving.(for vehicles with CVT)

There may be a problem in the CVT.Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

P. 5-42

A tire is punctured.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire. P. 8-6

Problem Do this Ref. Page



3

General information

Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7


Fuel selection

3-2 General information

3

N00301000912

Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas-oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tankfiller pipe specifically designed to accept onlya small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-ing nozzle.

In the United States, fuel suppliers arerequired by law to add detergents to their gas-

oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging andminimize intake-valve deposits. Detergentgasoline helps keep your engine in tune andyour emission-control system working prop-erly.

Your vehicle is designed to operate onunleaded gasoline having a minimum octanenumber of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.

Gasoline sold at some service stations con-tains oxygenates such as ethanol, althoughthe oxygenates may not be identified by thosenames. Oxygenates are required in someareas of the country. Such fuel can be used inyour vehicle.

A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be usedin your vehicle, provided the octane numberis at least as high as that recommended forunleaded gasoline.

Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using thistype of alcohol could adversely affect thevehicle’s performance and damage criticalparts of the vehicle’s fuel system.

Many areas of the country require the use ofcleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-lated Gasoline”.Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenatesand is specially blended to reduce vehicleemissions and improve air quality.Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-erly blended reformulated gasoline has noadverse effect on vehicle performance or thedurability of the engine and fuel system.

MMT is a manganese-containing metallicadditive that is blended into some gasolinesto increase the octane number. MitsubishiMotors Corporation recommends using gaso-lines without MMT.

Fuel selection

WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and explo-

sive. You could be burned, seriouslyinjured or killed when handling it. When-ever you refuel your vehicle, stop theengine and keep flames, sparks, andsmoking materials away from the vehicle.Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-door areas.

CAUTIONUsing leaded gasoline in your vehicle will

damage the engine, catalytic converter, andthe oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso-line is illegal, and will void your warrantycoverage of the engine, catalytic converter,and oxygen sensors.

Gasoline detergent additives

Octane requirement

Oxygenated gasoline

Ethanol (Gasohol)

Methanol

Reformulated gasoline

MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl)


Filling the fuel tank

General information 3-3

3

Use of gasolines blended with MMT mayadversely affect performance, and cause themalfunction indicator on your instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens, contact anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice for assistance.

Your vehicle may have been designed to sat-isfy California’s low-emission regulationsbased on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.Gasoline sold in parts of the country otherthan California is allowed to have a highersulfur content. Using such gasoline couldadversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-tion of this indicator while using high-sulfurgasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi-cle’s emission-control system is malfunction-ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer may suggest using a different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter-mine if the problem is fuel-related.

N00301100913

Sulfur in gasoline

NOTE Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling during idling,abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-tion. If you experience any of these prob-lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check enginelight”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected assoon as possible by the nearest authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice.

Repeatedly driving short distances at lowspeeds can cause deposits to form in the fuelsystem and engine, resulting in hard startingand poor acceleration. If these problemsoccur, you are advised to add a detergentadditive to the gasoline when you refuel thevehicle. The additive will remove the depos-its, thereby returning the engine to a normalcondition. Be sure to use a MitsubishiMotors Genuine cleaning additive. Using anunsuitable additive could make an enginemalfunction. For details, please contact thenearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.


WARNINGWhen handling fuel, comply with the

safety regulations displayed by garagesand filling stations.

Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-sive. You could be burned, seriouslyinjured or killed when handling it. Whenrefueling your vehicle, always turn theengine off and keep away from flames,sparks, and smoking materials. Alwayshandle fuel in well-ventilated outdoorareas.

Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,be sure to get rid of your body’s staticelectricity by touching a metal part of thecar or fuel pump. Any static electricity onyour body could create a spark thatignites fuel vapor.

Perform the whole refueling process(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-self; do not let any other person near thefuel tank filler. If you allowed a person tohelp you and that person was carryingstatic electricity, fuel vapor could beignited.

Do not move away from the fuel tank filleruntil refueling is finished. If you movedaway and did something else (for example,sitting on a seat) part-way through therefueling process, you could pick up afresh charge of static electricity.

Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuelcontains toxic substances.

Keep the doors and windows closed whilerefueling the vehicle. If they were open,fuel vapor could get into the cabin.

WARNING




39.2 gal (35 L)

1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear

driver side of your vehicle.The fuel tank filler door can be openedfrom inside the vehicle with the fuel tankfiller door release lever located at the leftside of the driver’s seat.

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowlyturning the fuel tank filler cap counter-clockwise.

4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tankfiller cap cord on the hook located on theinside surface of the fuel tank filler door.

5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainlyon correct handling of the fuel filler noz-zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as itgoes.

6. When the nozzle stops automatically, donot add more fuel.

Fuel tank capacity

Refueling

1- Remove2- Close

WARNING Since the fuel system may be under pres-

sure, remove the fuel tank filler capslowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-uum that might have built up in the fueltank. If the fuel tank filler cap is ventingvapor or if you hear a hissing sound, waituntil the sound stops before removing thefuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out, injuring you or others.

CAUTIONYour vehicle can only be operated using

unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-lytic converter damage will result if leadedgasoline is filled into these vehicles, andconsequently, this must never be attempted.


Modifications to and racing of your vehicle


3

7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler capslowly clockwise until you hear clickingsounds, then gently push the fuel tankfiller door closed.

N00301600194

This vehicle should not be modified withnon-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactureshigh quality vehicles with an emphasis onsafety and durability. Modifications usingnon-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts mayaffect the performance, safety and/or durabil-ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-ble state and/or federal regulations.

DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVEREDUNDER WARRANTY.

Examples of modifications to your vehiclethat can cause damage or performance prob-lems include the following:

Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuineparts

Failure to use required fuel and fluidsFailure to use proper size tires and wheelsModification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,

emission, suspension, engine, drive trainor electrical wiring systems

Modification of any onboard com-puter/control module, including repro-gramming, or replacing/adding chips toany onboard computer/control module

Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-ual for further details regarding warranty cov-erage.

N00301700212

CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not

“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel coulddiscolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe itoff with a soft cloth.

WARNINGMake sure the fuel tank filler cap is

securely closed. If the fuel tank filler capwere loose, fuel could leak, resulting in afire.

CAUTION If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,

use only the fuel tank filler cap specified foryour model vehicle.

NOTE If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while

driving, the engine malfunction indicator(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Checkengine light”) may come on when theonboard diagnostic (OBD) system performsa self check.Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap untilyou hear at least 3 clicks.The indicator will go off after several drivingcycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice assoon as possible.

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

Installation of accessories

CAUTIONBefore any electrical or electronic accesso-

ries are installed, consult an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.


Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts


3

The installation of accessories, optionalparts, etc., should only be performedwithin the limits prescribed by law, and inaccordance with the guidelines and warn-ings contained within the documentsaccompanying this vehicle.Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-sories should be fitted to your vehicle.

Improper installation of electrical partscould cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica-tion/alterations to the electrical or fuelsystems” section within this owner’s man-ual.

Using a cellular phone or radio set insidethe vehicle without an external antennamay cause electrical system interference,which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-tion.

Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-ifications must not be used.Refer to the “Specifications” section forinformation regarding wheel and tiresizes.

Due to the large number of accessory andreplacement parts provided by different man-ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer to check whether the attachment orinstallation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-ine parts affects the driving safety of yourMitsubishi-vehicle.

N00301800183

Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high qualityvehicles with an emphasis on safety. It isimportant to consult an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer before installation of any

accessory which may involve modification ofthe electrical or fuel systems.

N00301400219

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts aredesigned and manufactured to meet high stan-dards of performance, and are recommendedfor all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer area wide variety of accessories to personalizeyour new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motorsvehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motorsauthorized accessories to choose from to tai-lor your new vehicle to your own personalpreference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’sParts Manager has information on variousaudio systems, protection items, as well asinterior and exterior accessories available foryour specific model.

WARNINGWhile driving, do not use a cellular phone

in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-thing, including cellular phone usage, thatdistracts you from the safe operation ofyour vehicle increases your risk of an acci-dent.Refer to and follow all state and local lawsin your area regarding cellular phoneusage while driving.

Important point!

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems

CAUTION Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer concerning any such acces-sory fitment or modification.If the wires interfere with the vehicle body orimproper installation methods are used (pro-tective fuses not included, etc.), electronicdevices may be adversely affected, resultingin a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.



California Perchlorate Materials Requirements


3N00300100017

Certain components of this vehicle, such asairbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, andbutton cell batteries, may contain perchloratematerials.Special handling may apply. For additionalinformation, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-waste/perchlorate.

California Perchlorate Materials Requirements



4

Seat and restraint systems

Seats .................................................................................................4-2Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2Front seats ........................................................................................4-3Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5Head restraints .................................................................................4-7Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-13Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-21Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-21


Seats

4-2 Seat and restraint systems

4

N00408400509

To adjust the seat forward or back-wardPage 4-3

To adjust the seatbacks Page 4-4To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat

only, if so equipped) Page 4-4Heated seats (if so equipped) Page 4-4

Folding the seatbacks forward Page 4-6

N00401601235

Your vehicle has seat belts and other safetyfeatures that help protect you and your pas-sengers in an accident.Seat belts are the most important safetydevice. When worn properly, seat belts canreduce the chance of serious injury or deathin various types of crashes. For added protec-tion during a severe frontal collision, yourvehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-gers. The seats, head restraints, and door

locks also are safety equipment, which mustbe used correctly.

Always check the following before you drive:

That everyone in your vehicle is properlywearing their seat belt.

That infants and small children are prop-erly secured in an appropriate childrestraint system in the rear seat.

That all doors are fully closed and locked.That seatbacks are upright, with head

restraints properly adjusted.

Seats

1 - Front seats

2 - Rear seats

Seats and restraint systems


Front seats

Seat and restraint systems 4-3

4

Safety equipment cannot prevent injury ordeath in all motor vehicle accidents. How-ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury ordeath by following the instructions in thismanual.

N00401800403

Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-ble while maintaining a position that stillenables you to fully apply the pedals, easilycontrol the steering wheel and safely operatethe vehicle.

N00401900316

Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide theseat forward or backward to the desired posi-tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock theseat in place.

WARNINGDo not place objects under the seats. This

could prevent the seat from lockingsecurely, and it could lead to an accident.It may also cause damage to the seat orother parts.

Front seats

WARNINGDo not attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident.

After adjusting the seat, make sure thatseat is securely locked into position.

To reduce the risk to the driver of seriousinjury or death during deployment of thedriver’s airbag, always properly wear theseat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as farback as possible while maintaining a posi-tion that still enables you to fully apply thepedals, easily control the steering wheel,and safely operate the vehicle.

To reduce the risk to the front passengerof serious injury or death during deploy-ment of the passenger’s airbag, alwaysproperly wear the seat belt and adjust thefront passenger’s seat as far back as possi-ble.

Always place children 12 years old andunder in the rear seat and use appropriatechild restraint systems.

CAUTIONMake sure that the seat is adjusted by an

adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-pected accident might occur.

Do not place a cushion or the like betweenyour back and the seatback while driving.The effectiveness of the head restraints willbe reduced in the event of an accident.

When sliding the seats, be careful not tocatch your hand or leg.

When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-gers.

To adjust the seat forward or backward

WARNINGTo make sure that the seat is securely

locked, try to move it forward or back-ward without using the adjusting lever.

CAUTION


Front seats


4

N00402000369

To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,gently pull the seatback lock lever up, thenlean backward to a comfortable position andrelease the lever. The seatback will lock inplace.

N00402100243

To adjust the seat height, turn the dial asshown in the illustration.

N00435601418

The heated seats can be operated by pushingthe switch when the ignition switch or theoperation mode is in ON. The indicator light(A) will illuminate while the heater is on.

To adjust the seatbacks

CAUTION The reclining mechanism used in the seat-

back is spring loaded, and will cause theseatback to return quickly to the verticalposition when the lock lever is operated.When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-back or hold the seatback with your hand tocontrol its return motion.

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sud-den stop, all seatbacks should be kept inthe upright position while the vehicle is inmotion.Seat belt performance during an accidentcan be adversely affected if the seatbacksare reclined. The more a seatback isreclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-mance will be adversely affected. If theseat belt is not properly positioned againstthe body during an accident, there isincreased risk you will slide under the beltand receive serious injury or death.

To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat only, if so equipped)

1- To move the seat cushion up2- To move the seat cushion down

Heated seats (if so equipped)


Rear seats


4

N00402500221

1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)2 - Heater off3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat

warm)

WARNING Persons who are unable to feel tempera-

ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,fatigue or other physical conditions orwho have sensitive skin may suffer burnswhen using the heated seat even at lowtemperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,people with such conditions must use carewhen using the heated seat.

CAUTION Switch off the heated seats when not in use.

Operate the heaters at the “HI” position forquick heating. After the seat has becomewarm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in theseat temperature may be felt while using theheated seats. This is caused by the operationof the heater’s internal thermostat and doesnot indicate a malfunction.

Do not place heavy objects on the seat orstick pins, needles, or other pointed objectsinto the seat.

Do not place a blanket, cushion, or otherinsulating material on the seat while usingthe heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-ment to overheat.

When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organicsolvents; doing so can cause damage notonly to the surface of the seat, but also to theheater.

If water or any other liquid is spilled on theseat, allow it to dry thoroughly beforeattempting to use the heater. Turn the heateroff immediately if it appears to be malfunc-tioning during use.

Rear seats

WARNINGNever adjust the seats to make a cargo

area when the vehicle is in motion or on aslope. The seats could move more thannecessary or move suddenly causing aserious accident and/or injury.

After folding down a seat or returning aseat back to its original position, makesure the seat is firmly secured. Also checkto make sure that the seat belts are infront of the seatbacks, and not caughtbehind the seatbacks. If the seat is notsecured, it could move causing a seriousaccident and/or injury.

Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea while the vehicle is in motion. Peoplewho are not properly seated andrestrained can be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

The cargo area in the rear of the vehicleshould never be used as a play area bychildren. All children should be properlyrestrained in a restraint device that offersthe maximum protection for their size andage. Refer to “Child restraint systems” onpage 4-14.


Rear seats


4

N00402901222

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward toprovide additional luggage compartmentspace.

1. Place each head restraint in its lowestposition. (Refer to “Head restraints” onpage 4-7.)

2. Make sure that the seat belt for the out-board seating position is passed throughthe seat belt guide strap (A) and the seatbelt guide is fastened as shown in theillustration.

3. Pull the left or right release straps (B), andfold the rear seatbacks forward.

1. Make sure that the seat belt for the out-board seating position is passed throughthe seat belt guide or the seat belt latchplate for the outboard seating position isstored.

2. Raise the seatback until it locks securelyinto place.After returning the seatback to its normalposition, gently shake the seat and seat-back to make sure they are firmly secured.

CAUTION In the cargo area, do not load luggage or

cargo higher than the top of the seats andmake sure that it is firmly secured. Restrictedrear vision or flying objects entering the pas-senger compartment during sudden brakingcould result in a serious accident and/orinjury.

Seatbacks should always be folded and putback into their normal position by an adult.

When adjusting the seats, be careful not tocatch your hand. Personal injury couldresult.

Folding the seatbacks forward

To fold

NOTE If the seat belt interferes with luggage, unfas-

ten the seat belt guide to release the seat beltand store the seat belt latch plate as shown inthe illustration.

To return


Head restraints


4

N00404300584

Padded head restraints for the seats canreduce the risk of a whiplash injury if yourvehicle is hit from the rear.The head restraints are equipped in the illus-trated position.To maximize the effectiveness of your headrestraint, adjust the front seatback to theupright position, the rear seatback to the nor-mal seating position, and the head restraint tothe proper position. Sit back against the seat-back with your head close to the headrestraint.

To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,adjust the head restraint height so that thecenter of the restraint is at your ear levelwhen seated. Any person too tall for therestraint to reach their ear level when seatedshould raise the restraint to the highest lockedposition.

To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.To lower the restraint, push down on it

while pressing the lock knob (A) in thedirection shown by the arrow.

After adjusting the height, push down onthe restraint to make sure it is locked inposition.

WARNINGAfter returning the seatbacks to their

upright positions, make sure that the seat-backs are locked in place and firmly.Also check to be sure that the rear seatbelts are in front of the seatbacks, and notcaught behind the seatbacks.

CAUTIONDo not grab the seat belt guide to raise the

seatback; doing so can cause damage of theseat belt guide and the seatback.

Head restraints

WARNINGDriving without the head restraints in

place can cause you and your passengersserious injury or death in an accident. Toreduce the risk of injury in an accident,always make sure the head restraints areinstalled and properly positioned whenthe seat is occupied.

In order to minimize the risk of a neckinjury due to a rear impact, the front seat-back must be adjusted to the upright posi-tion, the rear seatback to the normalseating position, and the head restraint tothe proper position before vehicle opera-tion. The driver should never adjust theseat while the vehicle is in motion.

Never place a cushion or similar device onthe seatback. This can adversely affecthead restraint performance by increasingthe distance between your head and therestraint.

Adjustment of the head restraint height


Seat belts


4

Press the lock knob (A) in the directionshown by the arrows. Then pull the headrestraint up and out of the seatback.

First check that the head restraint is facing inthe right direction as shown in the previousillustration, and then insert it into the seat-back. Push the head restraint down while

pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraintlocks into place.

N00406001481

Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to helpreduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-senger in the event of an accident. Alwaysuse the provided seat belts.Carefully review the following informationfor proper seat belt usage.

To remove

WARNINGTo help minimize the risk of neck injury in

the event of an accident, the headrestraints must be properly installed andpositioned to proper height before vehicleoperation.

To install

CAUTIONCheck that the lock knob (A) is extended out

as shown in the illustration. Then pull thehead restraint up to make sure that it islocked in place and will not come out of theseatback.

CAUTION The shape and size of the head restraint dif-

fers according to the seat. Always use thecorrect head restraint provided for the seatand do not install the head restraint in thewrong direction.

Seat belts

WARNINGTo help reduce the risk of injury or death

in an accident, seat belts and childrestraint systems must always be used.Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page4-14 for additional information.

Never use one seat belt for more than oneperson.

Never carry more people in your vehiclethan there are seat belts.

Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.


Seat belts


4

N00406200460

All seats are equipped with a seat belt whichuses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt withan emergency locking retractor.

This system is designed to provide both com-fort and safety. It permits full extension andautomatic retraction of the belts during nor-mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

inside the belt retractor is designed to lock theretractor in the event of a sudden change inthe vehicle’s motion.

1. Occupants should always sit back in theirseats with their backs against the uprightseatback. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death during deployment of theairbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far backas possible while maintaining a positionthat still enables you to fully apply thepedals, easily control the steering wheel,and safely operate the vehicle. The frontpassenger seat should also be moved asfar back as possible. Refer to “Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”on page 4-21. Also refer to “To adjust theseat forward or backward” on page 4-3.

Always place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never putit behind you or under your arm.

Always wear the lap belt as low as possibleacross your hips, not around your waist.

Never modify or alter the seat belts inyour vehicle.

To reduce the risk to the driver of seriousinjury or death during deployment of thedriver’s airbag, always properly wear theseat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as farback as possible while maintaining a posi-tion that still enables you to fully apply thepedals, easily control the steering wheel,and safely operate the vehicle.

To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-ger of serious injury or death from adeploying airbag, make sure the passengeralways wears the seat belt properly,remains seated all the way back andupright in their seat, and moves the seat asfar back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen-tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” onpage 4-21 for additional information.

Never hold an infant or child in your armsor on your lap when riding in this vehicleeven when you are wearing your seat belt.Never place any part of the seat belt youare wearing around an infant or child.Failure to follow these simple instructionscreates a risk of serious injury or death toyour child in the event of an accident orsudden stop.

WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under should

always ride in the rear seat and be prop-erly restrained. This reduces their risk ofserious injury or death in an accident,especially due to a deploying front passen-ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-tems” on page 4-14 for additionalinformation.

Any child who is too small to properlywear a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in an appropriate childrestraint system.

Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facingchild safety seat and positioned in the rearseat.

In the event of an accident, all seat beltassemblies, including retractors andattachment hardware, should be inspectedby an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer to determine whether replacementis necessary.

Seat belt instructions

WARNING

NOTE For instructions on installing a child restraint

system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing achild restraint system using the seat belt” onpage 4-19.


Seat belts


4

2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up thewebbing so that it easily pulls across yourbody.

3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holdingthe latch plate. Push the latch plate intothe buckle until you hear a “click”. Pullup on the belt to be sure the latch plate islocked securely in the buckle.

4. The lap part of the belt must always beworn low and snug across the hips. Pullup on the shoulder portion of the belt totake up any slack in the lap belt.


death in the event of an accident or sud-den stop, all seatbacks should be kept inthe upright position while the vehicle is inmotion.Seat belt performance during an accidentcan be adversely affected if the seatbacksare reclined. The more a seatback isreclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-mance will be adversely affected. If theseat belt is not properly positioned againstthe body during an accident, there isincreased risk you will slide under the beltand receive serious injury or death.

NOTE If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled

out, pull it once with force and let it retractall the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

NOTEWith the exception of the seat belt for the

driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull theseat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-tor will switch to its ALR child restraintinstallation function (see page 4-19).When the ALR function has been activated,the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,let the belt fully retract, then pull the seatbelt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.


Seat belts


4

5. To release the belt, press the button on thebuckle and allow the belt to retract.If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull itout and check for kinks or twists in thewebbing. Then make sure it remainsuntwisted as it retracts.

N00418400384

A tone and warning light are used to remindthe driver to fasten the seat belt.

If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the operation mode is put in ONwithout the driver’s seat belt being fastened, awarning light will come on and a tone willsound for approximately 6 seconds to remindyou to fasten your seat belt.If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt stillunfastened, the warning light will blink andthe tone will sound intermittently until theseat belt is fastened.

N00418300237

The front passenger seat belt warning light islocated at shown in the illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is put inON, this indicator normally comes on andgoes off a few seconds later.The light comes on when a person sits on thefront passenger seat but does not fasten the

WARNINGBe sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and

is worn as low as possible across the hips,not around the waist. Failure to follow thisinstruction will increase the risk of seriousinjury or death in the event of an accident.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is nottwisted when worn. Twisted webbing mayadversely affect seat belt performance.

Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light

WARNING In order to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident, always fas-ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-one to ride in your vehicle unless he or sheis also seated and fastening a seat belt.Children should additionally be restrainedin a secure child restraint system.

NOTE If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-

tened, the warning light and the tone willissue further warnings each time the vehiclestarts moving from a stop.

Front passenger seat belt warn-ing light


Seat belts


4

seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-sequently fastened.

N00406300357

The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A)and slide the anchor to the desired position.Release the lock knob to lock the anchor intoposition.

N00406700205

If your seat belt is not long enough, evenwhen fully extended, a seat belt extendermust be obtained. The extender may be usedfor either of the front seats.

WARNINGWhen a child booster seat is used on the

front passenger seat, the front passengerseat belt warning light will not come on, ifthe seat belt is not fastened when thebooster seat is used. Confirm that thechild is wearing the seat belt properly.

Do not install any accessory or sticker thatmakes the light difficult to see.

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor (front seats)

WARNINGAlways adjust the shoulder belt anchor so

that the shoulder belt is positioned acrossthe center of your shoulder without touch-ing your neck. The shoulder belt shouldnot be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-ure to follow this instruction can adverselyaffect seat belt performance and increasethe risk of serious injury or death in theevent of an accident.

Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only whenthe vehicle is not in motion.

Make sure the anchor is securely locked inposition after adjusting it.

Seat belt extender

WARNINGThe extender should only be used if the

existing belt is not long enough. Anyonewho can use the standard seat belt shouldnot use an extender. Unnecessary use of anextender can adversely affect seat beltperformance in an accident.

When not required, the extender must beremoved and stowed.


Seat belt use during pregnancy


4

N00406800147

Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-nant women. Like all occupants, pregnantwomen are more likely to be seriously injuredor killed in an accident if they do not wearseat belts.

N00417701752

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats eachhave a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensionersystem and force limiter system.

The driver and front passenger seat belts areequipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or sidecollision or when a rollover or overturning ofthe vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-ment of the front airbags, side airbags orcurtain airbags.The seat belt pre-tensioners are located withinthe seat belt retractors (A). When activated,the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat beltwebbing and increase seat belt performance.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system includesthe following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readinessof the electronic parts of the system wheneverthe ignition switch or the operation mode isunder the following conditions. These includeall of the items listed above and all relatedwiring.[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or“START” position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]The operation mode is in ON.

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operateunder the same conditions as the airbag con-trol unit.

Seat belt use during preg-nancy


death to pregnant women and unbornchildren in an accident, pregnant womenshould always wear a seat belt. The lapportion of the seat belt should be wornsnug and low across the hips and belowthe rounding. Consult your doctor if youhave any additional questions or concerns.

Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems

Pre-tensioner system

1- SRS warning light2- Front impact sensors3- Seat belt pre-tensioner4- Side impact sensors5- Airbag control unit


Child restraint systems


4

When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,some smoke is released and a loud noise willbe heard. The smoke is not harmful, but careshould be taken not to intentionally inhale it,as it may cause some temporary irritation topeople with respiratory problems.The pre-tensioners activate in the event of amoderate-to-severe front or side impact, evenif the seat belt is not being worn. The seat beltpre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-lisions, even though the vehicle may appearto be severely damaged. Such non-activationdoes not mean that something is wrong withthe seat belt pre-tensioner system, but ratherthat the collision forces were not severeenough to activate the system.

N00408700137

This warning light tells you if there is a prob-lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seatbelt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS

warning light” on page 4-27.

N00408900142

In the event of an accident, the seat belt forcelimiter system will help reduce the forceapplied to the driver and front seat passenger.

N00407101753

When transporting infants or small childrenin your vehicle, an appropriate child restraintsystem must always be used. This is requiredby law in the U.S. and Canada.Child restraint systems specifically designedfor infants and small children are offered byseveral manufacturers. Choose only a childrestraint system with a label certifying that itcomplies with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor VehicleRestraint Systems and Booster Seats SafetyRegulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-turer’s statement of compliance on the boxand child restraint system itself.

The child restraint system should be appropri-ate for your child’s weight and height, andshould properly fit your vehicle’s seat.For detailed information, refer to the instruc-tion manual accompanying the child restraintsystem.

All children should be properly restrained ina restraint device that offers the maximumprotection for their size and age.Be sure to check local, state, or provincialrequirements for child size and age that mayvary from the recommendations listed below.

Children less than 1 year old and whoweigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUSTride in a rear-facing child safety seat thatMUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.

Children older than 1 year of age and whoweigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or whoare less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall mustbe in a forward-facing restraint used onlyin the rear seat.

Children who weigh more than 40 pounds(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, shoulduse a suitable child seat or a booster seatin the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-shoulder belt fits them properly.

WARNINGThe seat belt pre-tensioner system is

designed to work only once. After the seatbelt pre-tensioners have been activated,they will not work again. They mustpromptly be replaced and the entire seatbelt pre-tensioner system inspected by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

SRS warning light

Force limiter system


Guidelines for child restraint system selection




4

WARNINGAll children must be seated in the rear

seat, and properly restrained.Accident statistics show that children ofall sizes and ages are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat, rather than inthe front seat.

Be sure to select a child restraint systemthat is appropriate not only for the child’ssize and age but also for your vehicle.Some child restraint systems may not fityour vehicle properly.

Any child who is too large to use a childrestraint system should ride in the rearseat and wear the lap-and-shoulder beltproperly. The shoulder belt must be posi-tioned over the shoulder and across thechest, not across their neck, and with thelap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,not across their stomach. If necessary, abooster seat should be used to help achievea proper seat belt fit. Follow the boosterseat manufacturer’s instructions. Only usea booster seat that is certified as comply-ing with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-tions.

Never hold an infant or child in your armsor on your lap when riding in this vehicle,even when you are wearing your seat belt.Never place any part of the seat belt youare wearing around an infant or child.Failure to follow these simple instructionscreates a risk of serious injury or death toyour child in the event of an accident orsudden stop.

WARNING WARNINGYour vehicle is also equipped with a front

passenger’s airbag.Never put REAR-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANTRESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-senger seat. This places the infant tooclose to the passenger’s airbag. Duringdeployment of that airbag, the infant canbe seriously injured or killed. Rear-facingchild restraint systems or infant restraintsystems must only be used in the rear seat.

Airbag




4

WARNING FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seatwhenever possible. If one must be used inthe front passenger seat, move the seat tothe most rearward position and make surethe child stays in the child restraint sys-tem, properly restrained. Failure to followthese instructions could result in seriousinjury or death to the child.

WARNING It is important to use an approved rear-

facing infant restraint until the infant isone year old (unless the infant outgrowsthe seat sooner). This allows the infant’sneck and spine to develop enough to sup-port the weight of their head in the eventof an accident.

When installing a child restraint system,follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer and follow the directions inthis manual. Failure to do so can result inserious injury or death to your child in anaccident or sudden stop.

After installation, push and pull the childrestraint system back and forth, and sideto side, to see that it is firmly secured. Ifthe child restraint system is not installedsecurely, it may cause injury to the childor other occupants in the event of an acci-dent or sudden stop.

When not in use, keep your child restraintsystem secured with the seat belt, orremove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-vent it from being thrown around insidethe vehicle during an accident.

WARNING NOTEBefore purchasing a child restraint system,

try installing it in the rear seat to ensureproper fit. Due to the location of the seat beltbuckles and the shape of the seat cushion, itmay be difficult to securely install somemanufacturer’s child restraint systems.If the child restraint system can be pulledforward or to either side easily on the seatcushion after the seat belt has been tightened,choose another manufacturer’s child restraintsystem.Depending on the seating position in thevehicle and the child restraint system thatyou have, the child restraint system can beattached using one of the following 2 meth-ods:• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear

seat ONLY if the child restraint system iscompatible with the LATCH system (Seepage 4-17).

• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-19).




4N00418800157

The outboard seating positions in the rear seatof your vehicle are equipped with loweranchors for attaching child restraint systemscompatible with the LATCH system.

N00418900190

Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on theback of the rear seatbacks. These are forsecuring a child restraint system tether strapto each of the 3 rear seating positions in yourvehicle.

N00419000202

N00419100232

1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,remove the head restraint from the loca-tion where you wish to install the childrestraint system.

2. Open the gap a little between the seatcushion (A) and the seatback (B) withyour hand to locate the lower anchors (C).

Installing a child restraint sys-tem using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for chil-dren) system

Lower anchor locations

Tether anchor locations

NOTE The attachments points are behind slits on

the seatback backboard cloth.

Examples of child restraint sys-tems compatible with the LATCH system

A- Rear-facing child restraint systemB- Front-facing child restraint systemC- Child restraint system lower anchor

connectorsD- Tether strap

(These are only examples.)

Using the LATCH system




4

3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on thechild restraint system into the loweranchors (C) in accordance with theinstructions provided by the child restraintsystem manufacturer.Remember, the lower anchors providedwith your vehicle are designed to securesuitable child restraint systems compat-ible with the LATCH system in the out-board positions of the rear seats only.The anchor connectors are NOTdesigned to secure a suitable childrestraint system in the center positionof the rear seat.

4. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelfpanel, remove the rear shelf panel fromthe vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel”on page 5-110.)

5. Open the slit on the backboard cloth of theseatback, latch the tether strap hook (E) ofthe child restraint system to the tetheranchor bar (F) and tighten the tether strapso it is securely fastened.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system inall directions to ensure it is firmlysecured.

A- Vehicle seat cushion B- Vehicle seatbackC- Lower anchorD- Connector

NOTE In order to secure a child restraint system

compatible with the LATCH system, youmust use the lower anchor points in the out-board positions of the rear seat. To secure achild restraint system in the center positionof the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’scenter seat belt.

WARNING If there is any foreign material in or

around the lower anchors, remove itbefore installing the child restraint sys-tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is awayfrom, not looped through or otherwiseinterfering with, the child restraint sys-tem. If foreign matter is not removedand/or the seat belt interferes with thechild restraint system, the child restraintsystem will not be secured properly, coulddetach and move forward in the event ofsudden braking or an accident, and couldresult in injury to the child or other vehi-cle occupants.

When the vehicle is moving, do not adjustthe seat where the child restraint system isinstalled.

WARNINGChild restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-rectly fitted child restraint systems. Underno circumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehi-cle.




4N00407300455

With the exception of the driver, the seat beltin all other seating positions can be convertedfrom normal Emergency Locking Retractor(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR) mode. This means that when you pullthe seat belt fully out of the retractor, theretractor will switch to its ALR child restraintinstallation function. Always use the ALRchild restraint installation function when youinstall a child restraint system using the seatbelt.

Children 12 years old and under shouldalways be restrained in the rear seat, when-ever possible, although the front passengerseat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.

1. Place the child restraint system on the seatwhere you wish to install it.To help assure proper fitting of the childrestraint system, always remove the headrestraint.

2. Route the seat belt through the childrestraint system according to the instruc-tions provided by the child restraint sys-tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seatbelt latch plate into the buckle. Make sureyou hear a “click” when you insert thelatch plate into the buckle.

3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-lation function, slowly pull the shoulderpart of the belt all the way out of theretractor until it stops. Then let the beltfeed back into the retractor.

4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.

Installing a child restraint sys-tem using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking mechanism)

WARNINGWhen you install a child restraint system

using the seat belt, always make sure theretractor has been switched to the ALRchild restraint installation function. TheALR function will keep the child restraintsystem tightly secured to the seat.Failure to convert the retractor to theALR function may allow the childrestraint system to move forward duringsudden braking or an accident, resultingin serious injury or death to the child orother occupants.

Installation




4

If the belt is in the ALR function, you willnot be able to pull it out. If the webbingcan be pulled out from retractor, the ALRfunction has not been activated and youwill need to repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. After confirming that the belt is locked,grab the shoulder part of the belt near thebuckle and pull up to remove any slackfrom the lap part of the belt allowing theslack to feed into the retractor. Remember,if the lap belt portion is not tight, the childrestraint system will not be secure. It mayhelp to put your weight on the childrestraint system and/or push on its seat-back while pulling up on the belt (Seeillustration).

6. On a vehicle equipped with a rear shelfpanel, remove the rear shelf panel fromthe vehicle. (Refer to “Rear shelf panel”on page 5-110.)

7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of thechild restraint system to the tether anchorbar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it issecurely fastened.

8. Before putting your child in the restraint,push and pull the restraint in all directionsto be sure it is firmly secure. Do thisbefore each use. If the child restraint sys-tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1through 7.

9. To remove a child restraint system fromthe vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,remove the child from the restraint.Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the beltfrom the restraint and let the belt fullyretract.

10. Reinstall the head restraint.Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.

N00407601631

Children who have outgrown a child restraintsystem should be seated in the rear seat andwear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crossestheir face or neck, and/or the lap belt crossestheir stomach, a commercially availablebooster seat must be used to raise the child sothat the shoulder belt crosses their shoulderand the lap belt remains positioned lowacross their hips. The booster seat should fitthe vehicle seat and have a label certifyingcompliance with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint

If your child restraint system requires the useof a tether strap, fasten the tether strap inaccordance with the following procedures.

WARNINGChild restraint system tether anchors are

designed only to withstand loads from cor-rectly fitted child restraint systems. Underno circumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehi-cle.

Children who have outgrown child restraint systems


Maintenance and inspection of seat belts


4

Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-tions.

N00407000364

The seat belt webbing may be cleaned withmild soap or detergent solution. Do not use anorganic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in theshade. Do not allow them to retract until com-pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts. The color may rub off and thewebbing strength may be affected.

Regularly check your seat belt buckles andtheir release mechanisms for positive engage-ment and release of the latch plate. Check theretractors for automatic locking when in theAutomatic Locking Retractor function.

The entire seat belt assembly should bereplaced if the webbing shows any obviouscuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-tion of the webbing from broken fibers, orsevere fading from sunlight. All of these con-ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-mance in an accident.

N00407701850

This vehicle is equipped with a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS), which includes air-bags for the driver and passengers.

The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-ment the primary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems by provid-ing those occupants with protection againsthead and chest injuries in certain moderate tosevere frontal collisions. The SRS front air-bags, together with sensors at the front of thevehicle and sensors attached to the frontseats, form an advanced airbag system.

The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed tosupplement the primary protection of thedriver’s seat belt system. It can reduce theforward movement of the driver’s lower legsand provide increased overall body protectionin certain moderate to severe frontal colli-sions.

The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbagsare also designed to supplement the seat belts.The SRS side airbags provide the driver andfront passenger with protection against chestinjuries by deploying the bag on the sideimpacted in moderate to severe side impactcollisions. The SRS curtain airbags providethe driver and passengers on the front seatand rear outboard seat with protection againsthead injuries by deploying the curtain airbagon the side impacted in moderate to severeside impact collisions and by deploying bothcurtain airbags when a rollover is detected.The curtain airbags are also designed to helpreduce the risk of complete and partial ejec-

WARNINGAny child who is too small to properly

wear a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in an appropriate childrestraint system, to reduce their risk ofserious injury or death in an accident.

A child should never be left unattended in,or unsupervised around, your vehicle.When you leave the vehicle, always takethe child out as well.

Children can die from heat stroke if left ortrapped inside the vehicle, especially onhot days.

Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-dren.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

WARNINGDo not attempt to repair or replace any

part of the seat belt assemblies. This workshould be done by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to havean authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealerperform the work could reduce the effec-tiveness of the belts and could result in aserious injury or death in an accident.

Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem (SRS) - airbag


Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag


4

tion from the vehicle through side windowsin both side impact and rollover type acci-dents.

The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for useof the seat belts. For maximum protection inall types of accidents, seat belts mustALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives orrides in this vehicle (with infants and smallchildren in an appropriate child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraintsystems” on page 4-14.

WARNING IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS

WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLYEVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-

sengers properly positioned. Thisreduces the risk of injury in all collisions,and reduces the risk of serious injuries ordeath when the airbags inflate.During sudden braking just before a col-lision, an unrestrained or improperlyrestrained driver or passengers can moveforward into direct contact with, orwithin close proximity to, the airbagwhen it begins to inflate.The beginning stage of airbag inflation isthe most forceful and can cause seriousinjuries or death if the occupant comes incontact with the airbag at this time.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury inrear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal collisions because the air-bags are not designed to inflate in thosesituations.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of beingthrown from your vehicle in a collision orrollover.

IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-ERLY SEATED.• A driver or front passenger sitting too

close to the steering wheel or instrumentpanel during airbag deployment can beseriously injured or killed.

• Airbags inflate very quickly and withgreat force. If the driver and front pas-senger are not properly seated andrestrained, the airbag may not providethe proper protection, and can causeserious injuries or death when it inflates.

• To reduce the risk to the driver of seriousinjury or death due to a deployingdriver’s airbag, always properly wearyour seat belt and adjust the driver’s seatas far back as possible, maintaining aposition that still allows the driver tohave good control of the steering wheel,brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-trols.

WARNING• To reduce the risk to the front passenger

of serious injury or death from a deploy-ing passenger’s airbag, make sure thepassenger always wears the seat beltproperly, remains seated upright and allthe way back in the seat, and positionsthe seat as far back as possible.

• Seat all infants and children in the rearseat, properly restrained in an appropri-ate child restraint system.

Airbags inflate very quickly and withgreat force. Do not sit on the edge of theseat or sit with your lower legs too close tothe instrument panel, or lean your head orchest close to the steering wheel or theinstrument panel.

Do not put your feet or legs on or againstthe instrument panel.

WARNING




4

WARNING Infants and small children should never

ride unrestrained, or lean against theinstrument panel. They should never rideheld in your arms or on your lap. Theycan be seriously injured or killed in anaccident, especially when the airbagsinflate. Seat all infants and children in therear seat, properly restrained in an appro-priate child restraint system. Refer to“Child restraint systems” on page 4-14.

WARNINGNEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANTRESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-senger seat. This places the infant tooclose to the passenger’s airbag. Duringdeployment of that airbag, the infant canbe seriously injured or killed.Rear-facing child restraint systems orinfant restraint systems must only be usedin the rear seat.

Airbag

WARNING FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seatwhenever possible. If they must be used inthe front passenger seat, move the seat tothe most rearward position and make surethe child stays in the child restraint sys-tem, properly restrained. Failure to followthese instructions could result in seriousinjury or death to the child.

WARNINGOlder children should be seated in the

rear seat with their seat belt properlyworn, and with an appropriate boosterseat if needed.Refer to “Children who have outgrownchild restraint systems” on page 4-20.




4

N00407801574

The SRS includes the following components:

The airbag control unit monitors the readinessof the electronic parts of the system wheneverthe ignition switch or the operation mode isunder the following conditions. These includeall of the items listed above and all relatedwiring.[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in the “ON” or“START” position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]The operation mode is in ON.

The airbags will operate under the same con-ditions as the airbag control unit.

When the impact sensors detect a sufficientfront or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.

When the airbag control unit detects rolloverof the vehicle, curtain airbags will bedeployed.

When airbags deploy, some smoke is releasedaccompanied by a loud noise. The smoke isnot harmful, but do not intentionally inhalethe smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-tion to people with respiratory problems.

An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so youmay not even notice that the airbag wasinflated.Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,and does not prevent people from leaving thevehicle.

N00418600256

This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR).

How the Supplemental Restraint System works

1- Airbag module (Driver)2- Passenger’s airbag off indicator3- SRS warning light4- Airbag module (Passenger)5- Side airbag modules6- Driver’s seat position sensor7- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-

tion sensor system8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)9- Airbag control unit

10- Front impact sensors11- Side impact sensors12- Curtain airbag modules

CAUTIONAirbags inflate very quickly and with great

force. In certain situations, contact with aninflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-sions, and bruises.

Event Data Recording




4

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for ashort period of time, typically 30 seconds orless.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:

How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

Whether or not the driver and front pas-senger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

N00417900223

The driver’s seat position sensor is attachedto the seat rail and provides the airbag controlunit with information on the seat’s fore-aftposition. The airbag control unit controlsdeployment of the driver’s front airbag inaccordance with the information it receivesfrom this sensor.If there is a problem involving the driver’sseat position sensor, the SRS warning light inthe instrument panel will come on. Refer to

“SRS warning light” on page 4-27.

N00418000364

The passenger’s seat occupant classificationsensor system is attached to the front passen-ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-trol unit with information regarding theoccupant on the front passenger seat. The air-bag control unit controls deployment of the

NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no dataare recorded by the EDR under normal driv-ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash inves-tigation.

Driver’s seat position sensor

WARNING If the SRS warning light comes on, have

the vehicle inspected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-ble.

Please observe the following instructionsto ensure that the driver’s seat positionsensor can operate correctly.• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more thannecessary when driving.

• Do not place metallic objects or luggageunder the front seat.

If the vehicle is involved in a severeimpact, have the SRS sensor inspected byan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer assoon as possible.

Passenger’s seat occupant clas-sification sensor system




4

passenger’s front airbag in accordance withthe information it receives from this system.The passenger’s front airbag will not deployin an impact when the system senses no occu-pant on the front passenger seat or a child in achild restraint system. In this case, the pas-senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” onpage 4-26.If there is a problem involving the passen-ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys-tem, the SRS warning light in the instrumentpanel will come on.Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-27.

N00418101359

The passenger’s airbag off indicator islocated at shown in the illustration.

The indicator normally comes on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” positionor the operation mode is put in ON, and goesout a few seconds later. In the following situ-ations, the indicator will stay on to show thatthe passenger front airbag is not operational.

The front passenger seat is not occupied.

WARNING If any of the following conditions occur,

you should immediately have your vehicleinspected by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer as soon as possible:• The SRS warning light does not initially

come on when the ignition switch or theoperation mode is under the followingconditions.

• [Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]The ignition switch is in the “ON” or“START” position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in ON.

• The SRS warning light does not go outafter several seconds.

• The SRS warning light comes on whileyou are driving.

To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-pant classification sensor system can sensecorrectly, observe the following instruc-tions. Failure to follow these instructionscan adversely affect the performance ofthe passenger’s airbag system.• Adjust the seat to the correct position,

and sit well back against the seatback.Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.

• Do not recline the seatback more thannecessary.

• Never have more than one person (adultor child) sitting on the seat.

• Do not place anything between the seatand the floor console.

• When attaching a child restraint system,secure it firmly.

• Do not place luggage or other objects onthe seat.

• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.• Do not modify or replace the seat and

seat belt.• Do not place luggage or other objects

under the seat.• Do not place and use an electronic device

such as a computer on the seat.• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or

stick pins, needles, or other objects intoit.

• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.

WARNING• If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it

and dry the seat immediately. If the vehicle is involved in a severe

impact, have the SRS sensors inspected byan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer assoon as possible.

Passenger’s airbag off indicator

WARNING




4

The system senses that a child is using achild restraint system on the front passen-ger seat.

When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi-cation sensor system senses there is a personseated in the front passenger seat, the indica-tor goes out to show that the passenger’s frontairbag is operational.

N00408300579

There is a Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.

The system checks itself every time the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON. The SRSwarning light will come on for several sec-onds and then go out. This is normal andmeans the system is working properly.

If there is a problem involving one or more ofthe SRS components, the warning light willcome on and stay on.The SRS warning light is shared by the SRSairbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.

N00407900321

The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.


you should immediately have the airbagsystem in your vehicle inspected by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer assoon as possible:• The passenger’s airbag off indicator

comes on when an adult is sitting on thefront passenger seat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator doesnot come on when the front passengerseat is not occupied.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator doesnot come on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position or the oper-ation mode is put in ON.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicator doesnot come on when a child is in a childrestraint system on the front passengerseat.

• The passenger’s airbag off indicatorcomes on and goes out repeatedly.

Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-cle that makes the passenger’s airbag offindicator difficult or impossible to see.You must be able to see the passenger’sairbag off indicator and verify the statusof the passenger’s airbag system.

SRS warning light

WARNING


there may be a problem with the SRS air-bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, andthey may not function properly in a colli-sion or may suddenly activate without acollision:• Even when the ignition switch or the

operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-ing light does not come on or it remainson.

• The SRS warning light comes on whiledriving.

The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-sioners are designed to help reduce therisk of serious injury or death in certaincollisions. If either of the above conditionsoccurs, immediately have your vehiclechecked by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag system




4

The front passenger’s airbag is contained inthe instrument panel above the glove com-partment. The driver’s airbag and the frontpassenger’s airbag are designed to deploy atthe same time. However, the front passen-ger’s airbag does not deploy when the frontpassenger seat is not occupied or when thesystem senses that a child is in the childrestraint system.

N00404500036

The driver’s knee airbag is located under thesteering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag isdesigned to deploy at the same time as thedriver’s front airbag.

Driver’s knee airbag system

Driver

Front passenger




4

N00408000606

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag aredesigned to deploy when the vehicle suffers amoderate to severe frontal impact. A typicalcondition is shown in the illustration to theleft.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag aredesigned to deploy only in certain moderateto severe frontal collisions within the shadedarea between the arrows in the illustration tothe right.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbagwill deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s mainstructure is above a specific threshold level.The threshold level is approximately 15 mph(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into asolid flat wall that does not bend or deform. Ifthe impact to the vehicle’s main structure isbelow this threshold level, the front airbagsand driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. Thisthreshold level may also be higher if the vehi-cle hits something that absorbs the impact,either by bending or moving (for example,

another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guardrail).The initial stage of airbag inflation is themost forceful, and can cause serious injury ordeath if you are too close to the deploying air-bag. Accordingly, it is important that youalways wear the available seat belt.

Deployment of front airbags

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows




4 In certain types of front collisions, the frontairbags and driver’s knee airbag may notdeploy, even if the deformation of the bodyseems to be large, because the vehicle’s bodystructure is designed to absorb the impact anddeform in order to help protect the occupants.Some typical situations where the front air-bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deployare shown in the illustrations.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-bag do not protect the occupant in all types offrontal collisions, be sure to always wear yourseat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag arenot designed to deploy in situations where

they cannot provide protection to the occu-pants.Some typical situations are shown in theillustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-bag do not protect the occupants in all typesof collisions, be sure to always wear the yourseat belts properly.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when …

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck

Oblique frontal impact

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Side collision to your vehicle

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof




4The front airbags and driver’s knee airbagmay deploy if the underside of the vehiclesuffers a moderate to severe impact (under-carriage impact). Some typical situations areshown in the illustration.

Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-bag may deploy in certain types of unex-pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,and these unexpected impacts can move youout of position, it is important to always wearyour seat belts properly. When worn properly,seat belts can help maintain your distancefrom the airbags when they begin to inflate.The initial stage of airbag inflation is themost forceful and can cause serious injury ordeath if you are close to the deploying airbag.

The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when …

WARNINGDo not attach anything to the steering

wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-rial, badges, etc. These could strike andinjure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Do not set anything on, or attach anythingto, the instrument panel above the glovecompartment. Such items could strike andinjure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Collision with an elevated median/island or curb

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground

WARNINGDo not attach accessories to, or put them

in front of, the windshield. They couldrestrict the airbag inflation, or strike andinjure an occupant, when the airbaginflates.

Do not attach additional keys or accesso-ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to theignition key. Such objects could preventthe driver’s knee airbag from inflatingnormally or could be propelled to causeserious injury if the airbag inflates.

Do not attach accessories to the lower por-tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.Such objects could prevent the driver’sknee airbag from inflating normally orcould be propelled to cause serious injuryif the airbag inflates.




4

N00408100421

The side airbags (A) are contained in thedriver and front passenger seatbacks.The side airbag is designed to inflate only onthe side of the vehicle that is impacted, evenwith no passenger in the front seat.

A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-cles equipped with side airbags.

N00419201285

The curtain airbags are contained in the frontpillars and roof side rail.The curtain airbag is designed to inflate onlyon the side of the vehicle that is impacted,even with no passenger in the seat.Also, when the airbag control unit detectsrollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbagswill deploy.

WARNINGDo not attempt to remove, install, disas-

semble or repair the SRS airbags.Do not place objects, such as packages or

pets, between the airbags and the driveror the front passenger. Such objects canadversely affect airbag performance, orcause serious injury or death when theairbag deploys.

Immediately after airbag inflation, someparts of the airbag system will be hot. Donot touch them. You could otherwise beburned.

The airbag system is designed to workonly once. After the airbags deploy, theywill not work again. They must promptlybe replaced and the entire airbag systemmust be inspected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

WARNINGThe side airbags and curtain airbags can

cause serious injury or death to anyonetoo close to the airbag when it deploys. Toreduce the risk of injury from a deployingside airbag and curtain airbag, all occu-pants must be properly restrained andseated well back, upright, and in the mid-dle of the seat. Do not lean against thedoor.




4

WARNING In order to reduce the risk of injury from

a deploying side airbag, do not allow anyrear seat passengers to hold onto the backof either front seat. Special care should betaken with children.

Do not place any objects around the areawhere the side airbags deploy. Suchobjects can interfere with proper side air-bag deployment, and cause injury duringdeployment of the side airbag.

Do not place stickers, labels or additionaltrim on the back of either front seat. Theycan interfere with proper side airbagdeployment.

WARNINGDo not attach a microphone (A) or any

other object around the part where thecurtain airbag deploys, such as on thewindshield, side door glass or front andrear pillars and roof side rail. When thecurtain airbag inflates, the microphone orother object may be hurled with greatforce or the curtain airbag may not inflatecorrectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.

WARNINGDo not install seat covers or re-cover seats

that have side airbags. Covers can inter-fere with proper side airbag deploymentand adversely affect side airbag perfor-mance.

Never install a rear-facing child restraintsystem in the front passenger seat. Rear-facing child restraint systems MUSTONLY be used in the rear seat.

Front-facing child restraint systemsshould also be used ONLY in the rear seat.If a front-facing child restraint systemmust be used in the front passenger seat,move the seat as far back as possible, andmake sure that the child stays in the childrestraint system, properly restrained andaway from the door.

Do not allow a child to lean against or sitclose to the passenger door, even if thechild is seated in a child restraint system.The child’s head should also not leanagainst or be close to the section of theseatback where the side airbag and cur-tain airbag are located. It is dangerous ifthe side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.Failure to follow all of these instructionscould lead to serious injury or death to thechild.

Work done on or in the vicinity of the sideairbag or curtain airbag componentsshould be done only by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a riskof a serious injury or death. Improperwork methods can cause accidental sideairbag or curtain airbag deployment, orrender a side airbag or curtain airbaginoperable. Either of these situationscould result in serious injury or death.

WARNING




4

N00408201575

The side airbag and curtain airbag aredesigned to deploy when the vehicle suffers amoderate to severe side impact to the middleof the passenger compartment.A typical situation is shown in the illustra-tion.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-mary means of protection in an accident. TheSRS side airbags and curtain airbags aredesigned to provide additional protection.Therefore, for your safety and the safety of alloccupants, be sure to always wear your seatbelts properly.

In certain types of side collisions, the side air-bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, evenif the deformation of the body seems to belarge, because the vehicle’s body structure isdesigned to absorb the impact and to deformin order to help protect the occupants. There

are also cases where the side airbag and cur-tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,depending on the location of the impact.Some typical situations where the side air-bags and curtain airbags may not deploy areshown in the illustrations on the followingpage.

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags donot protect the occupant in all types of sidecollisions, be sure to always wear the seatbelts properly.

Do not place luggage heavier than thespecified on the roof carrier.Such luggage may cause the curtain air-bags to inflate accidentally, which couldresult in serious injury or death.

Deployment of side airbag and curtain airbag

The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

WARNING

The side airbag and curtain airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY when...

Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s side structure

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle (Curtain airbag only)




4

The side airbag and curtain airbag are notdesigned to deploy in situations where theycannot provide protection to the occupants.Some typical situations are shown in theillustration.

Since the side airbags and curtain airbags donot protect the occupant in all types of colli-sions, be sure to always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-sion with the side of vehicle

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...

Oblique side impact

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag only)

Head-on collision

Rear end collision to your vehicle

Pitch end over end




4

N00408501725

SRS servicing

WARNINGAny maintenance performed on or near

the components of the SRS should be per-formed only by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer. Do not permit anyone elseto do any service, inspection, maintenanceor repair on any SRS components or wir-ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS shouldever be handled, removed or disposed byanyone except an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.Improper work methods on the SRS com-ponents or wiring could result in an acci-dental airbag deployment or could makethe SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-tions could result in serious injury ordeath.

Do not modify your steering wheel or anyother SRS component or related vehiclepart. For example, replacement of thesteering wheel, or modifications to thefront bumper or body structure canadversely affect SRS performance andmay lead to injury.

If your vehicle has received any damage,you should have the SRS inspected by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer tomake sure it is in proper working order.

Do not modify your front seats, center pil-lar or center console. Such modificationscan adversely affect SRS performance andmay lead to injury.Also, if you discover any tear or openseam in the seat fabric near the side air-bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

If you have found any scratch, crack ordamage to the portion of the front andrear pillars and roof side rail, you shouldhave the SRS inspected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTEWhen you transfer ownership of the vehicle

to another person, we urge you to alert thenew owner that it is equipped with the SRSand refer that owner to the applicable sec-tions in this owner’s manual.

If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,we urge you to first take it to an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS canbe made safe for disposal.

If any of the following parts needs to bemodified for use by a handicapped person,the advanced airbag system will be greatlyaffected. Please consult an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.• Driver’s seat• Front passenger seat• Front seat belt

WARNING• Steering wheel• Instrument panel

[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]To contact Mitsubishi MotorsNorth America, Inc.call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-ica, Inc.Customer Relations Depart-mentP.O. Box 6400Cypress, CA 90630-0064

[For vehicles sold in Canada]To contact Mitsubishi Motor Salesof Canada, Inc.call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-ada, Inc.Customer Relations Depart-mentP.O. Box 410094141 Dixie RoadMississauga, ON L4W 5C9

NOTE




4

N00408600383

Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRSare located in the vehicle as shown in theillustration.

[For vehicles sold in PuertoRico]To contact Mitsubishi Motor Salesof Caribbean, Inc.call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:Mitsubishi Motor Sales ofCaribbean, Inc.Customer Service DepartmentP.O. Box 192216SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

[For vehicles sold in Guam]To contact Triple J EnterprisesInc.call (671) 649-3673 or write to:Triple J Enterprises, Inc.P.O. Box 6066TAMUNINGGUAM 96931

[For vehicles sold in Saipan]To contact Triple J Motorscall (670) 234-7133 or write to:Triple J MotorsP.O. Box 500487SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

[For vehicles sold in AmericanSamoa]To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:Pacific Marketing, Inc.P.O. Box 698PAGO PAGO,AMERICAN SAMOA AS,96799

Warning label

* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.



5

Features and controls

Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2Keys .................................................................................................5-2Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)

(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9Door locks ......................................................................................5-24Power door locks ...........................................................................5-25Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-26Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-27Manual window control (if so equipped)........................................5-28Power window control ...................................................................5-28Parking brake .................................................................................5-31Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-32Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-32Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-33Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-34Starting the engine .........................................................................5-36Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-37Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-39Service brake .................................................................................5-44Hill start assist ................................................................................5-45Brake assist system ........................................................................5-46Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-47Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-49Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-50Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-52Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped) ..........................5-56

Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-60Multi-information display .............................................................5-61Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-70Indicators .......................................................................................5-71Warning lights ................................................................................5-71Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-74Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-76Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-77Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-77Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-77Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-80Horn switch ...................................................................................5-80Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-81Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-81USB input terminal (if so equipped) ...........................................5-102Sun visors ....................................................................................5-10612 V power outlets .......................................................................5-107Interior lights ...............................................................................5-107Storage spaces ..............................................................................5-108Cup holders ..................................................................................5-109Bottle holders ...............................................................................5-109Rear shelf panel (if so equipped).................................................. 5-110Convenience hook ....................................................................... 5-110Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-111


Break-in recommendations

5-2 Features and controls

5

N00508701382

Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-niques permit you to operate your new vehi-cle without requiring a long break-in periodof low-speed driving.However, you can add to the future perfor-mance and economy of your vehicle byobserving the following precautions duringthe first 300 miles (500 km).Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds duringthe break-in period.

Avoid revving the engine.Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,

sudden acceleration, prolonged high-speed driving and sudden braking. Thesewould have a detrimental effect on theengine and also cause increased fuel andoil consumption, which could result inmalfunction of the engine components. Beparticularly careful to avoid full accelera-tion while in low shift position (lowgears).

Do not overload the vehicle. Stay withinthe seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo loadprecautions” on page 6-10.)

Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

N00508801699

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keysare provided.Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergencykey in a safe place together as a set of sparekeys.

Break-in recommendations Keys

Type 1

1- Key for the electronic immobilizer2- Key number plate

Type 2

1- Key for the electronic immobilizer andkeyless entry system

2- Key number plate

Type 3


Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

Features and controls 5-3

5

N00509100780

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-handAdvanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)]For information on operations for vehiclesequipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page 5-19.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter(F.A.S.T.-key)]The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicletheft. The purpose of the system is to immo-bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is

1- F.A.S.T.-key(with electronic immobilizer and key-less entry system function)

2- Emergency key3- Key number plate

NOTE The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a

precision electronic device with a built-insignal transmitter. Please observe the follow-ing in order to prevent damage.• Do not leave where it may be exposed to

heat caused by direct sunlight, such as ontop of the dashboard.

• Do not take the remote control transmitterapart.

• Do not excessively bend the key or subjectit to strong impacts.

• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.• Keep away from magnetic objects such as

key rings.

• Keep away from devices that produce mag-netism, such as audio systems, computersand televisions.

• Keep away from devices that emit strongelectromagnetic waves, such as cellularphones, wireless devices and high fre-quency equipment (including medicaldevices).

• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.• Do not leave the key where it may be

exposed to high temperature or high humid-ity.

If you lose your key, to prevent the theft ofthe vehicle immediately contact an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.If you notify an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer of the key number, they canmake a new key. The key number is stampedon the key number plate. Keep the key num-ber plate in a safe place separate from thekey itself.

No keys other than those registered inadvance can be used to start the engine.Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theftstarting system)” on page 5-3.Refer to “Free-hand Advanced SecurityTransmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronicimmobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” onpage 5-19.

NOTEWhen the theft-alarm is in the system opera-

tional status, the alarm operates if a door orliftgate is opened after using the key, thedoor lock knob or the power door lockswitch to unlock the vehicle.

The system does not enter the preparationstatus if the keyless entry system or theF.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-cle.


NOTE




5

attempted. A valid start attempt can only beachieved (subject to certain conditions) usinga key “registered” to the immobilizer system.All of the keys provided with your new vehi-cle have been programmed to the vehicle’selectronics.

Only keys that have been programmed to thevehicle’s electronics can be used to start thevehicle.

If you lose the key, you can order a key fromyour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer byreferring to the key number.To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for thevehicle keys must be changed.Take your vehicle and all remaining keys toyour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer tohave your ID code changed.

NOTE In the following cases, the vehicle may not

be able to recognize the registered ID codefrom the key. This means the engine will notstart even when the key is turned to the“START” position.• When the key contacts a key ring or other

metallic or magnetic object (Type A)• When the key grip contacts metal of

another key (Type B)• When the key contacts or is close to other

immobilizer keys (including keys of othervehicles) (Type C)

In cases like the above, move the offendingobject(s) away from the key and turn the keyback to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Thentry to start the engine again. If the enginedoes not start, contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE The key may not operate properly when it is

near an object or facility that emits strongelectromagnetic waves.

Electronic immobilizer is not compatiblewith commercially available remote startingsystems. Use of commercially availableremote starting systems may result in vehiclestarting problems and a loss of security pro-tection.

A system failure is suspected when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-tion, and the engine does not start. In such acase, contact an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

CAUTIONDo not make any alterations or additions to

the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.

Replacement keys

NOTE




5

To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-tered keys. You need to register the ID codeto the vehicle.Registering the ID code can be done by your-self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), orby your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-low the “Customer key programming” proce-dure below.If you choose to have your authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer register the IDcode, take your vehicle and all remainingkeys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer.

N00562200139

You can program new keys to the system ifyou have two valid (already registered) keysand blank immobilizer key (specially cut for

your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motorsdealer) by doing the following:

1. Insert the first valid key into the ignitionswitch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-tion for 5 seconds.

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position andremove the first key.

3. Within 30 seconds of removing the firstkey, insert the second valid key into theignition and turn it to the “ON” position.About 10 seconds later, the immobilizerindicator will start to blink.

4. When the immobilizer indicator startsblinking, turn the second valid key to the“OFF” position and remove it. Within 30seconds after doing so, insert a blankimmobilizer key into the ignition switchand turn it to the “ON” position. Performthis operation no more than 30 secondsafter the immobilizer indicator startsblinking. When registration of the IDcode is complete, the immobilizer indica-tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off.If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-tor will go off during the procedure.

5. If you wish to register another key, per-form the process again from step 1.

Additional keys

NOTEYou are provided with 2 keys, but you may

register up to 8 keys.

Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)

NOTEWhen the key registration is completed, the

immobilizer indicator will come on within30 seconds of turning the ignition switch tothe “ON” position with the blank immobi-lizer key (specially cut for your vehicle atyour Mitsubishi Motors dealer).

NOTE It is not possible to register a key if:

• the immobilizer indicator goes off duringthe procedure

• the immobilizer indicator does not come onwithin 30 seconds after step 4.

The procedure will be terminated automati-cally if:• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses

from the moment when the first key isturned to the “OFF” position to the momentwhen the second key is turned to the “ON”position

• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapsesfrom the moment when the second key isturned to the “OFF” position to the momentwhen the blank immobilizer key is turnedto the “ON” position

• more than 20 seconds elapses after theimmobilizer indicator starts blinking


Keyless entry system (if so equipped)


5

N00562300097

Your electronic immobilizer operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal Communi-cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry CanadaRules (For vehicles sold in Canada). Thisdevice complies with part 15 of FCC Rulesand Industry Canada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s).Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions.

This device may not cause harmful inter-ference.

This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of this device.

N00509002002

Press the remote control transmitter buttonsto lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.It can also help you signal for attention bysetting off the panic alarm.

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all thedoors and the liftgate.The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock thedriver’s door only.Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCKbutton one more time to unlock all the doorsand liftgate.The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The horn of the keyless entry system answer-back function can be changed as required.This is done with the key removed from theignition switch.

General information

WARNINGChanges or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.


1- LOCK ( ) button2- UNLOCK ( ) button3- PANIC button4- Indicator light

To lock

NOTE If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

Answerback function

NOTE The answerback function will not operate if

any of the doors are open.




5

The answerback function can be set in thefollowing three ways.Each time the answerback function is set, achime will sound to tell you the condition ofthe answerback function.

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-

bination headlights and dimmer switch tothe “OFF” position.

3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)during this time.

4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK andLOCK buttons within 10 seconds ofpressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.

The turn signal lights answerback functioncan be changed.

If you want to change the answerback func-tion, please contact an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

N00543700034

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to callattention as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off andthe horn will sound intermittently forabout 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button onthe remote control transmitter.

N00543800051

Only remote control transmitters pro-grammed with the vehicle’s electronics canlock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.

If you lose the remote control transmitter, youcan order a remote control transmitter fromyour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer byreferring to the key number.To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for theremote control transmitter must be changed.

Take your vehicle and all remote controltransmitters to your authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer to have your ID code changed.

N00543900078

To add a remote control transmitter, you mustalready have 1 registered remote controltransmitter.Registering the ID code can be done by yourauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.Take your vehicle and any remaining keys toyour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00546100114

Your keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal Communica-tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehiclessold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules(For vehicles sold in Canada). This devicecomplies with Part 15 of FCC Rules andIndustry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-dard(s).

Horn deactivation/reactivation

One chime: The horn will not sound.Two chimes: The horn will sound.Four chimes: The horn will sound if the

LOCK button is pressed twicewithin 1 second.

Turn signal lights deactiva-tion/reactivation

Using the panic alarm

Replacement remote control transmitters

Additional remote control transmitters

NOTEYou are provided with 2 remote control

transmitters, but you may register up to 4remote control transmitters.

General information




5

Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions.



N00544101188

1. Before replacing the battery, remove staticelectricity from your body by touching ametal grounded object.

2. Remote the screw (A) from the remotecontrol transmitter.

3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat bladescrewdriver into the notch in the remotecontrol transmitter case and use it to openthe case.

4. Remove the old battery.5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)

up.



Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter bat-tery

NOTEBe sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If theMitsubishi mark is not facing you when youopen the remote control transmitter case, thebuttons may come out.

The Federal Communications Commission(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)number and the model number (radio certifi-cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-tion.


Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)


5

6. Close the remote control transmitterfirmly.

7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.8. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

N00503101134

The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and theliftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engineto be started and the operation mode to bechanged simply by carrying it.The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as theremote control transmitter of the keylessentry system.Refer to “Free-hand Advanced SecurityTransmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entrysystem” on page 5-21.

CAUTIONWhen the remote control transmitter case is

opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-nents.

NOTEYou may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

+ side

- side

Coin type battery CR1620

Free-hand Advanced Secu-rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by thedriver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required forvehicle operations such as locking andunlocking the doors and the liftgate,starting the engine, and changing theoperation mode. When leaving the vehi-cle, make sure you are carrying theF.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.

WARNING Individuals who use implantable pace-

makers or implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should keep away from theexternal and internal transmitters. Theelectromagnetic waves used in theF.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation ofimplantable pacemakers and implantablecardiovascular-defibrillators.

A- External transmitterB- Internal transmitter




5

The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-key can be modified as stated below.(Keyless entry operations are possible.)For details, contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.• Enabling only the locking and unlocking

of the doors and the liftgate• Enabling only the starting of the engine• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key

N00503200167

When a person enters the operating range ofthe F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlockswitch the liftgate switch, verification of theID code is performed.The doors and the liftgate can only be lockedand unlocked, the engine can only be startedand the operation mode can only be changedwhen the ID codes of the vehicle andF.A.S.T.-key match.

WARNING Individuals using other electro-medical

apparatus besides implantable pacemak-ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-brillators should check with themanufacturer of the apparatus to confirmthe effect of the electromagnetic wavesused by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-netic waves may affect the operations ofthe electro-medical apparatus.

NOTE The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic

waves.In cases such as the following, operationmay be improper or unstable.• The vehicle is near a facility that emits

strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TVtransmitting tower, a power station, a radiostation or an airport

• The key is carried together with other com-munication devices such as cellular phonesor radios, or electrical appliances such ascomputers

• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by ametal object

• A keyless entry system is being usednearby

• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down• The vehicle is in a location with strong

electromagnetic waves or noiseUse the emergency key in such circum-stances.Refer to “To operate without using theF.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-19.

The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performingreception operations in its communicationwith the vehicle. This means that the batteryis always running down, regardless of howoften the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The batterylife is about 1 to 2 years, depending on theusage conditions.

Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-ing reception operations, the reception ofstrong electromagnetic waves can acceleratethe running down of the battery. Do not placenear to electrical appliances such as televi-sions or computers.

NOTE Operating range of the F.A.S.T.-key

NOTEWhen the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run

down or there are strong electromagneticwaves or noise in the area, the operatingrange could decrease or operations couldbecome unstable.




5

The operating range is within about 2.3 feet(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlockswitch and the liftgate switch.

N00503300070

The operating range is the interior of thevehicle.

N00503400228

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press thedriver’s door switch (A), or the liftgate switch(B) within the operating range to lock all thedoors and the liftgate.The turn signal lights will blink once and thebuzzer will sound once.

Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power doorlocks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-25 and5-27 respectively.

Operating range for locking and unlocking the doors and the lift-gate

*: Front of the vehicle: Operating range

NOTEOnly the doors and the liftgate that detect the

F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked. The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-

key is too close to the windshield, door win-dows or liftgate.

Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door switch orthe tailgate switch, the system may not oper-ate if the key is close to the ground or in ahigh position.

If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operatingrange, even a person not carrying theF.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doorsor the liftgate by pressing the driver’s doorswitch or the tailgate switch.

Operating range for starting the engine and changing the opera-tion mode

*: Front of the vehicle: Operating range

NOTE NOTE Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-

ing range, it may not be possible to start theengine and change the operation mode if thekey is in a storage space such as the glovecompartment, on top of the instrument panel,or in the door pocket or luggage compart-ment.

Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,it may not be possible to start the engine andchange the operation mode if the key is tooclose to a door or door window.

To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key

To lock




5

While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within theoperating range, you can unlock the doorsand the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key.The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.The turn signal lights will blink twice and thebuzzer will sound twice.

Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power doorlocks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-24, 5-25 and5-27 respectively.

Press the driver’s door switch (A) to unlockonly the driver’s door.Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’sdoor switch one more time to unlock all thedoors and the liftgate.

Press the liftgate switch (B) to unlock all thedoors and the liftgate.

NOTE In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-

key does not operate.• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger

compartment• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar• The operation mode is not in OFF.

The time within which locking confirmationis possible can be adjusted. See an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

Driver’s door

Liftgate

To unlock

Driver’s switch

NOTE Settings can be changed so that all doors and

the liftgate are unlocked automatically bypressing the driver’s door switch once.See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealerfor details.

NOTE If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked

using the driver’s door switch when all doorsand the liftgate are locked and no doors orthe liftgate are opened within about 30 sec-onds, the doors and the liftgate will automat-ically re-lock.

The amount of time after unlocking until thevehicle relocks automatically can beadjusted. See an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer for details.

Liftgate switch




5

N00513500088

To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keysother than those registered in advance can beused to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-lizer function)While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engineswitch can be used to start the engine.

The indicator light on the engine switch turnsoff.On vehicles equipped with continuously vari-able transmission (CVT), the operation modecannot be put in OFF when the selector leveris in any position other than the “P” (PARK)position.

Allows operation of some electrical accesso-ries.The indicator light on the engine switch illu-minates orange.

All electrical accessories can be used.The indicator light on the engine switch illu-minates green.The indicator light turns off when the engineis running.

In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-key does not operate.• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar• The operation mode is not in OFF.

Functions settings can be modified as statedbelow.See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealerfor details.• Activating the operation confirmation func-

tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) onlyduring locking, or only during unlocking.

• Deactivating the operation confirmationfunction (blinking of the turn signal lights)and buzzer.

• Modifying the number of blinks in theoperation confirmation function (blinkingof the turn signal lights).

• Making the buzzer sound when theF.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passengercompartment when all the doors and theliftgate are closed.

Engine switch

NOTE

CAUTION The indicator light (A) will flash orange

when there is a problem or malfunction inFree-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.Never drive if the indicator light on theengine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-ately contact your authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

If the engine switch operation is not smoothand feels like it is sticking, do not operate theswitch.Immediately contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTEWhen operating the engine switch, press the

switch all the way in. If the switch is notfully pressed, the engine may not start or theoperation mode may not change. If theengine switch is pressed correctly, there is noneed to hold the engine switch down.

Operation mode of the engine switch and its function

OFF

ACC

ON




5

N00568000025

If you press the engine switch without press-ing the brake pedal {continuously variabletransmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal(manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta-tionary, you can change the operation modein the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.

N00568101049

When the vehicle is in ACC operation modefor approximately 30 minutes, the ACCpower auto-cutout function automaticallycuts power to the audio system and otherelectronic devices that can be used duringACC operation mode.

To enable power after ACC power auto-cut-out function, press the engine switch while inACC.

N00503500216

With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are giventhrough buzzers and displayed symbols inorder to prevent mistaken operations or vehi-cle theft.When a warning operates, be sure to checkthe vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning isalso shown if there is a problem in theF.A.S.T.-key.

If the following warning shows, contact anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTEYour vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID codewhich the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match theone registered to the immobilizer computer.(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theftstarting system)” on page 5-19)

Changing the operation mode

CAUTIONWhen the engine is not running, put the oper-

ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operationmode in ON or ACC for a long time whenthe engine is not running may cause the bat-tery to be discharged, making it impossibleto start the engine.

When the battery is disconnected, the currentoperation mode is memorized. After recon-necting the battery, the memorized mode isselected automatically. Before disconnect-ing the battery for repair or replacement,make sure to put the operation mode in OFF. Be careful if you are not sure which opera-tion mode the vehicle is in when the batteryis run down.

The operation mode cannot be changed fromOFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is notdetected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-ating range for starting the engine andchanging the operation mode” on page 5-11.

ACC power auto-cutout function

NOTE It is possible to modify the functions as fol-

lows:• The time until the power cuts out can be

changed to approximately 60 minutes.• The ACC power auto-cutout function can

be deactivated.For details, we recommend you to consult anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Warning activation

There is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key




5

If the following warnings show, the light goesoff if the correct action is taken.

The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and thevehicle cannot be verified

A door or the liftgate cannot be lockedeven when the driver’s door switch or theliftgate switch is pressed.

N00559801196

When the operation mode is in any modeother than OFF, and a door is opened and theF.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passengercompartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the vehicle can no longer be verified.When the door is closed, the warning lightblinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as awarning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzersounds once.

N00559900158

When the operation mode is in OFF, theF.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart-ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed,and someone tries to lock the vehicle bypressing the driver’s door switch or the lift-gate switch, the warning light blinks and thebuzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn-ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot belocked.

Put the operation mode in OFF and then start the engine again.If the warning is not can-celled, there is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).Please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Someone may be carrying a F.A.S.T.-key with a different ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key may not be within the operat-ing rangeRefer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system” on page 5-15.

The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down

Refer to “Key lock-in preven-tion system” on page 5-15.

Refer to “Door ajar preven-tion system” on page 5-16.

Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on page 5-16.

F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system

NOTE The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system

does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key isremoved through a window without openinga door.This setting can be changed.See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealerfor details.

The warning may display even if theF.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range forstarting the engine and changing the opera-tion mode. The surrounding environment orelectromagnetic waves may make it impossi-ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-keyand vehicle.

Key lock-in prevention system




5

N00560000159

When the operation mode is in OFF, andsomeone tries to lock the vehicle by pressingthe driver’s door switch or the liftgate switchwhile one of the doors or the liftgate is notfully closed, the warning light blinks and thebuzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a warn-ing, and the doors and the liftgate cannot belocked.

N00560100150

When the operation mode is in any modeother than OFF, all the doors and the liftgateare closed, and someone tries to lock thevehicle by pressing the driver’s door switchor the liftgate switch, the warning light blinksand the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds asa warning, and the doors and the liftgate can-not be locked.

N00514601357

The operation mode can be in any modeto start the engine.

The starter motor will be turning for up toapproximately 15 seconds if the engineswitch is released at once. Pressing theengine switch again while the startermotor is still turning will stop the startermotor. The starter motor will be turningfor up to approximately 30 seconds whilethe engine switch is pressed.If the engine does not start, wait for awhile and then attempt to start the engineagain. Trying repeatedly with the startermotor still turning will damage the startermechanism.

If the engine will not start because the bat-tery is weak or discharged, refer to“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2for instructions.

A longer warm up period will only con-sume extra fuel.The engine is warmed up enough for driv-ing when the low coolant temperatureindicator goes out.Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-cator” on page 5-71.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-cally controlled fuel injection system. This isa system that automatically controls fuelinjection. There is usually no need to depressthe accelerator pedal when starting theengine.To prevent battery drain, wait a few secondsbetween attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properlyseated with seat belts fastened.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.3. Press and hold the brake pedal down

firmly with your right foot.

Door ajar prevention system

Operation mode OFF reminder system

Starting and stopping the engine

Tips for starting

WARNINGNever run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is neededto move your vehicle out of the area. Car-bon monoxide gas, which is odorless andextremely poisonous, could build up andcause serious injury or death.

CAUTIONDo not push-start the vehicle.Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive

at high speeds until the engine has had achance to warm up.

Starting the engine




54. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the waydown (manual transaxle).

5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”(Neutral) position.On vehicles equipped with continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT), make surethe selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)position.

6. Press the engine switch.7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-

ing displays are functioning properly.

After several attempts, you may experiencethat the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, suchas lights, air conditioning blower and rearwindow defogger, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-uously variable transmission (CVT)} orthe clutch pedal (manual transaxle), pressthe accelerator pedal halfway and hold itthere, then crank the engine. Release theaccelerator pedal, immediately after theengine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the enginecould be flooded with too much gasoline.While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),push the accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there, then press theengine switch to crank the engine. If theengine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,push the engine switch to stop crankingthe engine, and release the acceleratorpedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.Wait a few seconds, and then press theengine switch to crank the engine againwhile depressing the brake pedal (CVT)or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), butdo not push the accelerator pedal. If theengine fails to start, repeat these proce-dures. If the engine still will not start, con-tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealeror a repair facility of your choice forassistance.

Startability of continuously variable trans-mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambienttemperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower

NOTEAfter the engine has not started for a while,

the brake pedal effort needed to start theengine may become greater. If this occurs,depress the brake pedal more firmly thanusual.

NOTE For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-

axle, the engine will not start unless theclutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-lock). This is a safety feature.

NOTEOn vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), the engine canonly be started when the selector lever is inthe “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.For safety reasons, the engine should bestarted when the selector lever is in the “P”(PARK) position in which the driving wheelslock.

NOTEMinor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warmsup.

When the engine is hard to start




5

When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20°C) or lower, it may not be possible to startfrom a standstill even with the selector leverin the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)position.This phenomenon occurs because the trans-axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it doesnot indicate a problem. If this occurs, placethe selector lever in the “P” (PARK) positionand let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.The transaxle will warm up, and you will beable to start normally.Do not leave the vehicle during warm-upoperation.

N00568200014

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Fully engage the parking brake while

depressing the brake pedal.3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,

press the engine switch to stop the engine,and then move the gearshift lever to the1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on adownhill) position.On vehicles equipped with continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT), move theselector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,and then press the engine switch to stopthe engine.

N00568301054

Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of thefloor console. Starting the engine and chang-ing the operation mode should be now possi-ble. Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slotafter starting the engine or changing the oper-ation mode.

Stopping the engine

WARNINGDo not operate the engine switch while

driving except in an emergency. If theengine is stopped while driving, the brakeservomechanism will cease to function andbraking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,the power steering system will not func-tion and it will require greater manualeffort to operate the steering. This couldresult in a serious accident.

NOTE If you have to bring the engine to an emer-

gency stop while driving, press and hold theengine switch for 3 seconds or more, or pressit quickly 3 times or more. The engine willstop and the operation mode will go to ACC.

On vehicles equipped with continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT), do not stop theengine with the selector lever in any positionother than the “P” (PARK) position. If theengine is stopped with the selector lever inany position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-tion, the operation mode will go to ACCrather than OFF.Put the operation mode in OFF after placingthe selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-tion.

If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-ing properly

NOTEDo not insert into the key slot anything other

than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-age or a malfunction.




5

If the operation mode is in OFF and thedriver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-keyin the key slot, a warning is issued with thewarning light and the buzzer buzzing forapproximately 3 seconds to remind you toremove the key.

N00514800017

N00515201174

The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-key.When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, suchas when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the

vehicle has run down, the emergency key canbe used to lock and unlock the passenger’sdoor.

To use the emergency key (A), unlock thelock knob (B) and remove it from theF.A.S.T.-key (C).

Turn the emergency key toward the front ofthe vehicle to lock the door. After checking

that the door is locked, turn the emergencykey back to the center and remove it.

N00529600055

The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicletheft. The purpose of the system is to immo-bilize the vehicle if an invalid start isattempted. A valid start attempt can only beachieved (subject to certain conditions) usinga F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-lizer system.All of the keys provided with your new vehi-cle have been programmed to the vehicle’selectronics.

Remove the object or additional key from theF.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into thekey slot. The vehicle may not be able toreceive the registered ID code from the regis-tered key. Therefore, the engine may not startand the operation mode may not change.

F.A.S.T.-key reminder

To operate without using the F.A.S.T.-key

Emergency key

NOTE

NOTEOnly use the emergency key in an emer-

gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-keyhas run down, replace the battery as soon aspossible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.

After using the emergency key, be sure toreinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.

Locking and unlocking the passenger’sdoor

1- Lock2- Unlock





5

N00561000042

Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can beused to start the vehicle.

If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order aF.A.S.T.-key from your authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer by referring to the key number.To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicleand the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the IDcodes reprogrammed.

N00561100056

To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis-ter the ID code to the vehicle.Registering the ID code can be done by yourauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or itcan be done by yourself (except for vehiclessold in Canada).For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-ming” procedure below.If you choose to have your authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer register the IDcode, take your vehicle and all remainingF.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

N00561201201

You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to thesystem if you have two valid (already regis-tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis-tered) F.A.S.T.-key.

For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow theprocedures below.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-form the following procedure within 30seconds.)

3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the keyslot.

4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press theUNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds andpress the LOCK button during this time.

5. Release in sequence the LOCK andUNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds ofpressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-form the following procedure within 30seconds.)

6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, pressthe UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 secondsand press the LOCK button during thistime.

7. Release in sequence the LOCK andUNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds ofpressing the LOCK button in step 6. Theimmobilizer warning light will blink.

Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys

Additional F.A.S.T.-keys

NOTEYou are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but

you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for yourvehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-ming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)

NOTEKeep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-

key programming is finished. Do not open orclose other doors.




5When registration of ID code is complete,the buzzer will sound 3 times and theimmobilizer indicator will come on for 30seconds.If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-ming will be terminated and the buzzerwill sound for 3 seconds.

8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-key, repeat the process from step 1 afterthe operation mode is put in OFF.

N00515500213

Press the remote control transmitter buttonsto lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.It can also help you signal for attention bysetting off the panic alarm.

Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all thedoors and the liftgate.The turn signal lights will also blink once.

Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock thedriver’s door only.Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCKbutton one more time to unlock all the doorsand liftgate.The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.The turn signal lights will also blink twice.

The horn of the keyless entry system answer-back function can be changed as required.This is done with the key removed from theignition switch.

NOTE F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-

nated if the operation mode is put in OFFbefore the immobilizer warning light startsblinking.

NOTE The immobilizer display will go off immedi-

ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if

the immobilizer warning light goes off dur-ing the procedure.

Keyless entry system

1- LOCK ( ) button2- UNLOCK ( ) button3- PANIC button4- Operation indicator light

To lock

NOTE If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the

horn will sound once.

To unlock

NOTE The door and liftgate unlock function can be

set so that all doors and liftgate unlock whenthe UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlockfunction” on page 5-22.

Answerback function




5

The answerback function can be set in thefollowing three ways.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-



4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK andLOCK buttons within 10 seconds ofpressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.

The turn signal lights answerback functioncan be changes.If you want to change the answerback func-tion, please contact an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

The buzzer answerback function can beturned ON or OFF as required.

N00544600098

The door and liftgate unlock function can beset to the following two conditions.Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you thecondition of the door and liftgate unlockfunction.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-



4. Release in sequence the LOCK andUNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds ofpressing the LOCK button in step 3.

N00544700060

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you can acti-vate the alarm to call atten-tion as follows:

1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than1 second.

2. The headlights will blink on and off andthe horn will sound intermittently forabout 3 minutes.

3. To turn off the alarm, press any button onthe remote control transmitter.

Horn deactivation/reactivation

One chime: The horn will not sound.Two chimes: The horn will sound.Four chimes: The horn will sound if the

LOCK button is pressed twicewithin 1 second.

Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-tion

Buzzer deactivation/reactivation

Setting of door and liftgate unlock function

Number of chimes Condition

One chime All doors and the liftgate unlock

Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only

Using the panic alarm

NOTE The indicator light (4) comes on each time a

button is pressed. The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40

feet (12 m) away. However, this distancemay change if your vehicle is near a TVtransmitting tower, a power station, or aradio station.

If the following conditions are observed afterpressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-ton on the remote control transmitter, thebuttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to bereplaced.




5

N00562000065

Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-quency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles soldin U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (Forvehicles sold in Canada). This device com-plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions.



N00562100066

1. Before replacing the battery, remove staticelectricity from your body by touching ametal grounded object.

2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat bladescrewdriver into the notch in the case anduse it to open the case.

3. Remove the old battery.4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)

up.

• The doors and the liftgate cannot be lockedor unlocked.

• The panic alarm cannot be operated.• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not

come on. If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact

an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for areplacement.

If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-key, please contact an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-key can be programmed for your vehicle.

To use the new remote control transmitters, itis necessary to register the key with the elec-tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system.Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theftstarting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro-gramming” on page 5-20.

General information

NOTE



Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter bat-tery

NOTEBe sure to perform the procedure with the

Mitsubishi mark facing you. If theMitsubishi mark is not facing you when youopen the case, the transmitter may come out.

+ side

- side

Coin type battery CR2032


Door locks


5

5. Close the case firmly.6. Check the keyless entry system to see that

it works.

N00509200547

Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle tolock the door. After checking that the door islocked, turn the key back to the center andremove it.

NOTEYou may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can

replace the battery for you if you prefer.

CAUTIONWhen the remote control transmitter case is

opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-nents.

Door locks

WARNINGMake sure all doors are tightly closed and

locked while driving.• Locked doors, in combination with the

use of seat belts, can help reduce the riskof ejection in an accident.

• Locked doors can help keep passengers,especially small children, from openingdoors and falling out of moving vehicles.

• Locked doors can help prevent outsidersfrom gaining access to your vehicle whenyou slow or come to a stop.

Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.Children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay not be able to get out. Childrentrapped inside vehicles can quickly beovercome by heat and suffer seriousinjury or death due to heat stroke.

Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. Inaddition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-dren can activate switches and controls,resulting in an injury or fatal accident.

When closing a door, make sure that thedoor is fully closed and the door-ajarwarning display goes out on the informa-tion screen on the multi-information dis-play. If the door is ajar it could open whiledriving and cause an accident.

To lock and unlock with the key (driver’s door)

WARNING

1- Lock2- Unlock

NOTEWhen locking or unlocking with the key,

only the driver’s door will be locked orunlocked.To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate,use the power door lock switches, the key-less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera-tion. (if so equipped)Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-25,“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and5-21, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-11.

In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,the passenger’s door can be locked andunlocked using the emergency key.Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-19.


Power door locks


5

Move the lock knob to the lock position tolock the door.All doors should be kept locked while driv-ing.

The driver’s door can be unlocked withoutusing the lock knob by pulling on the insidedoor handle.

1. Move the inside lock knob to the lockedposition.

2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-cle. Close the door.

N00549600253

If the ignition switch is turned off and thedriver’s door is opened with the key in theignition switch, the key reminder buzzer willsound intermittently to remind you to removethe key.

N00517300042

If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-ation mode is in any mode other than OFFwhen you push the lock knob forward withthe driver’s door or passenger’s door open,

the lock knob will automatically return to theunlocked position.

N00503800150

If the driver’s door is opened while the engineis stopped and the operation mode is in anyposition other than OFF, the operation modeON buzzer will sound intermittently toremind you to put the operation mode in OFF.

N00509300610

To lock or unlock the door from the inside

1- Lock2- Unlock

To lock the door without using the key

Key reminder system (except for vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

Lock out protection

Operation mode ON reminder system (vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)

Power door locks

NOTEWhen locking or unlocking with the key on

the driver’s door, only the driver’s door willlock or unlock.

Repeated continuous operation between lockand unlock could activate the power doorlocking system’s built-in protection circuit,and prevent the system from operating. Ifthis occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-ating the power door lock switch.


Child safety locks for rear door


5

All of the doors and the liftgate can be lockedor unlocked by pressing the power door lockswitch on the driver’s or the front passengerdoor.

N00563400112

All doors and the liftgate will unlock whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”position or the operation mode is put in OFF.

All doors and the liftgate will unlock whenthe selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)position with the ignition switch or the opera-tion mode in ON.

N00509400291

To lock and unlock the doors and liftgate

Using the power door lock switch (if so equipped)

1- Lock2- Unlock

To unlock the doors and liftgate

You can select the functions to unlock thedoors and liftgate either using the ignitionswitch or the engine switch, or using theselector lever position {continuously vari-able transmission (CVT)}.These functions are not activated when thevehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-vate or deactivate these functions, pleasecontact your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer.

Using the ignition switch or the engine switch

Using the selector lever position {continuously variable transmis-sion (CVT)}

Child safety locks for rear door

1- To lock2- To release


Liftgate


5

Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-gers, especially children, from opening therear door using the inside door handle.A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-vided on each rear door.When the lever is in the lock position (1), therear door cannot be opened using the insidedoor handle.To open the rear door when the child safetylock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-side door handle.When the lever is in the release position (2),the child safety lock is released and the reardoor can be opened using the inside door han-dle.

N00510100243After unlocking the tailgate, pull the tailgatehandle upward to open.

Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-trated and release it before the liftgate closescompletely. Gently slam the liftgate from theoutside so that it is completely closed.

WARNINGAlways keep the doors tightly closed and

locked when driving. An unlocked doormay be accidentally opened by a passen-ger, especially by a child who could fallout. Also, if the doors are not locked, thereis a greater risk of someone being thrownfrom the vehicle in an accident.

Liftgate

WARNING It is dangerous to drive with the liftgate

open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas canenter the passenger compartment.CO is an invisible, odorless gas that cancause unconsciousness and even death.

When opening and closing the liftgate,make sure that there are no people nearbyand be careful not to hit your head orpinch your hands, neck, etc.

CAUTIONDo not stand behind the exhaust pipe when

loading and unloading luggage. Heat fromthe exhaust could lead to burns.

NOTE Locking and unlocking the doors by using

the power door lock switch, the keyless entrysystem or the F.A.S.T.-key operation alsolocks and unlocks the liftgate. (if soequipped)

To open

1- Unlock

CAUTIONMake sure there is no one standing nearby

when opening the liftgate.

To close


Manual window control (if so equipped)


5

N00510700021

N00510800370

CAUTION To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not

attempt to close the liftgate without releasingthe liftgate grip (A).

Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgateopens while driving the vehicle, objectsstored in the luggage compartment could fallout into the road.

NOTEGas struts (B) are installed in the locations

illustrated in order to support the liftgate.Please observe the following in order to pre-vent damage or faulty operation:• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts

when closing the liftgate.• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,

etc., to the gas struts.• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.

• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.

Manual window control (if so equipped)

1- To open 2- To close

NOTE Power window control

1- Open (down)2- Close (up)

NOTENever try to operate the main switch and

sub-switch in different directions at the sametime. This will freeze the window in posi-tion.

Operating the power windows repeatedlywith the engine stopped will run down thebattery. Use the window switches only whilethe engine is running.

WARNINGBefore operating the power windows,

make sure that nothing can be trapped(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.


Power window control


5N00548700130

The main switch located on the driver’s doorcan be used to operate all the windows.A window can be opened or closed by operat-ing the corresponding switch.Press the switch down to open the window,and pull up the switch to close it.If the driver’s door window switch is fullypressed down/pulled up, the driver’s doorwindow automatically opens/closes com-pletely. (Type 1)If the driver’s door window switch is fullypressed down, the driver’s door window auto-matically opens completely. (Type 2)If you want to stop the window movement,operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-tion.

N00548800098

Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-senger door window, unless the driver’s win-dow lock switch is activated.

N00548900132

The power windows can be run up or downwhen the ignition switch or the operationmode is in ON.The door windows can be opened or closedfor a 30-second period after the engine is

Never leave the vehicle without carryingthe key.

Never leave children or unreliable adultsunattended inside the vehicle.

Main switch

WARNING

1- Driver’s door window switch2- Front passenger door window switch3- Left rear door window switch4- Right rear door window switch5- Lock switch

Type 1

Type 2

Sub switch

1- Close2- Open

NOTE The rear door windows open only half-way.

Power window timer function


Power window control


5

stopped. However, once the driver’s door orthe front passenger’s door is opened, thepower windows cannot be operated.

N00549000169

When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-senger door switches cannot be used to openor close the door windows, and the mainswitch will open or close only the driver’sdoor window. To unlock the switch, press itagain.

N00528801158

If a hand or head is trapped, for safety thedoor window is automatically lowered a little.After the door window is lowered, clear theobstruction, then pull up the switch again toclose the door window.

Lock switch

1- Lock2- Unlock

Type 1

Type 2

WARNINGBefore driving with a child in the vehicle,

be sure to lock the window switch to makeit inoperative. Children tampering withthe switch could easily trap their hands orheads in the window.

Safety mechanism (Driver’s door window of Type 1 only)

WARNING If the battery terminals are disconnected

or the fuse for electric window is replaced,the safety mechanism will be cancelled.If a hand or head got trapped, a seriousinjury could result.

CAUTION The safety mechanism is deactivated just

before the door window closes. This allowsthe door window to close completely. There-fore be especially careful that fingers are nottrapped in the door window opening.

The safety mechanism is deactivated whilethe switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-cially careful that fingers are not trapped inthe door window opening.

Do not deliberately trap your hands or headin order to activate the safety mechanism.Your hand or head could be trapped and per-sonal injury could result.

NOTE The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstancescause the door window to be subjected to aphysical shock similar to that caused bytrapped hand or head.

If the safety mechanism is activated 5 ormore times in a row, the safety mechanismwill be cancelled and the door window willnot close correctly. In such a case, the fol-lowing procedure should be implemented torectify this situation. If the window is open,repeatedly raise the driver’s door windowswitch until that window has been fullyclosed.Following this, release the switch, raise theswitch once again and hold it in this condi-tion for at least 1 second, then release it. Youshould now be able to operate in the normalfashion.

CAUTION


Parking brake


5

N00551400043

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-ception of pressure on the ears or a boomingor rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibitwind buffeting when driving with one or bothrear door windows down or partially opened.This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-mized. If the buffeting occurs with the reardoor windows open, open the front door win-dows as well as the rear door windows tominimize the condition.

N00511400399

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on auphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-tion for vehicles equipped with a manualtransaxle, set the selector lever to “P”(PARK) position for vehicles equipped with acontinuously variable transmission (CVT).

If the battery terminals are disconnected orthe fuse for electric window is replaced, thesafety mechanism will be cancelled and thedoor window will not automaticallyopen/close completely.If the window is open, repeatedly raise thedriver’s door window switch until the win-dow has been fully closed. Following this,release the switch, raise the switch onceagain and hold it in this condition for at least1 second, then release it. You should now beable to operate the driver’s door window inthe normal fashion.

What to do if you hear wind buffeting when driving

NOTE Parking brake To apply

1- Pull the lever up without pushing thebutton at the end of hand grip.When the parking brake is set and theignition switch or the operation mode isin the “ON” position, the brake warn-ing light in the instrument cluster willcome on.

Before driving, be sure to release theparking brake.


Steering wheel height adjustment


5

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,and turn the front wheels toward the curb on adownhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.

N00511500231

To adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition, move the lever upward or down-ward while moving the steering wheel to thedesired level.

N00511600317

Adjust the inside rearview mirror only aftermaking any seat adjustments so as to have aclear view to the rear of the vehicle.

To deactivate

1- Pull the lever up slightly.2- Press and hold the button at the end of

the hand grip.3- Push the lever downward.

CAUTIONBefore driving, be sure that the parking

brake is fully released and brake warninglight is off.If you drive without the parking brake fullyreleased, the warning lamp will illuminateand a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speedexceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).If a vehicle is driven without releasing theparking brake, the brakes will be overheated,resulting in ineffective braking and possiblebrake failure.

Steering wheel height adjustment

A- Wheel lockB- Release

WARNINGAfter adjusting, make sure the lever is

secured in the locked (A) position.Do not attempt to adjust the steering

wheel while driving. This can be danger-ous.

When releasing the lever (moving it to theposition (B)), be sure to hold the steeringwheel firmly. Otherwise, the steeringwheel may slip down too suddenly.

Inside rearview mirror


Outside rearview mirrors


5Adjust the inside mirror to maximize theview through the rear window.

It is possible to move the mirror up and downto adjust its position.

It is possible to move the mirror up/down andleft/right to adjust its position.

The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of themirror can be used to adjust the mirror toreduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-cles behind you during night driving.

N00512200206

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only aftermaking any seat adjustments so as to have aclear view to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNINGDo not attempt to adjust the inside rear-

view mirror while driving. This can bedangerous.Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-ing.

To adjust the vertical mirror position

To adjust the mirror position

To reduce the glare

1- Daytime position2- Night position

Outside rearview mirrors

WARNINGDo not attempt to adjust the outside rear-

view mirrors while driving. This can bedangerous.Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-ing.


Ignition switch


5

N00549100144

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedwhen the ignition switch or the operationmode is in ON or ACC.Move the lever (A) to the same side as themirror you wish to adjust.

Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-tion.

N00549200099

The outside mirror can be manually folded intowards the side window to prevent damagewhen parking in tight locations.

N00549301286

When the rear window defogger switch ispressed with the engine running, the outsiderearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.Current will flow through the heater elementinside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost orcondensation.The indicator light (A) will illuminate whilethe defogger is on.The heater will be turned off automatically inabout 20 minutes.

N00512401726

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-handAdvanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.The objects you see in the mirror will looksmaller and farther away than theyappear in a regular flat mirror.Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-tance of vehicles following you whenchanging lanes.

To adjust the mirror position

L- Left outside mirror adjustmentR- Right outside mirror adjustment

WARNING

1- Up2- Down3- Right4- Left

NOTEAfter adjusting, return the lever to the “•”

(OFF) position (C).

To fold the mirror

Door mirror heater (if so equipped)

Ignition switch


Ignition switch


5

For information on operations for vehiclesequipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter(F.A.S.T.-key):Engine switch” on page 5-13.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theFree-hand Advanced Security Transmit-ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

The engine is off. The key can be inserted andremoved only when the switch is in this posi-tion.

Allows operation of some electrical accesso-ries with the engine off.

The engine runs and all accessories can beused.

Engages the starter. Release the key when theengine starts.It will automatically return tothe “ON” position.

N00550900201

1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)position {continuously variable transmis-sion (CVT)}.

2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position andremove it.

OFF

ACC

ON

START

NOTEYour vehicle is equipped with an electronic

immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID codewhich the transponder inside the key sendsmust match the one registered to the immobi-lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-bilizer” on page 5-3.)

To remove the key

CAUTION If the engine is stopped while driving, the

brake servomechanism will cease to functionand braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,the power steering system will not functionand it will require greater manual effort tooperate the steering.

Do not leave the key in the “ON” position fora long time when the engine is not running,doing so will cause the battery to be dis-charged.

Do not turn the key to the “START” positionwhen the engine is running, doing so coulddamage the starter motor.


Starting the engine


5

N00512601816

[For vehicles equipped with the Free-handAdvanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)]For information on operation for vehiclesequipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping theengine” on page 5-16.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theFree-hand Advanced Security Transmit-ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]

Do not operate the starter motor continu-ously for longer than 15 seconds as thiscould run the battery down or damage thestarter motor. If the engine does not start,turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”position, wait a few seconds, and then tryagain. Trying repeatedly with the engineor starter motor still turning will damagethe starter mechanism.

If the engine will not start because the bat-tery is weak or discharged, refer to“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)for instructions.

A longer warm up period will only con-sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed upenough for driving when the low coolanttemperature indicator goes out.Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-cator” on page 5-71.

This model is equipped with an electronicallycontrolled fuel injection system. This is a sys-tem that automatically controls fuel injection.

There is usually no need to depress the accel-erator pedal when starting the engine.The starter should not be run for more than 15seconds at a time.To prevent battery drain, wait a few secondsbetween attempts to restart the engine.

1. Make sure all occupants are properlyseated with seat belts fastened.

2. Insert the ignition key.3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with

your right foot.5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way

down (manual transaxle).

6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”(Neutral) position.On vehicles equipped with continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT), make surethe selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)position.

Starting the engine

Tips for starting

WARNINGNever run the engine in a closed or poorly

ventilated area any longer than is neededto move your vehicle out of the area. Car-bon monoxide gas, which is odorless andextremely poisonous, could build up andcause serious injury or death.

CAUTIONDo not push-start the vehicle.Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive

at high speeds until the engine has had achance to warm up.

Release the ignition switch as soon as theengine starts. Otherwise, the starter motorwill be damaged.

Starting the engine

NOTEOn vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,

the starter will not operate unless the clutchpedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock).


Manual transaxle (if so equipped)


57. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion and make certain that all warninglights are functioning properly beforestarting the engine.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”position without pressing the acceleratorpedal. Release the key when the enginestarts.

After several attempts, you may experiencethat the engine still does not start.

1. Make sure that all electric devices, suchas lights, air conditioning blower and rearwindow defogger, are turned off.

2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-uously variable transmission (CVT)} orthe clutch pedal (manual transaxle), pressthe accelerator pedal halfway and hold itthere, then crank the engine. Release theaccelerator pedal, immediately after theengine starts.

3. If the engine still will not start, the enginecould be flooded with too much gasoline.While depressing the brake pedal (CVT)or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle),push the accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there, then crank theengine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni-tion switch to the “OFF” position andrelease the accelerator pedal. Wait a fewseconds, and then crank the engine againfor 5 to 6 seconds while depressing thebrake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal(manual transaxle), but do not push theaccelerator pedal. Release the ignition keyif the engine starts. If the engine fails tostart, repeat these procedures. If theengine still will not start, contact yourlocal Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice for assistance.

When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20°C) or lower, it may not be possible to startfrom a standstill even with the selector leverin the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)position.This phenomenon occurs because the trans-axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it doesnot indicate a problem. If this occurs, placethe selector lever in the “P” (PARK) positionand let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.The transaxle will warm up, and you will beable to start normally.Do not leave the vehicle during warm-upoperation.

N00512701181

The shift pattern below is shown on the gear-shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the waydown while shifting gears.

NOTEOn vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter

will not operate unless the selector lever is inthe “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”(PARK) position so that the wheels arelocked.

NOTEMinor noises may be heard on engine start-

up. These will disappear as the engine warmsup.

When the engine is hard to start

Startability of CVT vehicle with ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower





5

Press the clutch pedal all the way down andshift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position. Thengradually release the clutch pedal whiledepressing the accelerator pedal.

N00537400065

Always use care to change the gear with thevehicle speed matched to the engine speed.Proper shifting will improve fuel economyand prolong engine life.

N00512900131

For the best fuel economy and performance inusing your manual transaxle, upshift as listedbelow.

At low altitude locations, shift at the vehiclespeeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruiseconditions (relatively steady speeds) willimprove your fuel economy.

NOTEDuring cold weather, shifting may be diffi-

cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmedup. This is normal and not harmful to thetransaxle.

To start

CAUTIONDo not move the gearshift lever into reverse

while the vehicle is moving forward; doingso will damage the transaxle.

Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalbecause this will cause premature clutchwear or damage.

Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position(illegal in many states).

Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,because this can result in premature wear ofthe transaxle shift forks.

NOTE If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the

clutch pedal a second time; the shift will thenbe easier.

To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move thegearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,and then shift it into reverse.

To avoid grinding noises when shifting intoreverse, wait approximately 3 seconds withthe clutch pedal depressed when the vehicleis stationary.

Proper shift points

CAUTION CAUTIONAvoid downshifting that may cause the

tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.This puts the engine at risk of being dam-aged.

Upshifting

Shift pointUpshift speeds

Acceleration Cruise1st gear to 2nd gear

15 mph (24 km/h)

15 mph (24 km/h)

2nd gear to 3rd gear

28 mph (45 km/h)

19 mph (31 km/h)

3rd gear to 4th gear

36 mph (58 km/h)

33 mph (53 km/h)

4th gear to 5th gear

45 mph (72 km/h)

45 mph (72 km/h)


Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)


5

At high altitude locations, upshift as listedbelow.

N00513000096

It is recommended that you downshift to alower gear when needed to maintain thedesired speed, according to the table.Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. Theengine may suffer damage.To maintain a safe speed and prolong brakelife, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-ing a steep hill.Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-ging” the engine at too low a speed, such aswhen turning a corner or when driving up asteep hill.

N00513100244

Do not use the gearshift lever as a han-drest. This can result in premature wear ofthe transaxle shift forks.

The table above shows the maximum rec-ommended driving speed for in each gear.Do not drive near or at these speeds forprolonged periods of time.

N00560200050

The CVT will automatically and continuouslychange its gear ratio depending on road anddriving conditions. This helps achievesmooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.

The transmission prevents unnecessaryupshifts even when the accelerator pedal isreleased and ensures smooth driving.

According to the conditions, the transmissionwill automatically shift to a lower gear ratioto achieve stronger engine braking. This mayhelp reduce your need to use the servicebrake.

N00560301087

As an additional safety precaution, modelsequipped with a continuously variable trans-mission have a shift-lock device that holds

Shift point Upshift speeds1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)

Downshifting

Recommended downshifting speed

Downshifting speed Shift pointUnder 20 mph

(32 km/h)Shift down from cur-rent gear to 2nd gear.

20 to 30 mph (32 to 48 km/h)

Shift down from cur-rent gear to 3rd gear.

Driving precautions

Maximum possible driving speed

Shift points

Maximum possible driving speed

1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h)2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h)3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h)4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h)

Downshifting speed Shift point Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

DRIVING UPHILL

DRIVING DOWNHILL

Selector lever operation




5

the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.To move the selector lever from the “P”(PARK) position to another position, followthe steps below.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.2. Move the selector lever to the desired

position.

The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-cally when the selector lever is in the “D”(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed ofthe vehicle and the position of the acceleratorpedal.

N00563300049

When the selector lever cannot be shiftedfrom the “P” (PARK) position to anotherposition while the brake pedal is pressed andheld down with the ignition switch or theoperation mode in ON, the battery may be flator the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-tioning.Immediately have your vehicle checked by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

NOTE The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”

(PARK) to another position if the ignitionswitch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper-ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if thebrake pedal is not pressed and held down.

Set the selector lever in the gate tooperate while the brake pedal isdepressed.Set the selector lever in the gate tooperate.

WARNINGAlways press the brake pedal when shift-

ing the selector lever into a selector posi-tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.When beginning to drive, do not shift theselector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)position while pressing the acceleratorpedal. This will cause the vehicle to“jump” forward or backward.

NOTE To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,

make sure you stop briefly at each position.After operating, check the position in themulti-information display.

If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,the shift-lock device activates to prevent theselector lever from being moved from the“P” (PARK) position.

For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before movingthe selector lever. If you attempt to move theselector lever before depressing the brakepedal, the selector lever may not move.

When the selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-tion




5

If you need to move the vehicle, shift theselector lever as follows.

1. Make sure the parking brake is fullyapplied.

2. Stop the engine if it is running.3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its

tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Prygently as shown to remove the cover.

4. Depress the brake pedal with the rightfoot.

5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lockrelease hole (B). Shift the selector lever tothe “N” (NEUTRAL) position whilepressing the screwdriver down.

N00560400078

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is put inON, the selector lever position is shown onthe multi-information display.

N00560601093

This position locks the transmission to pre-vent the vehicle from moving. The engine canbe started from the “P” (PARK) position.

Move the lever to this position only after thevehicle has come to a complete stop.

At this position, the transmission is disen-gaged. It is the same as the neutral position ona manual transaxle and should be used whenthe vehicle is not moving for an extendedlength of time during driving, such as in atraffic jam.

Selector lever position display

Selector lever positions

“P” PARK

“R” REVERSE

CAUTIONNever shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is inmotion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position whilethe vehicle is in motion, the transmissionmay be damaged.

“N” NEUTRAL




5

This position is used for most city and high-way driving. The transmission will automati-cally and continuously change its gear ratiodepending on road and driving conditions.

Use when engine braking is needed, or forhigh-power sport drive.

This position is for driving up very steep hillsand for engine braking at low speeds whendriving down steep hills.

N00549500018

N00574601036

When the selector lever position indicatorblinks while you are driving, there could be amalfunction in the automatic transaxle systemor CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-mally high.

WARNINGNever move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving sinceyou could accidentally slip it into the “P”(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,damaging the transmission.

To prevent the vehicle from rolling whenstopped on a slope, the engine should bestarted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

To prevent rolling, always keep your footon the brake pedal when the vehicle is in“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.

“D” DRIVE

CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, never shift

into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is inmotion.

“Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING

“L” LOW

WARNINGThis position can be used for maximum

engine braking.Be very careful not to shift into “L”(LOW) suddenly.Sudden engine braking may cause thetires to skid.Select this position according to the roadconditions and vehicle speed.

When a malfunction occurs in the automatic transaxle

When the selector lever position indicator blinks

NOTE The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT

selector lever switch is broken.It is not seen during normal driving.




5

N00560801079

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)position (when passing another vehicle) pushthe accelerator to the floor. The CVT willautomatically downshift.

CAUTION If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while

driving, the indicator will blink.In this case, immediately park your vehiclein a safe place and follow these procedures:[If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]Park your vehicle in a safe place but do notturn off the engine. Move the selector leverto the “P” (PARK) position and open theengine hood. Keep the engine, idling.After a while, move the selector lever intoany position other than “P” (PARK) positionand confirm that the indicator stops blinking.It is safe to continue driving if the indicatorno longer blinks.If the indicator continues blinking or blinksintermittently, have your vehicle inspected atan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer orrepair facility of your choice.[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2seconds), the CVT may be operating in fail-safe mode due to a malfunction.]Have the vehicle inspected at an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility ofyour choice as soon as possible.

Operation of the CVT

CAUTIONBefore selecting a position with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary, firmlydepress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-cle from creeping.The vehicle will begin to move as soon as theCVT is engaged, especially when the enginespeed or idle speed is high, or with the airconditioning (cooling or heating) operating.Do not release the brake pedal until you areready to drive away.

Depress the brake pedal with the right foot atall times.Using the left foot could cause driver move-ment delay in case of an emergency.

To prevent sudden acceleration, never runthe engine at high rpms when shifting fromthe “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).

Operating the accelerator pedal while theother foot is resting on the brake pedal willaffect braking efficiency and may cause pre-mature wear of brake pads.

Use the selector lever in the correct shiftposition in accordance with driving condi-tions.Never coast downhill backward in the driv-ing shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”(LOW) or coast forward in the “R”(REVERSE) position.Engine stopping and increased brake pedaland steering effort could lead to an accident.

Do not rev the engine with the brake pedalpressed when the vehicle is stationary.This can damage the CVT.Also, when you depress the accelerator pedalwhile holding down the brake pedal with theselector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,the engine revolutions may not rise as highas when performing the same operation withthe selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)position.

Passing acceleration

CAUTION


Service brake


5

For short waiting periods, such as at trafficlights, the vehicle can be left in selector leverposition and held stationary with the servicebrake.For longer waiting periods with the enginerunning, place the selector lever in the “N”(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parkingbrake, while holding the vehicle stationarywith the service brake.Prior to moving off after having stopped thevehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in“D” (DRIVE) position.

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

and then move the selector lever to the “P”(PARK) position.

If the CVT does not shift while driving, oryour vehicle does not pick up enough speedwhen starting on an uphill slope, it may bethat there is something unusual happening inthe transmission. Have your vehicle checkedat an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer ora repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-sible.

N00517501328

Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,resulting in poor brake response and prema-ture wear of the brake pads.When driving down a long or steep hill, useengine braking by moving the selector leverto “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV-ING) or “L” (LOW) position.

N00517601462

Your vehicle is equipped with power brakesfor more braking force with less brake pedaleffort.Your brakes are designed to operate at fullcapacity, even if the power assist is not beingused.If the power assist is not being used, the effortneeded to press the brake pedal is greater.If you should lose the power assist for somereason, the brakes will still work.

Waiting

CAUTION To avoid transmission overheating, never try

to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill byusing the accelerator pedal. Always applythe parking brake and/or service brake.

Do not rev the engine unnecessarily whilethe vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-ation may occur if the selector lever is in aposition other than “P” (PARK) or “N”(NEUTRAL).

Parking

When the CVT makes no speed change

Service brake

Brake pedal

WARNINGDo not leave any objects near the brake

pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;doing so could prevent the full pedalstroke that would be necessary in anemergency. Make sure that the pedal canbe operated freely at all times. Make surethe floor mat is securely held in place.

CAUTION It is important not to drive the vehicle with

your foot resting on the brake pedal whenbraking is not required. This practice canresult in very high brake temperatures, pre-mature lining wear, and possible damage tothe brakes.

Power brakes


Hill start assist


5

If the power brake unit or either of the twobrake hydraulic systems stops working prop-erly, the rest of the brake system will stillwork, but the vehicle will not slow down asquickly.You will know this has happened if you findyou need to press the brake down farther, orharder when slowing down or stopping, or ifthe brake warning light and the warning dis-play in the multi-information display comeson. Have the brake system repaired at anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice immediately.

N00550700124

The disc brakes have an alarm that makes ametallic squeal when the brake pads haveworn down enough to need service.If you hear this sound, have the brake padsreplaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice.

N00562601114

The hill start assist makes it easy to start offon a steep uphill slope by preventing thevehicle from moving backwards. It keeps thebrakes applied for about 2 seconds when youmove your foot from the brake pedal to theaccelerator pedal.

N00562701115

1. Stop the vehicle completely using thebrake pedal.

WARNINGNever coast downhill with the engine OFF.

Keep the engine running whenever yourvehicle is in motion. If you turn off theengine while driving, the power brakebooster will stop working and your brakeswill not work as well.

If the power assist is lost or if either brakehydraulic system stops working properly,take your vehicle to an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-ity of your choice immediately.

Brake pad wear alarm

WARNINGDriving with worn brake pads will make it

harder to stop, and can cause an accident.

Hill start assist

CAUTIONDo not overly rely on the hill start assist to

prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.Under certain circumstances, even when hillstart assist is activated, the vehicle maymove backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavilyloaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-pery.

The hill start assist is not designed to keepthe vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopesfor more than 2 seconds.

When facing uphill, do not rely on using thehill start assist to maintain a stopped positionas an alternative to depressing the brakepedal.Doing so could cause an accident.

Do not perform the following operationwhile the hill start assist is operating.[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or“ACC” position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. Thehill start assist could stop operating, whichcould result in an accident.

To operate


Brake assist system


5

2. On vehicles with M/T, place the gearshiftlever into the 1st position.On vehicles with CVT, place the selectorlever into the “D” (DRIVE) position.

3. Release the brake pedal and the hill startassist will maintain the braking forceapplied while stopping for approximately2 seconds.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hillstart assist gradually will decrease thebraking force as the vehicle starts moving.

N00562800092

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-tem, the following indicator will turn on.

N00567301116

The brake assist system is a device assistingdrivers who cannot depress the brake pedalfirmly such as in emergency stop situationsand provides greater braking force.

NOTEWhen reversing on an uphill slope, place the

gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R”position.

NOTE The hill start assist is activated when all of

the following conditions are met.• The engine is running.

(The hill start assist will not be activatedwhile the engine is starting or immediatelyafter the engine is started.)

• On vehicles with M/T, the gearshift lever isin the following position.[When starting an uphill slope forwards.]The gearshift lever is in any position otherthan “R” (Reverse).(The hill start assist will operate, even if thegearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) posi-tion.)[When starting an uphill slope backwards.]The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)position.(The hill start assist will not operate whenthe gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)position.)

• On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever isin any position other than “P” (PARK) or“N” (NEUTRAL).

• The vehicle is completely stationary, withthe brake pedal depressed.

• The parking brake is released. The hill start assist will not operate if the

accelerator pedal is depressed before thebrake pedal is released.

The hill start assist also operates whenreversing on an uphill slope.

When the hill start assist is activated, youmay feel the operating sound or vibrationfrom under the body.This is a normal result of the hill start assistoperation, and does not indicate a problem.

NOTE Warning indicator

- ASC indicator

CAUTION If the warning is displayed, the hill start

assist will not operate. Start off carefully. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the

engine.Restart the engine and check whether theindicator goes out, in which case the hill startassist is again working normally. If they remain displayed or reappear fre-quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicleimmediately, but the vehicle should beinspected by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice as soon as possible.

Brake assist system


Anti-lock braking system


5

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, thebrakes will be applied with more force thanusual. N00517900338

The anti-lock braking system helps preventthe wheels from locking up when braking.This helps maintain vehicle drivability andsteering wheel handling.

When using the anti-lock brakes (suddenbraking), steering is slightly differentfrom normal driving conditions. Use thesteering wheel carefully.

Always keep a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-cle is equipped with the anti-lock brakingsystem, leave a greater braking distancewhen:• Driving on gravel or snow-covered

roads.• Driving on uneven road surfaces.Operation of anti-lock braking system is

not restricted situations where brakes areapplied suddenly. This system may alsoprevent the wheels from locking whenyou drive over manholes, steel roadworkplates, road markings, or any uneven roadsurface.

When the anti-lock braking system is inuse, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-ing and hear a unique sound. It may alsofeel as if the pedal resists being pressed.In this situation, simply hold the brakepedal down firmly. Do not pump thebrake, which will result in reducedbraking performance.

CAUTION The brake assist system is not a device

designed to exercise braking force greaterthan its capacity. Make sure to always keep asufficient distance between your vehicle anda vehicle in front of you without relying toomuch on the brake assist system.

NOTEOnce the brake assist system is operational,

it maintains great braking force even if thebrake pedal is lightly released.To stop its operation, completely removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

When the brake assist system is in use whiledriving, you may feel as if the depressedbrake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in smallmotions in conjunction with the operationnoise, or the vehicle body and the steeringwheel vibrate. This occurs when the brakeassist system is operating normally and doesnot indicate faulty operation. Continue todepress the brake pedal.

When the anti-lock brake system warninglight is illuminated, the brake assist system isnot functioning.


Driving hints CAUTION

The anti-lock braking system cannot preventaccidents. It is your responsibility to takesafety precautions and to drive carefully.

To prevent failure of the anti-lock brakingsystem, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are thesame size and the same type.

NOTEYou may feel the operating sound or vibra-

tion from under the body when drivingimmediately after starting the engine. This isa normal result the anti-lock braking systemmakes when performing a self-check. It doesnot indicate a problem.

The anti-lock braking system can be usedafter the vehicle has reached a speed overapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stopsworking when the vehicle slows below 3mph (5 km/h).




5

N00531600674

If there is a malfunction in the system, theanti-lock braking system warning light willcome on.Under normal conditions, the ABS warninglight comes on when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position or the operationmode is put in ON and goes off a few secondslater.

N00531700604

Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.Test the system by restarting the engineand driving at a speed of about 12 mph(20 km/h) or higher.If the warning light then remains off dur-ing driving, there is no abnormal condi-tion.However, if the warning light does notdisappear, or if they come on again whenthe vehicle is driven, have the vehiclechecked by an authorized MITSUBISHIMOTORS dealer or repair facility of yourchoice as soon as possible.

The anti-lock braking system and brake forcedistribution function may not work, so hardbraking could make the vehicle unstable.Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact anauthorized MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer orrepair facility of your choice.

N00529200080

After driving on snow or icy roads, removeany snow and ice which may have be leftaround the wheels. On vehicles that have ananti-lock braking system, be careful not todamage the wheel speed sensors (A) or thecables located at each wheel.

Anti-lock braking system warn-ing light

CAUTIONAny of the following indicates that the anti-

lock braking system is not functioning andonly the standard brake system is working.(The standard brake system is functioningnormally.) If this happens, take your vehicleto an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer ora repair facility of your choice.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is putin ON, the warning light does not come onor it remains on and does not go off.

• The warning light comes on while driving

If the warning light illuminate while driving

If only the anti-lock braking sys-tem warning light illuminate

CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system warning light and brake warning light illuminate at the same time

After driving on icy roads


Electric power steering system (EPS)


5

N00568400074

The power steering system operates while theengine is running. It helps reduce the effortneeded to turn the steering wheel.The power steering system has mechanicalsteering capability in case the power assist islost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-cle, but you will notice it takes much moreeffort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-cle inspected at an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice.

If there is a malfunction in the system, thewarning light will come on.Under normal conditions, the warning lampcomes on when the ignition switch is turnedto the “ON” position or the operation mode isput in ON, and goes off after the engine hasstarted.

Electric power steering sys-tem (EPS)

Front Rear WARNINGDo not stop the engine while the vehicle is

moving. Stopping the engine would makethe steering wheel extremely hard to turn,possibly resulting in an accident.

NOTEDuring repeated full-lock turning of the

steering wheel (for example, while you aremanoeuvring the vehicle into a parkingspace), a protection function may be acti-vated to prevent overheating of the powersteering system. This function will make thesteering wheel gradually harder to turn. Inthis event, limit your turning of the steeringwheel for a while. When the system hascooled down, the steering effort will returnto normal.

If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-cle is stationary with the headlights on, theheadlights may become dim. This behavioris not abnormal. The headlights will return totheir original brightness after a short while.

Electric power steering system warning light

CAUTION If the warning light appears while the engine

is running, have the vehicle inspected by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice as soon as pos-sible. It may become harder to turn the steer-ing wheel.


Active stability control (ASC)


5

N00559100176

The Active stability control (ASC) takesoverall control of the anti-lock braking sys-tem, traction control function and skid controlfunction to help maintain the vehicle’s controland traction. Please read this section in con-junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-ing system, traction control function and skidcontrol function.

Anti-lock braking system P.5-47Traction control function P.5-50Skid control function P.5-50

N00559200076

On slippery surfaces, the traction controlfunction prevents the drive wheels from spin-

ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle tostart moving from a stopped condition. It alsoprovides sufficient driving force and steeringperformance as the vehicle turns while press-ing the acceleration pedal.

N00559300051

The skid control function is designed to helpthe driver maintain control of the vehicle onslippery roads or during rapid steeringmaneuvers. It works by controlling the engineoutput and the brake on each wheel.

N00559400254

The ASC is automatically activated when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” positionor the operation mode is put in ON. You can


CAUTIONDo not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC

cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsfrom acting on the vehicle. This system, likeany other system, has limits and cannot helpyou to maintain traction and control of thevehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’sresponsibillty to drive carefully, This meanstaking into account the traffic, road and envi-ronmental conditions.

Be sure to use the same specified type andsize of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, theASC may not work properly.

Do not install any aftermarket limited slipdifferential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASCmay stop functioning properly.

NOTEAn operating sound or vibration may be

emitted from under the body in the followingsituations. The sound or vibration is associ-ated with checking the operations of theASC. At this time, you may feel a shockfrom under the body and the brake pedal ifyou depress it. These do not indicate a mal-function.• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is putin ON.

• When the vehicle is driven for a while afterthe engine is turned on.

When the ASC is activated, you may feel avibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-ing sound from the engine compartment.This indicates that the system is operatingnormally. It does not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti-lock braking system warninglight is illuminated, the ASC is not active.

Traction control function

CAUTION

CAUTIONWhen driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy

road, be sure to install snow tires and drivethe vehicle at moderate speeds.

Skid control function

NOTE The skid control function operates at speeds

of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.

ASC OFF switch




5

deactivate the system by pressing down the“ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer. When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;the indicator is turned off.

N00546500118N00546600119

If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-tem, the following indicator will turn on.

CAUTION For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch

should be operated when your vehicle isstopped.

Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving innormal circumstances.

NOTEUsing the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both

the stability control function and the tractioncontrol function.

When moving out of mud, sand or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedal may notallow the engine speed to increase. In suchsituations, temporarily turning off ASC withthe “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier tomove out your vehicle.

If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-taken operation protection function” willactivate and the ASC will turn back on.

ASC operation indicator or ASC OFF indicator

- ASC operation indicatorThe indicator will blink when theASC is operating.

- ASC OFF indicatorThis indicator will turn on when theASC is turned off with the “ASCOFF” switch.

CAUTIONWhen indicator blinks, ASC is operating,

which means that the road is slippery or thatyour vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.If this happens, drive slower with less accel-erator input.

NOTE NOTE The indicator may turn on when you start

the engine. This means that the battery volt-age momentarily dropped when the enginewas started. It does not indicate a malfunc-tion, provided that the display goes outimmediately.

When a compact spare tire has been put onyour vehicle, the gripping ability of the tirewill be lower, making it more likely that the

indicator will blink.

ASC warning indicator

- ASC indicator

- ASC OFF indicator


Cruise control (if so equipped)


5

N00546300031

N00518300573

Cruise control is an automatic speed controlsystem that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-vated at speeds from about 25 mph(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work atspeeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.

Used to reduce the set speed and to set thedesired speed.

CAUTION The system may be malfunctioning.

Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop theengine.Restart the engine and check whether theindicator goes out. If they go out, there is noabnormal condition. If they do not go out orappear frequently, it is not necessary to stopthe vehicle immediately, but you should haveyour vehicle inspected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice as soon as possible.

Towing

CAUTIONWhen towing the vehicle with only the front

wheels or only the rear wheels raised off theground, do not place the ignition switch inthe “ON” position or do not put the operationmode in ON. Placing the ignition switch inthe “ON” position or putting the operationmode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,resulting in an accident.Note that the correct towing method dependson the transmission type and the vehicle’sdrive configuration.For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.


CAUTIONWhen you do not wish to drive at a set speed,

turn off the cruise control for safety.Do not use cruise control when driving con-

ditions will not allow you to stay at the samespeed, such as in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,slippery, on a steep downhill slope.

On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,do not move the gearshift lever to the “N”(Neutral) position while driving at a setspeed without depressing the clutch pedal.The engine will run too fast and might bedamaged.

NOTECruise control may not be able to keep your

speed on uphills or downhills.Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.

You may use the accelerator pedal if youwant to stay at your set speed.

Your speed may increase to more than the setspeed on a steep downhill. You have to usethe brake to control your speed. As a result,the set speed driving is deactivated.

Cruise control switches

A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch

B- SET - switch

NOTE




5

Used to increase the set speed and to return tothe original set speed.

Used to deactivate the set speed driving.

N00518400385

1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-tion or the operation mode is in ON, pressthe CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch(A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-cator in the meter cluster will come on.

2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desiredspeed, then press and release the SET -switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-nated. The vehicle will then maintain thedesired speed.

N00518500344

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

Press and hold the RES + switch (C) whiledriving at the set speed, and your speed willthen gradually increase.When you reach your desired speed, releasethe switch. Your new cruising speed is nowset.

C- RES + switch

D- CANCEL switch

NOTEWhen operating the cruise control switches,

press the cruise control switches correctly.The set speed driving may be deactivatedautomatically if two or more switches of thecruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activate

Indicator

NOTEWhen you release the SET - switch, the vehi-

cle speed will be set.

To increase the set speed

RES + switch




5

To increase your speed in small amounts,press the RES + switch for less than about 1second and release it.Each time you press the RES + switch, yourvehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

While driving at the set speed, use the accel-erator pedal to reach your desired speed andthen press the SET - switch (B) and releasethe switch momentarily to set a new desiredcruising speed.

N00518600273

There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.

Press and hold the SET - switch (B) whiledriving at the set speed, and your speed willslow down gradually.When you reach your desired speed, releasethe switch. Your new cruising speed is nowset.

To slow down your speed in small amounts,press the SET - switch for less than about 1second and release it.Each time you press the SET - switch, yourvehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6km/h).

While driving at the set speed, use the brakepedal, which disengages the cruise control,

then press the SET - switch (B) and releasethe switch momentarily to set a new desiredcruising speed.

N00541700056

Depress the accelerator pedal as you wouldnormally. When you release the pedal, youwill return to your set speed.

Accelerator pedal

To decrease the set speed

SET - switch

Brake pedal

To temporarily increase or decrease the speed

To temporarily increase the speed




5

Depress the brake pedal to decrease thespeed. To return to the previously set speed,press the RES + switch (C).Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page5-56.

N00518800565

The set speed driving can be deactivated asfollows:

Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFFswitch (A). (Cruise control will be turnedoff.)

Press the CANCEL switch (D).Depress the brake pedal.

The set speed driving is deactivated automati-cally in any of the following ways.

When you depress the clutch pedal (onvehicles equipped with manual transaxle).

When your speed slows to about 10 mph(15 km/h) or more below the set speedbecause of a hill, etc.

When your speed slows to about 25 mph(40 km/h) or less.

When the active stability control (ASC)starts operating.Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”on page 5-50.

Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-vated as follow:

When the engine speed rises andapproaches the tachometer’s red zone (thered-colored part of the tachometer dial).

To temporarily decrease the speed

To deactivate

WARNINGOn vehicles equipped with continuously

variable transmission (CVT), although theset speed driving will be deactivated whenshifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,never move the selector lever to the “N”(NEUTRAL) position while driving.You would have no engine braking andcould cause a serious accident.

CAUTIONWhen the set speed driving is deactivated

automatically in any situation other thanthose listed above, there may be a systemmalfunction.Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFFswitch to turn off the cruise control and haveyour vehicle inspected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice.


Tire pressure monitoring system (if so equipped)


5

N00518900306

If the set speed driving is deactivated by thecondition described in “To deactivate” onpage 5-55, you can resume the previously setspeed by pressing the RES + switch (C) whiledriving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)or higher.

Under either of the following conditions,however, using the switch does not allow youto resume the previously set speed. In thesesituations, repeat the speed setting procedure:

The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFFswitch is pressed.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key] Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or“ACC” position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. Indicator is turned OFF.

N00530201609

The tire pressure monitoring system uses tireinflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheelsto monitor the tire inflation pressures. Thesystem only indicates when a tire is signifi-cantly under-inflated.

To resume the set speed


WARNINGThe compact spare wheel does not have a

tire inflation pressure sensor.When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-sure monitoring system will not workproperly.See an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer as soon as possible to replace orrepair the original tire.

NOTE The tire pressure monitoring system is not a

substitute for regularly checking tire infla-tion pressures.Be sure to check the tire inflation pressuresas described in “Tires” on page 9-12.

The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) isinstalled in the illustrated location.• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has

the metallic air valve (B), replace grommetand washer (C) with a new one when thetire is replaced.

• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which hasthe rubber air valve (D), replace rubber airvalve (D) with a new one when the tire isreplaced.




5

N00532701363

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the operation mode is put inON, the tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light normally illuminates and goesoff a few seconds later.

If one or more of the vehicle tires (except forthe spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,the warning light will remain illuminatedwhile the ignition switch or the operationmode is in ON.Refer to “If the warning light illuminateswhile driving” on page 5-58 and take the nec-essary measures.

For details, please contact your authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE

Type 1

Type 2

Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem warning light

CAUTION If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light does not illuminate when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position orthe operation mode is put in ON, it meansthat the tire pressure monitoring system isnot working properly. Have the systeminspected by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.In such situations, a malfunctioning of thesystem may be preventing the monitoring ofthe tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,sharp turning and high-speed driving.

If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-sure monitoring system, the tire pressuremonitoring system warning light will blinkfor approximately 1 minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. The warning lightwill issue further warnings each time theengine is restarted as long as the malfunctionexists.Check to see whether the warning light goesoff after few minutes driving.If it then goes off during driving, there is noproblem.However, if the warning light does not gooff, or if it blinks again when the engine isrestarted, have the vehicle inspected by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.In such situations, a malfunctioning of thesystem may be preventing the monitoring ofthe tire pressure. For safety reasons, whenthe warning light appears while driving,avoid sudden braking, sharp turning andhigh-speed driving.




5

Each tire, including the spare, should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi-cle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-tion pressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-tale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability. Pleasenote that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has not reachedthe level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately one min-ute and then remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator is illumi-nated, the system may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

N00532801540

1. If the tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light illuminates, avoid hardbraking, sharp steering maneuvers andhigh speeds. You should stop and adjustthe tires to the proper inflation pressure assoon as possible. Adjust the spare tire atthe same time. Refer to “Tires” on page9-12.

If the warning light illuminates while driving

NOTEWhen inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, do not apply excessive force to thevalve stem to avoid breakage.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-sure, always reinstall the valve cap on thevalve stem.Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture couldget into the valve, resulting in damage to thetire inflation pressure sensor.

Do not use metal valve caps, which maycause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosionand damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-sors.

Once adjustments have been made, the warn-ing light will go off after a few minutes ofdriving.




5

2. If the tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light remains illuminated afteryou have been driving for about 20 min-utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-sure, one or more of the tires may have apuncture. Inspect the tire and if it has apuncture, have it repaired by an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon aspossible. The tire pressure monitoring system may not

work normally in the following circum-stances:

A wireless facility or device using thesame frequency is near the vehicle.

Snow or ice is stuck inside the fendersand/or on the wheels.

The tire inflation pressure sensor’s batteryis dead.

Wheels other than Mitsubishi Genuinewheels are being used.

Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-tion pressure sensors are being used.

Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-rized by the vehicle are used.

Compact spare tire is fitted on a roadwheel.

A window tint that affects the radio wavesignals is installed.

N00532900153

If new wheels with new tire inflation pressuresensors are installed, their ID codes must beprogrammed into the tire pressure monitoringsystem. Have tire and wheel replacement per-formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tireinflation pressure sensors. If the wheelreplacement is not done by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered byyour warranty.

WARNING If the warning light illuminates while you

are driving, avoid hard braking, sharpsteering maneuvers and high speeds.Driving with an under-inflated tireadversely affects vehicle performance andcan result in an accident.

CAUTION The warning light may not illuminate imme-

diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapidleak.

NOTE To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-

tion pressure sensors, have any puncturedtire repaired by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer. If the tire repair is not done byan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor isnot covered by your warranty.

Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair sprayon any tire.Such a spray could damage the tire inflationpressure sensors.Have any puncture repaired by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

NOTE NOTE Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-

ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected tolarge variations in ambient temperature, thetire inflation pressures may be under-inflated(causing the warning light come on) whenthe ambient temperature is relatively low. Ifthe warning light comes on, adjust the tireinflation pressure.

Whenever the tires and wheels are replaced with new ones

CAUTION The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent

the proper fit of the tire inflation pressuresensors, resulting air leakage or damage ofthe sensors.


Instrument cluster


5

N00533000236

Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-ates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and IndustryCanada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).This device complies with part 15 of FCCRules and Industry Canada licence-exemptRSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions.

This device may not cause harmful inter-ference

This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

N00519001428

N00519101302

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed inmiles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour(km/h).

General information


approved by the manufacturer for compli-ance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Instrument cluster

1- Tachometer P.5-612- Multi-information display P.5-613- Speedometer P.5-604- Multi-information display switch

Speedometer

Type A

Type B

Type C


Multi-information display


5

N00519201332

The tachometer shows engine revolutions perminute. This allows the driver to determinethe most efficient selector position and enginespeed combinations.This gauge also assists in evaluating engineperformance.

N00555001389

The multi-information display includes theodometer, trip odometer, service reminder,fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.

Tachometer

Type D CAUTION The red zone indicates an engine speed

beyond the range of safe operation.Select the correct shift position (manualtransaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-trol the engine speed so that the tachometerindicator does not enter the red zone.


1- Information display P.5-622- Frozen road warning (if so equipped)

P.5-653- Fuel remaining display P.5-654- Selector lever position display (if so

equipped) P.5-41

NOTEWhen the ignition switch or the operation

mode is in OFF, the selector lever positiondisplay, fuel remaining display and frozenroad warning are not displayed.




5

N00574801041

Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.

Information display

1- Odometer P.5-632- Trip odometer P.5-633- Trip odometer P.5-634- Instrument panel light dimmer control

P.5-63

5- Driving range display P.5-646- Average fuel consumption display

P.5-647- Outside temperature display (if so

equipped) P.5-648- Service reminder (distance) P.5-66

9- Service reminder (month) P.5-66

NOTEWhen the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are

not displayed.While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.




5N00574900016

The odometer indicates the total distance thevehicle has traveled.

N00575000014

The trip odometer indicates the distance trav-eled between two points.

To return the display to 0, hold down themulti-information display switch for about 1second or more. Only the currently displayedvalue will be reset.

Example

If trip odometer is displayed, only tripodometer will be reset.

N00575101025

Turn the parking lights on and press themulti-information display switch (2), there isa sound and the brightness changes.

When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information displayswitch.

NOTE

Odometer

Trip odometer

Usage examples for trip odometer , tripodometer

It is possible to measure two currently trav-eled distances, from home using trip odom-eter and from a particular point on theway using trip odometer .

To reset the trip odometer

NOTEBoth trip odometers and can count

up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-meters.

When disconnecting the battery terminal, thememories of trip odometer displays and

are cleared, and their displays return to“0.0 miles/kilometers”.

Instrument panel light dimmer control

1- Brightness level2- Multi-information display switch

NOTEWhen the parking lights are illuminated, you

can adjust to 8 levels. Each time you reduce two brightness levels,

the segment display of the brightness leveldecreases by one segment.

If you press and hold the switch for longerthan about 1 second, the brightness automati-cally scrolls through its different levels, andstops scrolling when you release the switch.Select your desired level of brightness.

Bright Dim




5 N00575201042

This displays the approximate driving range(how many more miles or kilometers you candrive). When the driving range falls belowapproximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis-played.

N00575300017

This displays the average fuel consumptionfrom the last reset to the present.The reset mode conditions for the averagefuel consumption display can be switchedbetween “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.For information on how to change the aver-age fuel consumption display setting, refer to“Changing the function settings” on page5-67.

N00556501134

Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.

The brightness level of the instruments isstored when the ignition switch is turned tothe “OFF” position or the operation mode isput in OFF.

Driving range display

NOTE The driving range is determined based on the

fuel consumption data. This may varydepending on the driving conditions and hab-its. Treat the distance displayed as just arough guideline.

When you refuel, the driving range display isupdated.However, if you only add a small amount offuel, the correct value will not be displayed.Fill to a full tank whenever possible.

When your vehicle is stopped on anextremely steep hill, the driving range valuemay change. This is due to the movement offuel in the tank and does not indicate anybreakdown.

NOTE The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (miles or km).Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 5-67.

Average fuel consumption dis-play

NOTE The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately in both auto reset mode andmanual reset mode.

“---” is displayed when the average fuel con-sumption cannot be measured.

The initial (default) setting is “Auto resetmode”.

NOTEAverage fuel consumption may vary depend

on the driving conditions (road conditions,how you drive, etc.).The actual fuel consumption may differ fromthe fuel consumption displayed, so treat thefuel consumption displayed as just a roughguideline.

Disconnecting the battery cable will erasefrom memory the manual reset mode or autoreset mode setting for the average fuel con-sumption display.

The display setting can be changed to thepreferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 5-67.

Outside temperature display (if so equipped)

NOTE The display setting can be changed to the

preferred units (°F or °C).Refer to “Changing the function settings” onpage 5-67.

Depending on factors such as the drivingconditions, the displayed temperature mayvary from the actual outside temperature.

NOTE




5

N00579000038

If the outside air temperature drops belowapprox. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds andthe outside air temperature warning symbol(A) flashes for about 10 seconds.

N00575401031

The fuel remaining display indicates the fuellevel in the fuel tank when the ignition switchor the operation mode in ON.

When the remaining fuel level runs low (onesegment is displayed), the last segment of thefuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position or the operationmode is changed to ON.When the remaining fuel level runs very low(no segments displayed), the bar graphflashes.If the warning display appears, refuel as soonas possible.

Frozen road warning (if so equipped)

CAUTION There is a danger the road might be icy, even

when this symbol is not flashing, so pleasetake care when driving.

Fuel remaining display

1- Full0- Empty

NOTE It may take several seconds to stabilize the

display after refilling the tank. If fuel is added with the ignition switch or

the operation mode in ON, the remainingfuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuellevel.

The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fueltank filler door is located on the left side ofthe vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”on page 3-3.)

Fuel remaining warning display

NOTEOn hills or curves, the display may be incor-

rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

CAUTIONRunning out of gas could damage the cata-

lytic converter. If the warning displayappears, refuel as soon as possible.




5

N00556701309

Displays the approximate time until the nextrecommended periodic inspection. “---” isdisplayed when the inspection time hasarrived.

1. Shows the time until the next periodicinspection.

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-tion is due. Contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-ity of your choice to have the systemchecked.

3. After your vehicle is inspected at anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, itdisplays the time until the next periodicinspection.

The “---” display can be reset while the igni-tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the infor-mation display switches to the servicereminder display.

2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-play switch for about 1 second or more tomake the wrench symbol start flashing. (Ifthere is no operation for about 10 secondswith flashing, the display will revert to itsoriginal indication.)

Service reminder

NOTE The service reminder time can be modified

by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. Forfurther information, please contact yourauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Distance

Month

NOTE Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100

km) and the time in units of 1 month.

NOTEWhen the next periodic inspection is

approaching, the wrench symbol will be dis-played whenever the ignition switch isturned from the “OFF” position to the “ON”position or when the operation mode ischanged from OFF to ON.The wrench symbol will continuously be dis-played, even on non-service reminder dis-plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until theservice reminder is reset.When the service reminder resets, thewrench symbol will not be displayed untilthe next periodic inspection.

To reset




5

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightlypress the multi-information meter switch,the display switches from “---” to“cLEAr”. After that, the time until thenext periodic inspection is shown.

N00556801267

The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”,“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperatureunit” setting can be modified as desired,when the ignition switch or the operationmode is ON.

N00575501032

You can change the mode condition for theaverage fuel consumption display to “Autoreset” or “Manual reset”.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the infor-mation display switches to the drivingrange display.Refer to “Information display” on page5-62.

2. Each time you press the multi-informationdisplay switch for 1 second or more ondriving range display, you can switchreset mode for average fuel consumption.(A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual resetmode)

When the average fuel consumption isbeing displayed, if you hold down themulti-information display switch, thesecalculations will be reset to zero.

When the following operation is per-formed, the mode setting changes auto-matically from manual to auto.

CAUTION The customer is responsible for making sure

that regular inspections and maintenance andperiodic inspections and maintenance areperformed.Inspections and maintenance must be per-formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-tions.

NOTE The “---” display cannot be reset while the

ignition switch or the operation mode is inON.

When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-tance and a certain period of time, the dis-play is reset and the time until the nextperiodic inspection is displayed.

If you accidentally reset the display, consultan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer forassistance.

Changing the function settings

CAUTION The driver should not operate the display

while the vehicle is in motion.When operating the system, stop the vehicle

in a safe area.

Changing the reset mode for aver-age fuel consumption

NOTE

Manual reset mode

Auto reset mode Manual reset mode




5

[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]Change the operation mode to ON fromACC or OFF.

When the average fuel consumption isbeing displayed, if you hold down themulti-information display switch, thesecalculations will be reset to zero.

When the engine switch or the operationmode is in the following conditions, theaverage fuel consumption display willautomatically reset.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]The ignition switch has been set to the“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4hours or more.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]The operation mode has been set to ACCor OFF for about 4 hours or more.

N00557100156

The fuel consumption display unit can bechanged. The distance and amount units arealso switched to match the selected fuel con-sumption unit.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the infor-mation display switches to the averagefuel consumption display.Refer to “Information display” on page5-62.

2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-play switch for about 5 seconds or moreuntil buzzer sound is heard twice.

3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-play switch to switch in sequence from“km/L” “L/100 km” “mpg” “km/L”.

The distance units is also changed in the fol-lowing combinations to match the selectedfuel consumption unit.

Auto reset mode

NOTE The average fuel consumption display can be

reset separately for the auto reset mode andfor the manual reset mode.

Disconnecting the battery cable will erasefrom memory the manual reset mode or autoreset mode setting for the average fuel con-sumption display.

The initial (default) setting is “Auto resetmode”.

Changing the fuel consumption display unit

NOTE The display units for the driving range, the

average fuel consumption are changed, butthe units for the indicating needle (speedom-eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and theservice reminder will remain unchanged.

If the battery is disconnected, the memory ofthe unit setting is erased and it returns auto-matically to factory setting.




5

N00557201183

The temperature display unit can be switched.

1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-tion display switch a few times, the infor-mation display switches to the outsidetemperature display.Refer to “Information display” on page5-62.

2. Each time you press the multi-informationdisplay switch for 5 seconds or more onoutside temperature display, you canswitch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unitof outside temperature display.

Fuel consumption Distance(driving range)

km/L kmL/100 km km

mpg mile (s)

Changing the temperature unit (if so equipped)

NOTE The temperature value on air conditioning

panel is switched in conjunction with outsidetemperature display unit of the multi-infor-mation display.However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-perature display of an air conditioning.


Indicator and warning light package


5

N00519801905

Indicator and warning light package

1- High beam indicator P.5-712- Electric power steering system warning

light P.5-493- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-

ing light (if so equipped) P.5-574- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning

lights P.5-715- Front fog light indicator (if so

equipped) P.5-716- Door-ajar warning light P.5-737- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

warning light P.4-278- High coolant temperature warning light

(red) P.5-73

9- Low coolant temperature indicator(green) P.5-71

10- Oil pressure warning light P.5-7311- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-

VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Checkengine light”) P.5-72

12- Charging system warning lightP.5-73

13- Brake warning light P.5-7114- Anti-lock braking system warning light

P.5-4815- Multi-information display P.5-6116- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning

light P.4-11

17- Cruise control indicator (if soequipped) P.5-53

18- Active stability control (ASC) indica-tor/warning light P.5-51, 5-51

19- Washer fluid level warning light (if soequipped) P.5-74

20- Active stability control (ASC) OFFindicator/warning light P.5-51, 5-51

21- Position indicator (if so equipped)P.5-71

22- ECO indicator P.5-7123- For details, refer to “Warning activa-

tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)


Indicators


5

N00519900127

N00520001242

The arrows will flash in time with the corre-sponding exterior turn signals when the turnsignal lever is used.

Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-ing flasher switch is pressed.

N00520100086

A blue light comes on when the headlightsare on high beam.

N00520200175

This indicator comes on while the front foglights are on.

N00551301049

This indicator light illuminates while theparking lights are on.

N00575600010

This indicator comes on in green while thecoolant temperature is low.

N00568800036

This indicator comes on while fuel-efficientdriving is achieved.

N00520300147

N00520400526

This light comes on when the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position (engine off) orthe operation mode is put in ON.When the engine is started, the light shouldgo off a few seconds later.The warning light also illuminates after start-ing the engine under the following condi-tions.

When the parking brake is still applied.When the brake fluid level is low.When the brake system circuit is not

working properly.

When the vehicle is moving at more than 5mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied,a buzzer will sound to inform the driver thatthe parking brake is not properly release.

Before driving, be sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warning lightis off.

24- For details, refer to “Warning activa-tion” on page 5-14 (if so equipped)

Indicators

Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning lights

NOTE If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if

the indicator stays on without flashing, checkfor a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb orturn signal connection.

High beam indicator

Front fog light indicator (if so equipped)

Position indicator (if so equipped)

Low coolant temperature indi-cator - green

NOTEWhen the indicator goes out, this should be

used as a rough indication of when the heat-ing starts working.

ECO indicator

Warning lights

Brake warning light and buzzer


Warning lights


5

N00520500804

This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-nostic (OBD) system which monitors theemissions, engine control system or continu-ously variable transmission (CVT) controlsystem. If a problem is detected in one ofthese systems, this indicator illuminates orflashes. When the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position or the operation mode isput in ON, this indicator normally comes onand goes off after the engine has started.

This indicator will come on if the fuel tankfiller cap is not properly tightened. If thisindicator comes on and stays on after refuel-ing, stop the engine and check that the cap isproperly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwiseuntil you hear clicking sounds.)If this indicator does not go off after severalseconds or lights up while driving, have thesystem checked as soon as possible at anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

CAUTION If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

braking system warning light are illuminatedat the same time, the braking force distribu-tion function will not operate, the vehiclemay be destabilized during sudden brakingunder the following conditions.• When the brake warning light does not go

out even when the parking brake isreleased.

• When the brake warning light stays onwhile driving.

If the above occurs, avoid sudden brakingand high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in asafe place, and contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice as soon as possible.

The vehicle should be brought to a halt in thefollowing manner when brake performanceis deteriorated.• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when

you press down on the brake pedal harderthan usual. In some cases, the brake pedalmay go all the way to the floor.

• Should the brakes fail, use engine brakingto reduce your speed and slowly apply theparking brake.Depress the brake pedal to illuminate thestop lights and to alert the vehicles behindyou.

Engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”)

CAUTIONDriving for a long time with the engine mal-

function indicator on may cause more dam-age to the emission control system. Thiscould also affect fuel economy and drivabil-ity.

If this indicator does not come on when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or the operation mode is put in ON, havethe system checked at an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice.

If the engine malfunction indicator comes onwhile the engine is running, avoid driving athigh speeds.During vehicle operation with the indicatoron, the vehicle may not accelerate when youdepress the accelerator pedal.When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-cator on, you must depress the brake pedalmore firmly than usual since the engineidling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency tocreep forward.


Warning lights


5

N00520600313

This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-tion in the charging system or when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position(engine off) or the operation mode is put inON. When the engine is started, the lightshould go out. Check to make sure that thelight has gone out before driving.

N00520700170

This light comes on when the engine oil pres-sure is below normal. If the light stays onwhile driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-sible. Do not run the engine until the cause ofthe low oil pressure is corrected.

N00575700011

This light comes on in red if the coolant tem-perature becomes excessively high.

N00520900329

This light comes on when any door or the lift-gate is open or not completely closed.When the vehicle is moving at more than 5mph (8 km/h) and any door or the liftgate isopen or ajar, a tone will sound 4 times toinform the driver that any door or the liftgateis not properly shut.

NOTEDo not disconnect the battery cable when the

engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICEENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) ison.The engine electronic control module storescritical OBD information (especially exhaustemission data), which may be lost if the bat-tery cable is disconnected while the enginemalfunction indicator is on. This will make itdifficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-lems.

Charging system warning light

CAUTION If the warning light stays on while the engine

is running, park your vehicle in a safe placeas soon as possible and contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice to have the system checked.

Oil pressure warning light

CAUTION If this light comes on when the engine oil

level is not low, have your vehicle checked atan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

This warning light does not show the amountof oil in the crankcase. This can only bedetermined by checking the oil level with thedipstick with the engine turned off.

High coolant temperature warning light - red

CAUTION If the light comes on during vehicle opera-

tion, it indicates that the engine is possiblyoverheating. Continued driving could makethe engine fail. Immediately stop the vehiclein a safe place and take appropriate action.(Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)

NOTE The high coolant temperature warning light

may illuminate when the vehicle has beendriven at high speeds or on hilly roads. Thisilluminating does not necessarily indicate aproblem. It should stop if you keep theengine running for a while or continue driv-ing the vehicle.

Door-ajar warning light and buzzer


Combination headlights and dimmer switch


5

N00590300021

This light comes on when the washer fluid isrunning low.If the light comes on, replenish the containerwith washer fluid. Refer to “Washer fluid” onpage 9-9.

N00522501889

Rotate the switch to operate the lights.

The combinations of switch operations andilluminated lights differ in accordance withthe following conditions.

[When the engine is started, and the parkingbrake is released]

The daytime running lights will be illumi-nated:

[When the engine is not running, or when theengine is running but the parking brake is notreleased]

The engine starts when the lights are off.

CAUTIONBefore driving, make sure that the door-ajar

warning light is off.

NOTEWhen the auto cut-out function of the doom

light is been activated, the light goes outautomatically after about 30 minutes.Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-107.

Washer fluid level warning light (if so equipped)


Headlights

Except for vehicles equipped with day-time running lights

OFF All lights offParking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on

Headlights and other lights on

Vehicles equipped with daytime runninglights

OFF The daytime running lights illumi-natedThe daytime running lights illumi-natedParking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on


NOTEOnce the daytime running light come on,

they do not go out until the ignition switch isturned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position orthe operation mode is changed to OFF orACC.

OFF All lights offParking, tail, front and rear side-marker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on





5

N00532600570

If the following operation is performedwith the combination headlights and dim-mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,the lights automatically turn off.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”or “ACC” position or the key is removedfrom the ignition switch and the driver’sdoor is opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

The operation mode is changed to OFF orACC and the driver’s door is opened.

If the following operation is performedwith the combination headlights and dim-mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,the lights automatically turn off afterabout 3 minutes.

[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key]The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”or “ACC” position or the key is removedfrom the ignition switch and the driver’sdoor is not opened.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]The operation mode is changed to OFF orACC and the driver’s door is not opened.

If the combination headlights and dimmerswitch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-tion again after the engine is turned off, theabout 3-minute auto-cutout functiondescribed above will not work. The lights (theparking lights, tail lights and license platelights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-matically.

N00549800226

[When using a key to start the engine]If the driver’s door is opened with the key inthe “OFF” or “ACC” position or removedfrom the ignition switch while the lights areon, the tone will sound to remind you to turnoff the lights.

[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start theengine]If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if theoperation mode is changed to OFF while thelights are on, the tone will sound to remindyou to turn off the lights.

In either case, the lights will turn off automat-ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn

NOTEDo not leave the headlights and other lights

on for a long period of time when the engineis not running. The battery will run down.

When it rains, or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimesbecomes foggy. This is the same as whenwindow glass mists up on a humid day, anddoes not indicate a problem. When the lightis switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.However, if water collects inside the light,have it checked by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice.

Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other lights)

NOTE The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-

vated.See your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer for details.

When you want to keep the lights on:

Headlight reminder buzzer


Turn signal lever


5

the light switch to the “OFF” position to stopthe tone.

N00549900142

To change the headlights from high beam tolow beam and vice versa, pull the turn signallever to (1). Switch the headlights to lowbeam as a courtesy whenever there areoncoming vehicles, or when there is trafficmoving ahead of you. An illuminated bluelight in the instrument cluster indicates whenthe headlights are on high beam.

N00550000185

You can flash the high beams by pulling thelever gently toward you (2). The lights will

go back to normal when you let go. While thehigh beam is on, you will see a blue light onthe instrument panel.

N00522601587

When changing lanes, or to making a gradualturn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-tion (1). It will return to the neutral positionwhen you let go. Use the full position (2)when making a normal turn. The lever willreturn to the neutral position when the turn iscomplete. There may be times when the leverdoes not return to the neutral position. Thisusually happens when the steering wheel isturned only slightly. You can easily return thelever by hand.Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightlythen release it, the turn signal lights and theindicator light in the instrument cluster willflash three times.

Dimmer (high/low beam change)

Headlight flasher

NOTEYou can flash the high beams by pulling the

lever toward you, even if the light switch isoff.

If you turn the lights off with the head lightsset to high-beam illumination, the headlightsare automatically returned to their low-beamsetting when the light switch is next turnedto the “ ” position.

Turn signal lever

NOTEA light in the instrument panel flashes to

show when the turn signal lights are workingproperly.If this light flashes faster than usual, checkfor a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-functioning connection in the signal.If the panel light does not come on when thelever is moved, check for a blown fuse or aburned out bulb in the panel.Have the system inspected by your autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice.

It is possible to modify functions as follows:• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash

function for lane changes.• Adjust the time required to operate the

lever for the 3-flash function.• Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer

as the turn signal lights flash.


Hazard warning flasher switch


5

See your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer for details.

N00522700318

If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-nals will flash intermittently, and so will thehazard warning lights. This is an emergencywarning system and should not be used whenthe vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-cies.If you need to leave your vehicle, the flasherswill keep working after the ignition switch isremoved or the operation mode is put in OFF.

N00522800393

The front fog lights illuminate only when theheadlights are on low beam.Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”position turns on the front fog lights as wellas the indicator in the instrument cluster. Toturn them off, turn the knob in the direction ofthe “OFF” position.The knob will return to the neutral positionwhen it is released.

N00523000666

The windshield wiper and washer can beoperated with the ignition switch or the oper-ation mode is in ON or ACC.If the blades are frozen to the windshield, donot operate the wipers until the ice has melted

Hazard warning flasher switch

NOTE If the flashers are used for several hours, the

battery will run down. This could make itdifficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

Front fog light switch (if so equipped)

NOTE If the headlights are switched to high beam,

the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-minate again when the headlights areswitched back to low beam.

If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or“ ” position while the front fog lights areilluminated, they will automatically turn off.They can be turned back on again by rotatingthe combination headlights and dimmerswitch back to “ ” position, and turningthe knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-tion.

Do not use fog lights except in conditions offog, otherwise excessive light glare maytemporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

Wiper and washer switch

CAUTION If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glass mayfreeze, which may hinder visibility. Warmthe glass with the defroster before using thewasher.

Windshield wipers

NOTE




5

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wipermotor may be damaged.

With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitiveintermittent operation) position, the intermit-tent intervals can be adjusted by turning theknob (A).

The misting function can be used when theignition switch or the operation mode is inON or ACC.The wipers will operate once if the wiperlever is raised to the “MIST” position andreleased. This operation is useful when it isdrizzling, etc. The wipers will continue tooperate while the lever is held in the “MIST”position.

N00504600298

To turn on the windshield washer, pull thelever toward you with the ignition switch orthe operation mode is in ON or ACC.The wipers will wipe automatically severaltimes when the washer fluid is sprayed.To turn off the spray, release the lever.

MIST- Misting functionThe wipers will operate once.

OFF- OffINT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)LO- SlowHI- Fast

To adjust intermittent intervals

1- Fast2- Slow

NOTE The speed-sensitive-operation function of

the windshield wipers can be deactivated.For further information, please contact yourauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

Misting function

Windshield washer




5

N00523200408

The rear window wiper and washer can beoperated when the ignition switch or theoperation mode is in ON or ACC.

Turn the knob to operate the rear windowwiper.

N00523501336

Rear window wiper and washer

OFF- OffINT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-mittently at intervals of about 8 sec-onds.

- Washer fluid will be sprayed ontothe rear window glass while theknob is turned fully in either direc-tion.When the washer fluid is sprayed,the wiper will automatically operate2 or 3 times.

NOTEOn vehicles with CVT, to ensure a clear rear-

ward view, the wiper perform several contin-uous operations when the reverse gear isengaged and the switch is in the “INT” posi-tion.Following this continuous operation, thewiper will automatically switch to intermit-tent operation.

It is possible to modify functions as follows:• Adjustment of the interval for intermittent

operation.• Changing intermittent wiper operation to

continuous wiper operation.See your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer for details.

The washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment.Check the fluid level regularly and refill ifnecessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page9-9.)

Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers

CAUTION If the washer is used in cold weather, washer

fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze,blocking your view. Heat the glass with thedefroster before using the washer.

NOTEDo not use the wipers when the windshield is

dry. This could scratch the glass and wear thewiper blades prematurely.

Before using the wipers in cold weather,check to be sure that the wiper blades are notfrozen to the windshield or rear window.Using the wipers while the blades are frozencould cause the wiper motor to burn out.

If the moving wipers become blocked part-way through a sweep by ice or other depositson the glass, the wipers may temporarily stopoperating to prevent the motor from over-heating. In this case, park the vehicle in asafe place, turn the ignition switch to the“OFF” position or put the operation mode inOFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-its.Because the wipers will start operating againafter the wiper motor cools down, check thatthe wipers operate before using them.

Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-onds at a time. Do not operate the washerwhen the washer fluid reservoir is empty orthe pump may fail.

During cold weather, add a recommendedwasher solution that will not freeze in thewasher fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washermay not work or may be damaged.

Replace the wiper blades when they areworn. Use the proper size replacementblades. For further information, please con-tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer.


Electric rear window defogger switch


5

N00523701484

The rear window defogger can be used whenthe engine is running.The indicator light (A) will come on whenyou press the electric rear window defoggerswitch. Electric current will flow through theheating wires on the rear window to helpclear away moisture or frost.

After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-tem will shut off automatically.To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-utes have passed, press the switch again. Theindicator light will go out and the defoggerwill turn off.If you need the defogger for more than 20minutes, press the switch again. This will add20 more minutes.

N00523800185

To honk the horn, press around the “ ” markon the steering wheel.

Electric rear window defog-ger switch

Type 1

CAUTION The rear window defogger is not designed to

melt snow. Remove any snow manuallybefore using the rear window defogger.

Use the rear window defogger only after theengine has started and is running. Be sure toturn the defogger switch off immediatelyafter the window is clear to save on batterypower.

Type 2Do not place stickers, tape, or other items

that are attached with adhesive over the gridwires on the rear window.

When cleaning the inside rear window, use asoft cloth and wipe lightly over the gridwires.

NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-

rors, mist can also be removed from the out-side rearview mirrors when the rear windowdefogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Doormirror heater” on page 5-34.)

Horn switch

CAUTION


Link System (if so equipped)


5

N00563701167

The Link System takes control of the devicesconnected via the USB input terminal or theBluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the con-nected devices to be operated by using theswitches in the vehicle or voice commands.See the following section for details on howto operate.

Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” on page5-81.Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 5-102.Refer to “To play tracks from USB device”on page 7-29.Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-tion” on page 7-31.Refer to “To play tracks from a Bluetooth®

device” on page 7-37.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

N00563801083

You have acquired a device that includes soft-ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-tion from Visteon Corporation, and theirsubsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a com-

plete list of these 3rd party products and theirend user license agreements, please go to thefollowing website.http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldis-closure.pdf

N00563901316

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for mak-ing/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicleusing a cellular phone compatible with awireless communication technology com-monly known as Bluetooth®. It also allowsthe user to play music, saved in a Bluetooth®

music player, through the vehicle’s speakers.The system is equipped with a voice recogni-tion function, which allows you to makehands-free calls by simple switch and voicecommand operations using a defined voicetree.

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be usedwhen the ignition switch or the operationmode is in ON or ACC.

Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face, you must pair the Bluetooth® deviceand Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to “Con-

necting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface andBluetooth® device” on page 5-87.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBLUETOOTH SIG, INC.

Link System (if so equipped)

Link System End User License Agreement

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)

WARNINGAlthough the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface

allows you to make hands-free calls, if youchoose to use the cellular phone whiledriving, you must not allow yourself to bedistracted from the safe operation of yourvehicle. Anything, including cellularphone usage, that distracts you from thesafe operation of your vehicle increasesyour risk of an accident.

Refer to and comply with all state andlocal laws in your area regarding cellularphone usage while driving.

NOTE For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,

if the operation mode is left in ACC, theaccessory power will automatically turn offafter a certain period of time and you will nolonger be able to use the Bluetooth® 2.0interface. The accessory power comes onagain if the engine switch is operated.Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function”on page 5-14.




5

Steering control switch and microphone P.5-82Voice recognition function P.5-83Useful voice commands P.5-84Speaker enrollment function P.5-86Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface andthe Bluetooth® device P.5-87Operating a music player connected via Blue-tooth® P.5-93How to make or receive hands-free calls P.5-93Phonebook function P.5-95

N00564000072

Press this button to increase the volume.

Press this button to decrease the volume.

Press this button to change to voice recog-nition mode.While the system is in voice recognitionmode, “Listening” will appear on theaudio display.

If you press the button briefly while invoice recognition mode, it will interruptprompting and allow voice commandinput.Pressing the button longer will deactivatethe voice recognition mode.

Pressing this button briefly during a callwill enable voice recognition and allowvoice command input.

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be usedif the Bluetooth® device has a dead batteryor the device power is turned off.

Hands-free calls will not be possible if yourphone does not have service available.

If you place the Bluetooth® device in thecargo area, you may not be able to use theBluetooth® 2.0 interface.

Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatiblewith the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

You can confirm the Link System softwareversion by pressing the HANG-UP button 3times (press and hold 2 times and then pressbriefly) within 10 seconds.

For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,refer to the following website:[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]You can access the Mitsubishi Motors NorthAmerica website.[For vehicles sold in Canada]You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-site.Please read and agree to the “Warning aboutLinks to the Web Sites of Other Companies”,the websites mentioned above may connectyou to websites other than the MitsubishiMotors website.http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-ucts/index.html

Software updates by cellular phone/digitalaudio device manufacturers maychange/alter device connectivity.

NOTE

Steering control switch and microphone

1- Volume up button

2- Volume down button3- SPEECH button4- PICK-UP button5- HANG-UP button6- Microphone

Volume up button

Volume down button

SPEECH button




5

Press this button when an incoming call isreceived to answer the telephone.

When another call is received during acall, press this button to put the first calleron hold and talk to the new caller. • In such circumstances, you can press the

button briefly to switch between callers.You will switch to the first caller and theother caller will be put on hold.

• To establish a three-way call in such situ-ations, press the SPEECH button to entervoice recognition mode and then say“Join calls.”

Press this button when an incoming call isreceived to refuse the call.

Press this button during a call to end thecurrent call.When another call is on hold, you willswitch to that call.

If this button is pressed in the voice recog-nition mode, the voice recognition modewill be deactivated.

Your voice will be recognized by a micro-phone in the overhead console, allowing youto make hands-free calls with voice com-mands.

N00564100086

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equippedwith a voice recognition function.Simply say voice commands and you can per-form various operations and make or receivehands-free calls.

With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice rec-ognition is possible for US English, NorthAmerican Spanish, Canadian French and Jap-anese. The factory setting is “English.”

PICK-UP button

HANG-UP button

NOTEWhen you press the SPEECH button to enter

voice recognition mode with a cellular phonepaired to the system, current information onthe cellular phone, such as “remaining bat-tery life,” “signal strength” or “roaming,”will be displayed on the audio display.**: Some cellular phones will not send thisinformation to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

Call waiting and three-way calls can be usedby the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it ispossible to use those services with your cel-lular phone.

Microphone

NOTE If a cellular phone is within close proximity

of the microphone, it may distort the soundquality. In this case, place the cellular phoneas far as possible from the microphone.

Voice recognition function

NOTE If the voice command that you say differs

from the predefined command or cannot berecognised due to ambient noise or someother reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interfacewill ask you for the voice command again upto 3 times.

For best performance and further reductionof ambient noise, the vehicle windowsshould be closed, lower the blower speed andrefrain from conversation with your passen-gers while engaging the voice recognitionfunction.

Some voice commands have alternativecommands.

Depending on the selected language, somefunctions may not be available.




5

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Language.”4. The voice guide will say “Select a lan-

guage: English, Spanish, French or Japa-nese.” Say the desired language.(Example: “English”)

5. The voice guide will say “English (Span-ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is thiscorrect?” Say “Yes.”If you say “No,” the system will return toStep 4.

6. When the voice guide says “English(Spanish, French or Japanese) selected,”the language change process will be com-pleted and the system will return to themain menu.

N00564200016

N00564300017

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equippedwith a help function. If you say “Help” when the system is waitingfor a voice command input, the system willtell you a list of the commands that can beused under the circumstances.

N00564401028

There are 2 cancel functions.If you are at the main menu, say “Cancel” toexit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

If you are anywhere else within the system,say “Cancel” to return to the main menu.

N00564500019

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equippedwith a confirmation function.With the confirmation function activated, youare given more opportunities than normal toconfirm a command when making varioussettings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Thisallows you to decrease the possibility that asetting is accidentally changed. The confirmation function can be turned onor off by following the steps below.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Confirmation prompts.”4. The voice guide will say “Confirmation

prompts are <on/off>. Would you like toturn confirmation prompts <off/on>.”Answer “Yes” to change the setting oranswer “No” to keep the current setting.

5. The voice guide will say “Confirmationprompts are <off/on>” and then the sys-tem will return to the main menu.

Language can be changed by using the audiocontrol panel besides the following proce-dure.For details, refer to “To change the language(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)” onpage 7-27.

Selecting the language

NOTE The voice guide will repeat the same mes-

sage twice. The first message is in the cur-rent language, and the second message is inthe selected language.

If many entries are registered in the vehiclephonebook, changing the language will takea longer time.

NOTEChanging the language deletes the mobile

phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0interface. If you wish to use it, you will haveto import it again.

Useful voice commands

Help function

Canceling

NOTE

NOTEYou can return to the previous menu by say-

ing “Go Back.” (if so equipped)

Confirmation function setting




5

N00564600023

It is possible to use a passcode as a securityfunction by setting a passcode of your choicefor the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.When the security function is turned on, it isnecessary to make a voice input of a 4-digitpasscode in order to use all functions of theBluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for recep-tion.

Use the following procedure to turn on thesecurity function by setting a passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Passcode.”4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is dis-

abled. Would you like to enable it?”Answer “Yes.”Answer “No” to cancel the setting of thepasscode and return to the main menu.

5. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-digit passcode. Remember this passcode.It will be required to use this system.” Say a 4-digit number which you want toset as a passcode.

6. For confirmation purposes, the voiceguide will say “Passcode <4-digit pass-code>. Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”

Answer “No” to return to the passcodeinput in Step 5.

7. When the registration of the passcode iscompleted, the voice guide will say “Pass-code is enabled” and the system willreturn to the main menu.

If a passcode has been set and the securityfunction is enabled, the voice guide will say“Hands-free system is locked. State the pass-code to continue” when the SPEECH buttonis pressed to enter voice recognition mode.Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter thepasscode. If the entered passcode is wrong, the voiceguide will say “<4-digit passcode>, Incorrectpasscode. Please try again.” Enter the correctpasscode.

Use the following procedure to turn off thesecurity function by disabling the passcode.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Passcode.”4. The voice guide will say “Passcode is

enabled. Would you like to disable it?”Answer “Yes.”Answer “No” to cancel the disabling ofthe passcode and return to the main menu.

5. When the disabling of the passcode iscompleted, the voice guide will say “Pass-code is disabled” and the system willreturn to the main menu.

Security function

Setting the passcode

NOTE Passcode will be required to access the sys-

tem after the next ignition cycle. It is required for a little time after engine

stop that the entered passcode is actuallyrecorded in the system.If the ignition switch or the operation modeis made to ACC or ON or the engine isstarted immediately after engine stop, thereis a case when the entered passcode is notrecorded in the system. At this time, pleasetry to enter the passcode again.

Entering the passcode

NOTEYou can reenter the passcode as many times

as you want. If you have forgotten your passcode, say

“Cancel” to quit the voice input mode andthen check with an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer.

Disabling the passcode

NOTE System must be unlocked to disable the pass-

code.




5

N00564700011

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use thespeaker enrollment function to create a voicemodel for one person per language. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0interface to recognise voice commands saidby you. You can turn a voice model registered withthe speaker enrollment function on and offwhenever you want.

N00564800038

It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete thespeaker enrollment process.To ensure the best results, run through theprocess while in the driver’s seat, in an envi-ronment that is as quiet as possible (whenthere is no rain or strong winds and the vehi-cle windows are closed). Please turn off yourphone while in speaker enrollment to preventinterruption of the process.Use the following procedure for speakerenrollment.

1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put thegearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-tion (manual transaxle), or the selectorlever in the “P” (PARK) position (contin-uously variable transmission (CVT)), andpull the parking brake lever.

2. Press the SPEECH button.3. Say “Voice training.”4. The voice guide will say “This operation

must be performed in a quiet environmentwhile the vehicle is stopped. See theowner’s manual for the list of requiredtraining phrases. Press and release theSPEECH button when you are ready tobegin. Press the HANG-UP button to can-cel at any time.”Press the SPEECH button to start thespeaker enrollment process.

5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1.Repeat the corresponding phrase listed intable “Enrollment commands” on page5-102.The system will register your voice andthen move on to the registration of thenext command. Continue the process untilall phrases have been registered.

6. When all enrollment commands havebeen read out, the voice guide will say“Speaker enrollment is complete.” Thesystem will then end the speaker enroll-ment process and return to the mainmenu.

Speaker enrollment function

Speaker enrollment

NOTE Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the

vehicle is parked. Make sure you park thevehicle in a safe area before attemptingspeaker enrollment.

NOTE If you do not start the speaker enrollment

process within 3 minutes after pressing theSPEECH button, the speaker enrollmentfunction will time out. The voice guide will say “Speaker enroll-ment has timed out.” The system will thenbeep and the voice recognition mode will bedeactivated.

NOTE To repeat the most recent voice training com-

mand, press and release the SPEECH button. If you press the HANG-UP button anytime

during the process, the system will beep andstop the speaker enrollment process.




5N00564900055

You can turn a voice model registered withthe speaker enrollment function on and offwhenever you want.You can also retrain the system.Use the following procedure to perform theseactions.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Voice training.”3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-

ment process once already, the voiceguide will say either “Enrollment isenabled. Would you like to disable orretrain?” or “Enrollment is disabled.Would you like to enable or retrain?”

4. When enrollment is “enabled,” the voicemodel is on; when enrollment is “dis-abled,” the voice model is off. Say thecommand that fits your needs.

Say “Retrain” to start the speaker enroll-ment process and recreate a new voicemodel. (Refer to “Speaker enrollment” onpage 5-86.)

N00565001353

Before you can make or receive hands-freecalls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0interface function, you must pair the Blue-tooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be pairedwith the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices areavailable in the vehicle, the cellular phone ormusic player most recently connected is auto-

matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0interface.

You can also change a Bluetooth® device tobe connected.

To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface, use either one of the fol-lowing 2 methods (Type 1 or Type 2).


NOTECompleting the speaker enrollment process

will turn on the voice model automatically. The commands “Help” and “Cancel” will not

work in this mode.

Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining

Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and Bluetooth® device

NOTE Pairing is required only when the device is

used for the first time. Once the device hasbeen paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face, all you need is to bring the device intothe vehicle next time and the device willconnect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface auto-matically (if supported by the device). Thedevice must have Bluetooth® turned ON toconnect.

To pair

Pairing procedure - Type 1 (if so

equipped)

NOTEYou cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with

the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®

device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safelocation.




5

2. Press the SPEECH button.3. Say “Setup.”4. Say “Pairing Options.”5. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”Say “Pair.”

6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will confirm whether the numbersaid is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”Answer “No” to return to pairing codeselection.

7. The voice guide will say “Start pairingprocedure on the device. See the devicemanual for instructions.” Enter in theBluetooth® device the 4-digit number youhave registered in Step 6.

8. The voice guide will say “Please say thename of the device after the beep.” Youcan assign a desired name for the Blue-tooth® device and register it as a devicetag. Say the name you want to registerafter the beep.

9. The voice guide will say “Pairing com-plete,” and the pairing process will end.

NOTE If 7 devices have already been paired, the

voice guide will say “Maximum devicespaired” and then the system will end thepairing process. To register a new device,delete one device and then repeat the pairingprocess.(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting adevice” on page 5-90.)

NOTE Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific

pairing code. Please refer to the device man-ual for pairing code requirements.

The pairing code entered here is only usedfor the Bluetooth® connection certification.It is any 4-digit number the user would liketo select.Remember the pairing code as it needs to bekeyed into the Bluetooth® device later in thepairing process. Depending on the connection settings of theBluetooth® device, this code may have to beentered each time you connect the Blue-tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face. For the default connection settings,refer to the instructions for the device.

NOTEDepending on the Bluetooth® device, it may

take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface.

If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guidewill say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-ing process will be cancelled.Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.

NOTE If you enter the wrong number, the voice

guide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-ing process will be cancelled.Confirm the number is right, and try pairingit again.

NOTEWhen the confirmation function is on, after

repeating the device tag you have said, thevoice guide will ask “Is this correct?”Answer “Yes.”To change the device tag, answer “No” andthen say the device tag again.

NOTE




5


2. Press the SPEECH button.3. Say “Pair Device.”

4. The voice guide will say “Start pairingprocedure on the device. See the devicemanual for instructions.” and then willsay “The pairing code is <pairing code>.”

5. Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digitnumber that has been read out in Step 4.

Pairing procedure - Type 2 (if so

equipped)

NOTEYou cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with

the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehi-cle is parked. Before pairing a Bluetooth®

device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface,confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safelocation.

NOTE The following procedure ( to ) can also

be used instead of saying “Pair Device.”Replace this step 3 with the following proce-dure if you prefer.

Say “Setup.” Say “Pairing Options.” The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: pair, edit, delete, list or setcode.”Say “Pair.”

If 7 devices have already been paired, thevoice guide will say “Maximum devicespaired” and then the system will end thepairing process. To register a new device,delete one device and then repeat the pairingprocess.(Refer to “Selecting a device: Deleting adevice” on page 5-90.)

NOTE Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific

pairing code. Please refer to the device man-ual for pairing code requirements and readthe next section “If your device requires aspecific pairing code” on page 5-90 to set thepairing code.

The pairing code entered here is only usedfor the Bluetooth® connection certification.Depending on the connection settings of theBluetooth® device, this code may have to beentered each time you connect the Blue-tooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face. For the default connection settings,refer to the instructions for the device.

NOTEDepending on the Bluetooth® device, it may

take a few minutes to pair it with the Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface.

If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-nize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guidewill say “Pairing has timed out” and the pair-ing process will be cancelled.Confirm that the device you are pairing sup-ports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.

NOTE




5

6. The voice guide will say “Please say thename of the device after the beep.” Youcan assign a desired name for the Blue-tooth® device and register it as a devicetag. Say the name you want to registerafter the beep.

7. The voice guide will say “Pairing Com-plete. Would you like to import the con-tacts from your mobile device now?”Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide willsay “Please wait while the contacts areimported. This may take several minutes.”Answer “No” to end the pairing process.

If your device requires a specific pairingcode, you need to set the pairing code. Followthe procedures below.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Pairing Options.”4. Say “Set Code.”5. The voice guide will say “Do you want

the pairing code to be random or fixed?”Say “Fixed.”

6. The voice guide will say “Please say a 4-digit pairing code.” Say a 4-digit number.

7. The voice guide will say “Pairing code setto <pairing code>.”When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will confirm whether the numbersaid is acceptable. Answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” the system will return toStep 6.

8. The voice guide will say “Do you want topair a device now?” Answer “Yes,” thesystem will proceed to Step 3 in the pair-ing process. Refer to the “Pairing proce-dure- Type 2.”

N00565100025

If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices areavailable in the vehicle, the cellular phone ormusic player most recently connected is auto-matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0interface.You can connect to the other paired cellularphone or music player by following settingchange procedures.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Select phone.”4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”

the numbers of the cellular phones anddevice tags of corresponding cellularphones will be read out in order, startingwith the cellular phone that has been mostrecently connected.Say the number of the cellular phone thatyou want to connect to.

If you enter the wrong number, the voiceguide will say “Pairing failed” and the pair-ing process will be cancelled.Confirm the number is right, and try pairingit again.If your device requires a specific pairingcode, you need to set the pairing code. Referto the device manual for pairing coderequirements and read the next section “Ifyour device requires a specific pairing code”on page 5-90.


repeating the device tag you have said, thevoice guide will ask “Is this correct?”Answer “Yes.”To change the device tag, answer “No” andthen say the device tag again.

NOTE

If your device requires a specific pairingcode

Selecting a device

To select a cellular phone




5

When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will ask you again whether thephone that you want to connect to is cor-rect. Answer “Yes” to continue and con-nect to the cellular phone.Answer “No,” and the voice guide willsay “Please say.” Say the number of thephone that you want to connect to.

5. The selected phone will be connected tothe Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voiceguide will say “<device tag> selected”and then the system will return to themain menu.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Setup.”3. Say “Select music player.”

4. After the voice guide says “Please say,”the numbers of the music players anddevice tags of corresponding music play-ers will be read out in order, starting withthe music player that has been mostrecently connected.Say the number of the music player thatyou want to connect to.When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will ask you again whether themusic player that you want to connect tois correct. Answer “Yes” to continue andconnect to the music player.Answer “No,” and the voice guide willsay “Please say.” Say the number of themusic player that you want to connect to.

5. The selected music player will be con-nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.The voice guide will say “<device tag>selected” and then the system will returnto the main menu.

Use the following procedure to delete apaired Bluetooth® device from the Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface.


the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”Say “Delete.”

5. After the voice guide says “Please say,”the numbers of the devices and devicetags of corresponding devices will be readout in order, starting with the device thathas been most recently connected. After itcompletes reading all pairs, the voiceguide will say “or all.”Say the number of the device that youwant to delete from the system.If you want to delete all paired phonesfrom the system, say “All.”

6. For confirmation purposes, the voiceguide will say “Deleting <device tag><number>. Is this correct?” or “Deletingall devices. Is this correct?”Answer “Yes” to delete the phone(s).Answer “No,” the system will return toStep 4.

NOTEYou can connect to a phone at any time by

pressing the SPEECH button and saying thenumber, even before all of the paired num-bers and device tags of corresponding cellu-lar phones are read out by the system.

To select a music player

NOTEYou can connect to a music player at any

time by pressing the SPEECH button andsaying the number, even before all of thepaired numbers and device tags of corre-sponding music players are read out by thesystem.

Deleting a device




5

7. The voice guide will say “Deleted,” andthen the system will end the device dele-tion process.

N00565200013

You can check a paired Bluetooth® device byfollowing the steps below.


the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”Say “List.”

5. The voice guide will read out device tagsof corresponding devices in order, startingwith the Bluetooth® device that has beenmost recently connected.

6. After the device tags of all paired Blue-tooth® devices have been read, the systemwill say “End of list, would you like tostart from the beginning?”

To hear the list again from the beginning,answer “Yes.” When you are done, answer “No” toreturn to the main menu.

N00565300014

You can change the device tag of a paired cel-lular phone or music player.Follow the steps below to change a devicetag.


the following: pair, edit, delete, or list.”Say “Edit.”

5. The voice guide will say “Please say,” andread out the numbers of the Bluetooth®

devices and device tags of correspondingdevices in order, starting with the Blue-tooth® that has been most recently con-nected.After all paired device tags have beenread, the voice guide will say “Whichdevice, please?” Say the number of thedevice tag you want to change.

6. The voice guide will say “New name,please.” Say the name you want to regis-ter as a new device tag.When the confirmation function is on, thevoice guide will say “<New device tag>.Is this correct?” Answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” you can say the new devicetag you want to register again.

7. The device tag is changed.

NOTE If the device deletion process fails for some

reason, the voice guide will say “Deletefailed” and then the system will cancel delet-ing the device.

To check a paired Bluetooth® device

NOTE If you press and release the SPEECH button

and say “Continue” or “Previous” while thelist is being read, the system will advance orrewind the list.Say “Continue” to proceed to the device withthe next highest number or “Previous” toreturn to the phone with the previous num-ber.

You can change the device tag by pressingand releasing the SPEECH button and thensaying “Edit” while the list is being read.

You can change the phone to be connectedby pressing and releasing the SPEECH but-ton and then saying “Select phone” while thelist is being read.

You can change the music player to be con-nected by pressing and releasing theSPEECH button and then saying “Selectmusic player” while the list is being read.

Changing a device tag

NOTEYou can press and release the SPEECH but-

ton while the list is being read, and immedi-ately say the number of the device tag youwant to change.




5

When the change is complete, the voiceguide will say “New name saved” andthen the system will return to the mainmenu.

N00565400015

For the operation of a music player connectedvia Bluetooth®, refer to “To play tracks froma Bluetooth® device” on page 7-37.

N00565500087

You can make or receive hands-free callsusing a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phoneconnected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.You can also use the phonebooks in the Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface to make calls withoutdialing telephone numbers.

To make a call P.5-93Send function P.5-94Receiving calls P.5-95Mute function P.5-95Switching between hands-free mode and pri-vate mode P.5-95

N00565600020

You can make a call in the following 3 waysusing the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface:- By saying a telephone number- By using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface’sphonebook- By redialing a telephone number

You can make a call by saying the telephonenumber.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Dial.”3. After the voice guide says “Number

please,” say the telephone number.4. The voice guide will say “Dialing <num-

ber recognized>.”The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will thenmake the call.

When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will confirm the telephone numberagain. To continue with that number,answer “Yes.” To change the telephone number, answer“No.” The system will say “Numberplease” then say the telephone numberagain.

You can make calls using the vehicle phone-book or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth®

2.0 interface.For details on the phonebooks, refer to“Phonebook function” on page 5-95.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Call.”

Operating a music player con-nected via Bluetooth®

How to make or receive hands-free calls

NOTEHands-free calls may not operate correctly

when you place or receive the call directlyfrom your cellular phone, instead of usingthe Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

To make a call

Making a call by using the telephonenumber

NOTE In the case of English, the system will recog-

nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for thenumber “0.”

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports num-bers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).

The maximum supported telephone numberlength is as follows:• International telephone number: + and tele-

phone numbers (to 18 digits).• Except for international telephone number:

telephone numbers (to 19 digits).

Making a call using a phonebook




5

3. After the voice guide says “Name please,”say the name you want to call, from thoseregistered in the phonebook.

4. If there is only 1 match, the system willproceed to Step 5.If there are 2 or more matches, the voiceguide will say “More than one match wasfound, would you like to call <returnedname>.” If that person is the one you wantto call, answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” the name of the nextmatching person will be uttered by thevoice guide.

5. If only 1 telephone number is registeredunder the name you just said, the voiceguide will proceed to Step 6.If 2 or more telephone numbers are regis-tered that match the name you just said,the voice guide will say “Would you liketo call <name> at [home], [work],[mobile], or [other]?” Select the locationto call.

6. The voice guide will say “Calling <name><location>” and then the system will dialthe telephone number.

You can redial the last number called, basedon the history of dialed calls in the paired cel-lular phone.Use the following procedure to redial.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Redial.”

N00565700018

During a call, press the SPEECH button toenter voice recognition mode, then say“<numbers> SEND” to generate DTMFtones.For example, if during a call you need to sim-ulate the pressing of a phone button as aresponse to an automated system, press the

NOTE If you say “Call” when the vehicle phone-

book and the mobile phonebook are empty,the voice guide will say “The vehicle phone-book is empty. Would you like to add a newentry now?”Answer “Yes,” and the voice guide will say“Entering the phonebook - new entry menu.”You can now create data in the vehiclephonebook.Answer “No,” the system will return to themain menu.

NOTE If you say “No” to all names read by the sys-

tem, the voice guide will say “Name notfound, returning to main menu” and the sys-tem will return to the main menu.

NOTE If the name you selected has matching data

in the vehicle phonebook but no telephonenumber is registered under the selected loca-tion, the voice guide will say“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for<name>. Would you like to add location ortry again?”Say “Try again,” and the system will returnto Step 3.Say “Add location” and you can register anadditional telephone number under theselected location.

If the name you selected has matching datain the mobile phonebook but no telephonenumber is registered under the selected loca-tion, the voice guide will say“{home/work/mobile/other} not found for<name>. Would you like to try again?” Answer “Yes,” and the system will return toStep 3.Answer “No,” and the call will be cancelled.Start over again from Step 1.

NOTEWhen the confirmation function is on, the

system will check if the name and location ofthe receiver are correct. If the name is cor-rect, answer “Yes.”To change the name or location to call,answer “No.” The system will return to Step3.

Redialing

Send function




5

SPEECH button and speak “1 2 3 4 poundsend” and the 1234# will be sent via your cel-lular phone.

N00565800035

If an incoming phone call is received whilethe ignition switch or the operation mode is inON or ACC, the audio system will be auto-matically turned on and switched to theincoming call, even when the audio systemwas originally off.The voice guide announcement for theincoming call will be output from the frontpassenger’s seat speaker.If the CD player or radio was playing whenthe incoming call was received, the audio sys-tem will mute the sound from the CD playeror radio and output only the incoming call. To receive the call, press the PICK-UP buttonon the steering wheel control switch.When the call is over, the audio system willreturn to its previous state.

N00565900010

At any time during a call, you can mute thevehicle microphone. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying“Mute” during a call will turn ON the mutefunction and mute the microphone.

Saying “Mute off” in the same way will turnoff the mute function and cancel the mute onthe microphone.

N00566600014

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switchbetween hands-free mode (hands-free calls)and private mode (calls using cellular phone). If you press the SPEECH button and say“Transfer call” during a hands-free call, youcan stop the hands-free mode and talk in pri-vate mode. To return to hands-free mode, press theSPEECH button again and say “Transfercall.”

N00566000018

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types ofunique phonebooks that are different from thephonebook stored in the cellular phone. Theyare the vehicle phonebook and the mobilephonebook.These phonebooks are used to register tele-phone numbers and make calls to desirednumbers via voice recognition function.

N00566101162

This phonebook is used when making callswith the voice recognition function.Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehi-cle phonebook per language.Also, each entry has 4 locations associatedwith: home, work, mobile and other. You canregister one telephone number for each loca-tion.

You can register a desired name as a name forany phonebook entry registered in the vehiclephonebook.Names and telephone numbers can bechanged later on.

The vehicle phonebook can be used with allpaired cellular phones.

You can register a telephone number in thevehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways:Reading out a telephone number, and select-

Receiving calls

Mute function

Switching between hands-free mode and private mode

Phonebook function

NOTEDisconnecting the battery cable will not

delete information registered in the phone-book.

Vehicle phonebook

To register a telephone number in thevehicle phonebook




5

ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry fromthe phonebook of the cellular phone.

1. Press the SPEECH button.2. Say “Phonebook.”3. The voice guide will say “Select one of

the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “New entry.”

4. The voice guide will say “Name please.”Say your preferred name to register it.

5. When the name has been registered, thevoice guide will say “home, work,mobile, or other?” Say the location forwhich you want to register a telephonenumber.

6. The voice guide will say “Numberplease.” Say the telephone number to reg-ister it.

7. The voice guide will repeat the telephonenumber you have just read, and then reg-ister the number.When the telephone number has been reg-istered, the voice guide will say “Numbersaved. Would you like to add anothernumber for this entry?”To add another telephone number for anew location for the current entry, answer“Yes.” The system will return to locationselection in Step 5.

Answer “No” to end the registration pro-cess and return to the main menu.

You can select 1 phonebook entry from thephonebook of the cellular phone and registerit in the vehicle phonebook.

To register by reading out a telephonenumber

NOTE If the maximum number of entries are

already registered, the voice guide will say“The phonebook is full. Would you like todelete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want todelete a registered name.If you say “No,” the system will return to themain menu.

NOTEWhen the confirmation function is on, the

voice guide will say “<Location>. Is this cor-rect?” Answer “Yes.”If a telephone number has been registered forthe selected location, the voice guide will say“The current number is <telephone number>,number please.”If you do not want to change the telephonenumber, say “cancel” or the original numberto keep it registered.

NOTE In the case of English, the system will recog-

nise both “zero” and “oh” (Letter “o”) for thenumber “0.”


repeating the telephone number you haveread, the voice guide will ask “Is this cor-rect?” Answer “Yes.”Answer “No” to return to telephone numberregistration in step 6.

To select and transfer one phonebookentry from the phonebook of the cellularphone

NOTE Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is

parked. Before transferring, make sure thatthe vehicle is parked in a safe location.

All or part of data may not be transferred,even when the cellular phone supports Blue-tooth®, depending on the compatibility ofthe device.

The maximum supported telephone numberlength is 19 digits. Any telephone number of20 digits or more will be truncated to the first19 digits.





the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “Import contact.”

4. The voice guide will say “Would you liketo import a single entry or all contacts?”Say “Single entry.”The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will becomeready to receive transferred phonebookdata.

5. After the voice guide says “Ready toreceive a contact from the phone. Only ahome, a work, and a mobile number canbe imported,” the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face will receive the phonebook data fromthe Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.

6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellu-lar phone to set it up so that the phone-book entry you want to register in thevehicle phonebook can be transferred tothe Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.

7. When the reception is complete, the voiceguide will say “<Number of telephonenumbers that had been registered in theimport source> numbers have beenimported. What name would you like touse for these numbers?”

Say the name you want to register for thisphonebook entry.

8. The voice guide will say “Adding<name>.”When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will ask if the name is correct.Answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” the voice guide will say“Name please.” Register a different name.

9. The voice guide will say “Numberssaved.”

10. The voice guide will say “Would you liketo import another contact?”Answer “Yes” if you want to continuewith the registration. You can continue toregister a new phonebook entry from Step5.Answer “No,” the system will return tothe main menu.

You can change or delete a name or telephonenumber registered in the vehicle phonebook.

If telephone numbers contain charactersother than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these charactersare deleted before the transfer.

For the connection settings on the cellularphone side, refer to the instructions for thecellular phone.

NOTE If the maximum number of entries are

already registered, the voice guide will say“The phonebook is full. Would you like todelete a name?” Say “Yes” if you want todelete a registered name.If you say “No,” the system will return to themain menu.

NOTE

NOTE If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recog-

nise the Bluetooth® compatible cellularphone or the connection takes too muchtime, the voice guide will say “Import con-tact has timed out” and then the system willcancel the registration. In such case, startover again from Step 1.

Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressingand holding the SPEECH button will cancelthe registration.

NOTE If the entered name is already used for other

phonebook entry or similar to a name usedfor other phonebook entry, that name cannotbe registered.

To change the content registered in thevehicle phonebook




5

You can also listen to the list of names regis-tered in the vehicle phonebook.

[Editing a telephone number]


the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact”. Say “Edit number.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say thename of the entry you would like to edit,or say list names.” Say the name of thephonebook entry you want to edit.

5. The voice guide will say “Home, work,mobile or other?” Select and say the loca-tion where the telephone number youwant to change or add is registered.

When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will check the target name andlocation again. Answer “Yes” if you wantto continue with the editing.Answer “No,” the system will return toStep 3.

6. The voice guide will say “Number,please.” Say the telephone number youwant to register.

7. The voice guide will repeat the telephonenumber.When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will ask if the number is correct.Answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” the system will return tothe Step 3.

8. Once the telephone number is registered,the voice guide will say “Number saved”and then the system will return to themain menu.

[Editing a name]


the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “Edit name.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say thename of the entry you would like to edit,or say list names.” Say the name you wantto edit.

5. The voice guide will say “Changing<name>.”When the confirmation function is on, thesystem will check if the name is correct.Answer “Yes” if you want to continuewith the editing based on this information.

NOTE The system must have at least one entry.

NOTE Say “List names,” and the names registered

in the phonebook will be read out in order.Refer to “Vehicle phonebook: Listening tothe list of registered names” on page 5-99.

NOTE If the telephone number is already registered

in the selected location, the voice guide willsay “The current number is <current num-ber>. New number, please.” Say a new tele-phone number to change the current number.

NOTE If the location where a telephone number

was already registered has been overwrittenwith a new number, the voice guide will say“Number changed” and then the system willreturn to the main menu.


in the phonebook are read out in order. Referto “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the listof registered names” on page 5-99.




5

Answer “No,” the system will return toStep 4.

6. The voice guide will say “Name please.”Say the new name you want to register.

7. The registered name will be changed.When the change is complete, the systemwill return to the main menu.

[Listening to the list of registered names]


the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “List names.”

4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out theentries in the phonebook in order.

5. When the voice guide is done reading thelist, it will say “End of list, would you liketo start from the beginning?” When youwant to check the list again from thebeginning, answer “Yes.”When you are done, answer “No” toreturn to the previous or main menu.

[Deleting a telephone number]


the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “Delete.”

4. The voice guide will say “Please say thename of the entry you would like todelete, or say list names.” Say the name ofthe phonebook entry in which the tele-phone number you want to delete is regis-tered.

5. If only one telephone number is registeredin the selected phonebook entry, the voiceguide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-tion>.”If multiple telephone numbers are regis-tered in the selected phonebook entry, thevoice guide will say “Would you like todelete [home], [work], [mobile], [other],or all?”Select the location to delete, and the voiceguide will say “Deleting <name> <loca-tion>.”

6. The system will ask if you really want todelete the selected telephone number(s) togo ahead with the deletion, answer “Yes.”Answer “No,” the system will canceldeleting the telephone number(s) and thenreturn to Step 4.

NOTEYou can call, edit or delete a name that is

being read out.Press the SPEECH button and say “Call” tocall the name, “Edit name” to edit it, or“Delete” to delete it.The system will beep and then execute yourcommand.

If you press the SPEECH button and say“Continue” or “Previous” while the list isbeing read, the system will advance orrewind the list. Say “Continue” to proceed tothe next entry or “Previous” to return to theprevious entry.


in the phonebook are read out in order. Referto “Vehicle phonebook: Listening to the listof registered names” on page 5-99.

NOTE To delete the telephone numbers from all

locations, say “All.”




5

7. When the telephone number deletion iscomplete, the voice guide will say“<name> <location> deleted” and thenthe system will return to the main menu.If all locations are deleted, the system willsay “<name> and all locations deleted”and the name will be removed from thephonebook. If numbers still remain underthe entry, the name will retain the otherassociated numbers.

You can delete all registered informationfrom the vehicle phonebook.


the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “Erase all.”

4. For confirmation purposes, the voiceguide will ask “Are you sure you want toerase everything from your hands-freesystem phonebook?” Answer “Yes.”Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of allregistered information in the phonebookand return to the main menu.

5. The voice guide will say “You are aboutto delete everything from your hands-freesystem phonebook. Do you want to con-tinue?” Answer “Yes” to continue.

Answer “No” to cancel the deletion of allregistered information in the phonebookand return to the main menu.

6. The voice guide will say “Please wait,erasing the hands-free system phone-book” and then the system will delete alldata in the phonebook.When the deletion is complete, the voiceguide will say “Hands-free system phone-book erased” and then the system willreturn to the main menu.

N00566200049

All entries in the phonebook stored in the cel-lular phone can be transferred in a batch andregistered in the mobile phonebook.Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containingup to 1,000 names, can be registered.

The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automaticallyconverts from text to voice the names regis-tered in the transferred phonebook entries,and creates names.

Follow the steps below to transfer to themobile phonebook the phonebook stored inthe cellular phone.

Erasing the phonebookMobile phonebook

NOTEOnly the mobile phonebook transferred from

the connected cellular phone can be usedwith that cellular phone.

You cannot change the names and telephonenumbers in the phonebook entries registeredin the mobile phonebook. You cannot selectand delete specific phonebook entries, either.To change or delete any of the above, changethe applicable information in the sourcephonebook of the cellular phone and thentransfer the phonebook again.

To import a devices phonebook

NOTE Transfer should be completed while the vehi-

cle is parked. Before transferring, make surethat the vehicle is parked in a safe location.

The already stored phonebook in the mobilephonebook is overwritten by the storedphonebook in the cellular phone.

All or part of data may not be transferred,even when the cellular phone supports Blue-tooth®, depending on the compatibility ofthe device.

Only a home, a work, and a mobile numbercan be imported.

The maximum supported telephone numberlength is 19 digits. Any telephone number of20 digits or more will be truncated to the first19 digits.

NOTE





the following: new entry, edit number,edit name, list names, delete, erase all, orimport contact.” Say “Import contact.”

4. The voice guide will say “Would you liketo import a single entry or all contacts?”Say “All contacts.”

5. The voice guide will say “Importing thecontact list from the mobile phonebook.This may take several minutes to com-plete. Would you like to continue?”Answer “Yes,” transferring to the mobilephonebook the phonebook stored in thecellular phone will start.Answer “No,” the system will return tothe main menu.

6. When the transfer is complete, the voiceguide will say “Import complete” andthen the system will return to the mainmenu.

N00566301092

MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10IC: 279B-MDGMY10Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal Communi-cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada

Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). Thisdevice complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules and RSS-210 of the Industry CanadaRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:


This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The term “IC:” before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.The antenna used for this transmitter must notbe co-located or operating in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided withinstallation instructions and transmitter oper-ating conditions for satisfying RF exposurecompliance.FCC Notice: This equipment has been testedand found to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

If telephone numbers contain charactersother than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these charactersare deleted before the transfer.

For the connection settings on the cellularphone side, refer to the instructions for thecellular phone.

NOTE The transfer may take some time to complete

depending on the number of contacts.

NOTE If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be

connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-lular phone, the voice guide will say “Unableto transfer contact list from phone” and thenthe system will return to the main menu.

If you press the HANG-UP button or pressand hold the SPEECH button during the datatransfer, the transfer will be cancelled andthe system will return to the main menu.

If an error occurs during the data transfer, alltransfer will be cancelled and the voice guidewill say “Unable to complete the phonebookimport” and then the system will return tothe main menu.

If there are no contacts in the phonebook, thevoice guide will say “There are no contactson the connected phone.”

General information

NOTE

CAUTIONChanges or modifications made to this

equipment not expressly approved by themanufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-tion to operate this equipment.


USB input terminal (if so equipped)


5

provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, use and can radiateradio frequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio com-munications.However, there is no guarantee that interfer-ence will not occur in a particular installation.If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception, whichcan be determined by turning the equipmentoff and on, the user is encouraged to try tocorrect the interference by one or more of thefollowing measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.Connect the equipment into an outlet on a

circuit different from that to which thereceiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatuscomplies with Canadian ICES-003.

N00566401080

N00566701155

You can connect your USB memory device oriPod* to play music files stored in the USBmemory device or iPod.This section explains how to connect andremove a USB memory device or iPod.See the following section for details on howto play music files.

Refer to “To play tracks from USB device”on page 7-29.Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-tion” on page 7-31.

*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of AppleInc. in the United States and other countries.

Enrollment commands


N00566800104

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turnthe ignition switch to the “OFF” positionor put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove compartment and removethe connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).

3. Connect a commercially available USBconnector cable (D) to the USB memorydevice (E).

How to connect a USB memory device

To connect




5

4. Connect the commercially available USBconnector cable (D) to the vehicle’s con-nector cable (B).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) ofthe connector cable as shown in the illus-tration.

5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on theclips.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”position or put the operation mode inOFF.

2. Remove the commercially available USBconnector cable (D).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) ofthe connector cable as shown in the illus-tration.

3. Fix the connector cable on the clips andclose the glove compartment.

N00566901157

1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turnthe ignition switch to the “OFF” positionor put the operation mode in OFF.

2. Open the glove compartment and removethe connector cable (A, B) from clips (C).

WARNINGAn open glove compartment door can

cause a serious injury or death to the frontpassenger in an accident, even if the pas-senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Alwayskeep the glove compartment door closedwhen driving.

NOTEDo not connect the USB memory device to

the vehicle’s connector cable directly.The USB memory device may be damaged.

When closing the glove compartment, becareful not to trap the connector cable andUSB memory device.

To remove

How to connect an iPod

To connect




5

3. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.

4. Connect the connector cable (D) to theconnector cable (B).Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) ofthe connector cable as shown in the illus-tration.

5. Fix the connector cable (A, B) on theclips.


2. Remove the connector cable (D).

Be sure to hold the terminal part (A) ofthe connector cable as shown in the illus-tration.

3. Fix the connector cable on the clips andclose the glove compartment.

N00567000015

N00567101143

Devices of the following types can be con-nected.

NOTEUse a genuine connector cable from Apple

Inc.



NOTEWhen closing the glove compartment, be

careful not to trap the connector cable andiPod.

To remove

Types of connectable devices and supported file specifica-tions

Device types




5

On vehicles equipped with the Bluetooth®

2.0 interface, for these connectable devicetypes, “iPod*,” “iPod classic*,” “iPodnano*,” “iPod touch*” and “iPhone*,” referto the following website:[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]

You can access the Mitsubishi Motors NorthAmerica website.[For vehicles sold in Canada]You can access the Mitsubishi Motors web-site. Please read and agree to the “Warningabout Links to the Web Sites of Other Com-panies”. The websites mentioned above mayconnect you to websites other than the Mit-subishi Motors website.http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/prod-ucts/index.html

*: “iPod,” “iPod classic,” “iPod nano,” “iPodtouch” and “iPhone” are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc. in the United States andother countries.

Model name Condition

USB memory deviceStorage capacity of 256 Mbytes or more

iPod* fifth gen-eration

F/W Ver.1.3 or later

iPod clas-sic*

80GB/180GB

F/W Ver.1.1.2 or later

120GB F/W Ver.2.0.1 or later

160GB (late 2009)


iPod nano*

first gener-ation


second generation


third gen-eration


fourth generation


fifth gen-eration


sixth gen-eration

F/W Ver.1.0 or later

iPod touch*

first gener-ation


second generation


third gen-eration


fourth generation


iPhone*

iPhone F/W Ver.3.1.3 or later

iPhone 3G F/W Ver.4.2.1 or later

iPhone 3GS


iPhone 4 F/W Ver.4.3.1 or later

iPhone 4S F/W Ver.5.0.1 or later

Models other than USB memory devices and iPods

Digital audio player supporting mass storage class

Model name Condition

NOTEDepending on the type of the USB memory

device or other device connected, the con-nected device may not function properly orthe available functions may be limited.

It is recommended to use an iPod with firm-ware updated to the latest version.

You can charge your iPod by connecting it tothe USB input terminal when the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in ON orACC.

Do not keep your USB memory device oriPod in your vehicle.

It is recommended that you back up the filesin case of data damage.


Sun visors


5

N00567200020

You can play music files of the followingspecifications that are saved in a USB mem-ory device or other device supporting massstorage class. When you connect your iPod,playable file specifications depend on theconnected iPod.

N00524600353

Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reducefront glare while driving. To reduce sideglare, turn the visor to the side (2).

A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sunvisor.

Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) onthe sun visor.

Do not connect to the USB input terminalany device (hard disk, card reader, memoryreader, etc.) other than the connectabledevices specified in the previous section.The device and/or data may be damaged. Ifany of these devices was connected by mis-take, remove it after turning the ignitionswitch to the “OFF” position or putting theoperation mode in OFF.

File specifications

Item ConditionFile format MP3, WMA, AACMaximum number of levels (including the root)

Level 8

Number of folders 700Number of files 65,535

NOTE Sun visors

Vanity mirror

Card holder


12 V power outlets


5

N00525001670

Accessories can be operated while the igni-tion switch or the operation mode is in ON orACC.To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open thecover, and insert the plug in the power outlet.

N00525300575 N00525800235

1- ( )The light illuminates regardless ofwhether a door or the liftgate is open orclosed.2- (•)Delayed off functionThe light illuminates when a door or theliftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-gate is closed.However, the light goes off immediatelywith all doors and the liftgate closed in thefollowing cases:• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode isput in ON.

• When the power door lock function isused to lock the vehicle.

12 V power outlets

CAUTIONBe sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory

operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.Also be aware that using electronic equip-

ment with the engine off may run the batterydown.

When the power outlet is not in use, be sureto close the power outlet cover. This will pre-vent the power outlet from becomingclogged and short circuiting.

Interior lights

NOTEBe aware that leaving the light illuminated

with the engine off may run the batterydown.Never leave the vehicle without checkingthat the light is off.

1- Cargo room light P.5-1082- Dome light P.5-107

Dome light


Storage spaces


5

• When the remote control transmitter ofthe keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key is used to lock the vehicle.

• When the door lock/unlock switch orliftgate switch is pressed to lock thevehicle while carrying the F.A.S.T.-key.

Auto cut-out functionIf the light is left switched on with theignition switch is in the “OFF” or “ACC”position or the operation mode is in OFFor ACC, and a door or the liftgate isopened, it goes off automatically afterapproximately 30 minutes.The light will illuminate again after itautomatically goes off in the followingcases:• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode isput in ON.

• When the keyless entry system or theF.A.S.T.-key is operated.

• When all doors and the liftgate areclosed.

3- ( )The light goes off regardless of whether adoor or the liftgate is open or closed.

N00526100176

The light illuminates when the liftgate isopened, and goes out when the liftgate isclosed.

N00526400528

NOTEWhen the key was used to start the engine: if

the key is removed while the doors and lift-gate are closed, the light is illuminated andafter approximately 30 seconds it goes off.

When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start theengine: if the operation mode is put in OFFwhile the doors and liftgate are closed, thelight illuminates and after approximately 30seconds it goes off.

The time until the light goes off (delayed off)can be adjusted. See your authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer for details.

The auto cut-out function cannot be operated

when the dome light switch is in the “ ”position.Also, this function can be deactivated. Seeyour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer fordetails.

Cargo room light

NOTE

Storage spaces

CAUTIONNever leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,

or spectacles in the cabin when parking thevehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin willbecome extremely hot, so lighters and otherflammable items may catch fire andunopened drink cans (including beer cans)may rupture. The heat may also deform orcrack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-tacle parts that are made of plastic.

Keep the lids of storage spaces closed whiledriving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of astorage space could otherwise cause injuriesduring a sudden stop.

NOTEDo not leave valuables in any storage space

when leaving the vehicle.


Cup holders


5

N00551500275

To open, pull the lever (A).

N00527301433

The cup holder is designed for holding cupsor drink-cans securely in its holes.

The cup holder is located in front of the floorconsole.

N00537000175

N00502800065

Glove compartment



NOTE The USB input terminal (if so equipped) is

located in the glove compartment. Fordetails, refer to “USB input terminal” onpage 5-102.

Cup holders

NOTE Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit

securely depending on the shape of the bot-tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving isdone while a plastic bottle is not securelyplaced, so check that plastic bottles areplaced securely or use the bottle holder.

For the front seat

CAUTIONDo not drink beverages while driving your

vehicle.This is distracting and could cause an acci-dent.

For the rear seat

Bottle holders

CAUTIONDrink beverages while driving your vehicle

is distracting and can cause an accident.Vibration and shaking while driving may

cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, asspilling hot beverages could cause burns.


Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)


5

There are bottle holders located on the frontdoors.

N00528200096

1. Insert the concave portion (A) on theunderside of the rear shelf panel into theinside protruding portion (B) of the rearpillar.

2. Hang the strap (C) of the rear shelf panelon the hook (D).

Follow this procedure in reverse to remove.

N00574700014

Convenience hook is located on the seatbackof the passenger’s seat.

NOTEDo not store cup or drink can in the bottle

holder.Make sure all lids are tightly closed when

storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,etc.

Some beverages may not be stored, depend-ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-tles, etc.

Rear shelf panel (if so equipped)

CAUTIONDo not place luggage or other items on the

rear shelf panel. Any items on the rear shelfpanel would obstruct your rearward view,and they could fly forward and cause injuriesor other mishap in the event of hard braking.

To install

CAUTION Lightly push the rear shelf panel to make

sure that the concave portion (A) is setfirmly in the protruding portion (B) of theliftgate. If the rear shelf panel is not securelylocked in place, it could unhook while driv-ing and cause injuries.

To remove

Convenience hook


Assist grips


5

N00559000074

These grips are to support the body by handwhile seated in the vehicle.

NOTE To avoid damage to the convenience hook,

do not hang objects that weight more than 9pounds (4 kg).

Assist grips

CAUTIONDo not use the assist grips when getting into

or out of the vehicle. The assist grips coulddetach causing you to fall.



6

Driving safety

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4Braking ............................................................................................6-5Parking .............................................................................................6-5Loading information ........................................................................6-6Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11


Fuel economy

6-2 Driving safety

6

N00628800178

Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.Your personal driving habits can have a sig-nificant effect on your fuel consumption.Several recommendations for achieving thegreatest fuel economy are listed below.

Whenever accelerating from a stop,always accelerate slowly and smoothly.

When parked for even a short period, donot idle the engine. Shut it off.

Plan your trips to avoid unnecessarystops.

Keep your tires inflated to the recom-mended pressures.

For freeway driving, maintain a speed ofapproximately 50 mph (80 km/h) whentraffic, roadway and weather conditionssafely permit.

Keep your air filter clean and your vehiclelubricated according to the recommenda-tions in this manual.

Always keep your vehicle well main-tained. A poorly maintained enginewastes fuel and costs money.

Never overload your vehicle.

N00628900049

Drunk driving is one of the most frequentcauses of accidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impairedeven with blood alcohol levels far below thelegal minimum. If you have been drinking,don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or usepublic transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-ing a cold shower will not make you sober.Similarly, prescription and nonprescriptiondrugs affect your alertness, perception andreaction time. Consult with your doctor orpharmacist before driving while under theinfluence of any of these medications.

N00628600046

The original equipment floor mat providedwith your vehicle was specifically designedfor your vehicle. Always properly positionthe floor mat and assure it does not interferewith operation of the pedals. Always use the

retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard tosecure the floor mat. When used, this clip willhelp prevent the floor mat from moving for-ward and possibly interfering with the opera-tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor matfrom moving forward and possibly interferingwith the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishigenuine floor mats are recommended.

N00628700047

1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of thefloorboard.

2. Align the floor mat with the installationholes over the retaining clips.

3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.

Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs

WARNINGNEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, yourreflexes are slower and your judgment isimpaired.

Floor mat

To install the floor mat

NOTE The shape of the mat and the number of

retaining clips may vary depending on thevehicle model.


Vehicle preparation before driving

Driving safety 6-3

6

N00629001783

For a safer and more enjoyable trip, alwayscheck for the following:

Before starting the vehicle, make certainthat you and all passengers are seated andwearing their seat belts properly (withchildren in the rear seat, in appropriaterestraints), and that all the doors and theliftgate are locked.

Move the driver’s seat as far backward aspossible, while keeping good visibility,and good control of the steering wheel,brakes, accelerator, and controls. Checkthe instrument panel indicators and multi-information display for any possible prob-lem.

Similarly, the front passenger seat shouldalso be moved as far back as possible.

Make sure that infants and small childrenare properly restrained in accordance withall laws and regulations.

Check these by selecting the defroster mode,and set the blower switch on high. You shouldbe able to feel the air blowing against thewindshield. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-shield, door windows)” on page 7-6, 7-10,7-17.

Check all the tires for heavy tread wear oruneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Lookfor any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Checkthe wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires(including spare tire) for proper pressure.

WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not

properly installed, it can interfere with theoperation of the pedals. Interference withthe pedals can cause unintended accelera-tion and/or increased stopping distancesresulting in a crash and injury. Alwaysmake sure the floor mat does not interferewith the accelerator or brake pedal.

Always use the retaining clip on thedriver’s floorboard to secure the floormat.

Always install the mat with the correctside facing down.

Never install a second mat over or underan existing floor mat.

Do not use a floor mat designed foranother model vehicle even if it is aMitsubishi genuine floor mat.

Before driving, be sure to check the fol-lowing:• Periodically check that the floor mat is

properly secured with the retaining clips.If you remove the floor mat while clean-ing the inside of your vehicle or for anyother reason, always check the conditionof the floor mat after it has been rein-stalled.

• While the vehicle is stopped with theengine off, check that the floor mat is notinterfering with the pedals by depressingthe pedals fully.

Vehicle preparation before driving

Seat belts and seats

Defrosters

Tires


Safe driving techniques

6-4 Driving safety

6

Replace your tires before they are heavilyworn out.On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system, there is a risk of damageto the tire inflation pressure sensors when thetire is replaced on the rim. Tire replacementshould, only be performed by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

Have someone watch while you turn all theexterior lights on and off. Also check the turnsignal indicators and high-beam indicators onthe instrument panel.

Check the ground under the vehicle afterparking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, orother leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels arecorrect. Also, if you can smell fuel, you needto find out why immediately and have itfixed.

N00629200137

Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, andyour safest driving, cannot guarantee that youcan avoid an accident or injury. However, if

you give extra attention to the followingareas, you can better protect yourself andyour passengers:

Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,road and weather conditions. Leave plentyof stopping distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead.

Before changing lanes, check your mir-rors, your blind spots, and use your turn-signal light.

While driving, watch the behavior ofother drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.

Always obey applicable laws and regula-tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Alwaysleave room for unexpected events, such assudden braking.

If you plan to drive in another country,obey their vehicle registration laws andmake sure you will be able to get the rightfuel.

N00629400474

Check the battery. At the same time,check the terminals and wiring. Duringextremely cold weather, the battery willnot be as strong. Also, the battery powerlevel may drop because more power isused for cold starting and driving.

Before driving the vehicle, check to see ifthe engine runs at the proper speed and ifthe headlights are as bright as normally.Charge or replace the battery if necessary.During extreme cold weather, it is possi-ble that a very low battery could freeze.

Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-ing the engine, allow a short warm-uptime to distribute oil to all cylinders. Thendrive your vehicle slowly.

Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxlefluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-tion points.

Manual transaxle can be harder to shift incold weather conditions. This is normaland shifting will get easier as the transaxlewarms up.

Check the engine antifreeze.If there is not enough coolant because of aleak or from engine overheating, addMitsubishi Motors Genuine Super LongLife Coolant Premium or equivalent.

Lights

Fluid leaks

Safe driving techniques

Driving during cold weather

WARNINGThe battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-tery to explode, which could cause seriousinjury or death.Always wear protective clothes and a facemask when working with your battery, orlet a skilled mechanic do it.


Braking

Driving safety 6-5

6

Please read this section in conjunctionwith the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.

N00629500521

All parts of the brake system are critical tosafety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice at regular intervalsaccording to the “WARRANTY ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL”.

Check the brake system while driving at alow speed immediately after starting, espe-cially when the brakes are wet, to confirmthey work normally.A film of water can be formed on the brakediscs or brake drums, and prevent normalbraking after driving in heavy rain or throughlarge puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.If this occurs, dry the brakes out by drivingslowly while lightly depressing the brakepedal.

On snowy roads, ice can form on the brakingsystem, making the brakes less effective.While driving in such conditions, pay closeattention to surrounding vehicles and to thecondition of the road surface. From time totime, lightly depress the brake pedal andcheck how effective the brakes are.

It is important to take advantage of the enginebraking by downshifting while driving onsteep downhill roads in order to prevent thebrakes from overheating.

N00629600333

When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,and turn the front wheels toward the curb on adownhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.

Place the gearshift lever into the “R”(Reverse) position when parking on a down-hill slope, into the 1st position when parkingon an uphill slope.

Be sure that the parking brake is firmly setwhen parked and that the selector lever is inthe “P” (PARK) position.When parking on a hill, it is important to setthe parking brake before moving the selectorlever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-vents loading the parking brake against thetransaxle. When this happens, it is difficult tomove the selector lever out of the “P”(PARK) position.

Never leave the engine running while youtake a short nap or rest. Also, never leave theengine running in a closed or poorly venti-lated place.

WARNINGNever open the radiator cap when the

radiator is hot. You could be seriouslyburned.

Braking

When brakes are wet

When driving in cold weather

When driving downhill

Parking

Parking on a hill

For vehicles equipped with man-ual transaxle

For vehicles equipped with contin-uously variable transmission (CVT)

Parking with the engine run-ning


Loading information

6-6 Driving safety

6

Your front bumper can be damaged if youscrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.Be careful when traveling up or down steepslopes where your bumper can scrape theroad.

More effort could be required to turn thesteering wheel.Refer to “Electric power steering system(EPS)” on page 5-49.

Always carry the key and lock all doors andthe liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat-tended.Always try to park your vehicle in a well litarea.

N00629900424

It is very important to know how muchweight your vehicle can carry. This weight iscalled the vehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo,non-factory-installed options, if any, beingtowed. The tire and loading information plac-ard located on the driver’s door sill of yourvehicle will show how much weight it mayproperly carry.

It is important to familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms before loading your vehicle:

Vehicle maximum load on the tire: loadon an individual tire that is determined bydistributing to each axle its share of themaximum loaded vehicle weight anddividing by two.

Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on anindividual tire that is determined by dis-tributing to each axle its share of the curbweight, accessory weight, and normaloccupant weight and dividing by two.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sumof -(a) Curb weight;(b) Accessory weight;(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and(d) Production options weight.

Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi-cle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool-ant.

Accessory weight: the combined weight(in excess of those standard items whichmay be replaced) of automatic transmis-sion, power steering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, radio, and heater,to the extent that these items are availableas factory- installed equipment (whetherinstalled or not).

Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargoand luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*times the vehicle’s designated seatingcapacity.

WARNINGLeaving the engine running risks injury or

death from accidentally moving the gear-shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec-tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulationof toxic exhaust fumes in the passengercompartment.

Where you park

WARNINGDo not park your vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry grass orleaves can come in contact with a hotexhaust, since a fire could occur.

Do not keep the steering wheel fully turned for a long time

When leaving the vehicle

Loading information

WARNINGNever overload your vehicle. Overloading

can damage your vehicle, adversely affectvehicle performance, including handlingand braking, cause tire failure, and resultin an accident.


Loading information

Driving safety 6-7

6

Production options weight: the combinedweight of those installed regular produc-tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)in excess of those standard items whichthey replace, not previously considered incurb weight or accessory weight, includ-ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roofrack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)*times the number of specified occupants.(In your vehicle the number is 3)

Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu-tion within the passenger compartment (Inyour vehicle the distribution is 2 in front,1 in second row seat)

N00630100396

The tire and loading information placard islocated on the inside sill of the driver’s door.

This placard shows the maximum number ofoccupants permitted to ride in your vehicle aswell as “the combined weight of occupantsand cargo” (A), which is called the vehiclecapacity weight. This placard also tells youthe size and recommended inflation pressurefor the original equipment tires on your vehi-cle. For more information, refer to “Tires” onpage 9-12.

*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadianregulations.

Tire and loading information placard


Loading information

6-8 Driving safety

6

N00630201277

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-cle, the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

NOTEThe above steps for determining

correct load limit were written inaccordance with U.S.A. regula-tions.Your vehicle cannot tow atrailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.


Loading information

Driving safety 6-9

6

NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size

of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle. For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further informationon GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.


Cargo loads

6-10 Driving safety

6

N00629700435

N00630300082

To determine the cargo load capacity for yourvehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicleoccupants from the vehicle capacity weight.For additional information, if needed, refer to“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”on page 6-8.DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numberslisted on the safety certification label (A)located on the inside sill of the driver’s dooras the guide for passengers and/or cargoweight.

N00630401136

Cargo loads

Cargo load precautions


death, the combined weights of the driver,passengers and cargo and must neverexceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight willadversely affect vehicle performance,including handling and braking, and maycause an accident.

Do not load cargo or luggage higher thanthe top of the seatback. Be sure that yourcargo or luggage cannot move when yourvehicle is in motion.Having either the rear view blocked, oryour cargo being thrown inside the cabinif you suddenly have to brake can cause aserious accident or injury or death.

Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

Loading cargo on the roof

WARNINGWeight placed on the roof of the vehicle

will raise the vehicle’s center of gravityand adversely affect its handling charac-teristics. As a result, driving errors oremergency maneuvers could lead to a lossof control and result in an accident. Driveslowly and avoid excessive maneuverssuch as sudden braking or quick turning.

Make sure that the weight of luggage andthe roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-mum roof load is exceeded, this couldcause damage to the vehicle or result in anaccident.

The total weight of all occupants and lug-gage, including your roof load, must notexceed the vehicle capacity weight. Formore information, refer to “Tire and load-ing information placard” on page 11-3.

Roof load is determined by adding theweight of the roof carrier and the weightof the luggage placed on the roof carrier.

CAUTIONDo not load luggage directly onto the roof.

Use a roof carrier that properly fits yourvehicle.For installation, refer to the instruction man-ual provided with the roof carrier.

Place the luggage on the carrier so that itsweight is distributed evenly with the heaviestitems on the bottom. Do not load items thatare wider than the roof carrier.

WARNING


Trailer towing

Driving safety 6-11

6

N00629800306Before driving and after traveling a short dis-tance, always check the load to make sure itis securely fastened to the roof carrier.Stop the vehicle periodically and check thatthe load remains secure. If the load is notsecure, it could fall from the vehicle anddamage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-ate a road hazard.

NOTE To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas

mileage, remove the roof carrier when not inuse.

Before using an automatic car wash, checkwith the attendant to determine if the roofcarrier should be removed.

Be sure that adequate clearance is main-tained for raising the liftgate during loadingluggage on the roof carrier.

CAUTION Trailer towing

WARNINGDo not use this vehicle for trailer towing.

It may not be possible to maintain controlor adequate braking.



7

Comfort controls

Vents ................................................................................................7-2Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped) ...............7-4Manual air conditioning (if so equipped) .........................................7-7Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)...................................7-12Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-18Air purifier (if so equipped)............................................................7-19AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player

(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-19To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped) ..........................7-29To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device

(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-37Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) .....7-40Error codes .....................................................................................7-41Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-42Antenna ..........................................................................................7-44General information about your radio ...........................................7-44


Vents

7-2 Comfort controls

7

N00729900278

N00730200330

Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.

When the dimple (A) is pressed, the ventsopen.To close the vents, press the dimple on theopposite side.Change the direction of the air flow by turn-ing the vent itself.

N00736400594

To change the position and amount of airflowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” onpage 7-5, 7-8.On vehicles with the automatic air condition-ing, press the MODE switch or defogger

Vents

*: Optional equipment1- Center vents2- Side vents

Air flow and direction adjust-ments

Center vents

*

*Side vents

1- Open2- Close

NOTEOn rare occasions, air from the vents of an

air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This isonly moist air cooling suddenly and does notindicate a problem.

Do not let drinks or other liquids get into thevents as they could prevent the air condition-ing from operating normally.

Changing the mode selection


Vents

Comfort controls 7-3

7

switch. (Refer to “MODE switch” on page7-14, “Defogger switch” on page 7-14.)These symbols are used in the next severalillustrations to demonstrate the quantity of aircoming from the vents.

: Small amount of air from the vents : Medium amount of air from the vents : Large amount of air from the vents

Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-ger compartment.

Air flows to the upper part of the passengercompartment, and flows to the leg area.

Air flows mainly to the leg area.

Air flows to the leg area, the windshield andthe door windows.

Face position

Foot/Face position

NOTEWith the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainlyto the upper part of the passenger compart-ment. With the mode selection dial betweenthe “ ” and “ ” positions, air flowsmainly to the leg area.

Foot position

Foot/Defroster position


Heater without air conditioning function (if so equipped)


7Air flows mainly to the windshield and thedoor windows.

N00737700031

The heater can only be used while the engineis running.

N00737801042

N00737901043

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-tion, select the blower speed by turning theblower speed selection dial.Turning the dial clockwise will increase theblower speed; turning the dial counterclock-wise will decrease it. When the dial is set tothe “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflowwill stop.

NOTEWith the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainlyto the leg area. With the mode selection dialbetween the “ ”and “ ” positions, airflows mainly to the windshield and the doorwindows.

Defroster position

Heater without air condi-tioning function (if so equipped)

Control panel

1- Temperature control dial2- Blower speed selection dial3- Electric rear window defogger switch

P. 5-804- Mode selection dial5- Air selection lever

Blower speed selection dial




7

N00738001067

Turn the temperature control dial clockwiseto make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-wise to make the air cooler.

N00738101071

To change the amount of air flowing from thevents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.

N00738201056

Normally, use the outside air position to keepthe windshield and side windows clear and toquickly remove fog or frost from the wind-shield.

To change the air selection, use the air selec-tion lever.

“ ” Outside air “ ” Recirculated air

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated insome way, use the recirculation position.Switch to the outside air position every nowand then to keep the windows from foggingup.

N00738301057

Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-tion and set the air selection lever to the out-side air position.

Temperature control dial Mode selection dial

Air selection lever CAUTIONUsing recirculated air for a long time may

cause the windows to fog up.

Operating the system

Heating




7

Turn the temperature control dial clockwiseor counterclockwise to the desired tempera-ture. Select the desired blower speed to fityour needs. N00738401045

Set the mode selection dial to the positionsshown in the illustration and set the air selec-tion lever to the outside air position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg areaand the upper part of the passenger compart-ment. Set the desired blower speed.Warm air flows to the leg area and unheatedor slightly warm air (depending upon theposition of the temperature control dial) flowsto the upper part of the passenger compart-ment.

N00738501091

Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from thewindshield and door window.

For ordinary defrostingUse this setting to keep the windshield anddoor windows clear of mist, and to keep theleg area heated (when driving in rain orsnow).

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”position.

CAUTION The engine speed may increase when the

heating is operating.Since creeping will occur strongly if theengine speed becomes high while the vehiclewith a CVT is stationary, fully depress thebrake pedal to prevent the vehicle fromcreeping.

NOTE For quick heating, set the blower speed at the

3rd position.

Combination of unheated air and heated air

Defrosting or defogging (wind-shield, door windows)

CAUTION For safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows.


Manual air conditioning (if so equipped)


7

2. Set the air selection lever to the outside airposition.

3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-ing the blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by turn-ing the temperature control dial.

For quick defrosting



3. Set your blower to the maximum speed.4. Set the temperature to the highest posi-

tion.

N00730300344

The air conditioning can only be used whilethe engine is running.

N00730501327

N00736501215

When the ignition switch or the operationmode is in ON, select the blower speed byturning the blower speed selection dial.Turning the dial clockwise will increase theblower speed; turning the dial counterclock-wise will decrease it. When the dial is set tothe “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflowwill stop.

NOTE To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.


Control panel

1- Temperature control dial2- Air conditioning switch3- Blower speed selection dial4- Electric rear window defogger

switch P.5-805- Mode selection dial6- Air selection lever

Blower speed selection dial




7

N00736601258

Turn the temperature control dial clockwiseto make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-wise to make the air cooler.

N00736701233

To change the amount of air flowing from thevents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.

N00736801423


To change the air selection, use the air selec-tion lever.

“ ” Outside air “ ” Recirculated air

If the outside air is dusty or contaminated insome way, use the recirculation position.Switch to the outside air position every nowand then to keep the windows from foggingup.

Temperature control dial

NOTEWhile the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with thedial.

Mode selection dial Air selection lever




7

N00731001488

Push the switch, and the air conditioningcompressor will turn on. The air conditioningindicator light (A) will come on.

Push the switch again and the air condition-ing compressor will stop and the indicatorlight (A) goes off.

N00731101304

Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-tion and set the air selection lever to the out-side air position.Turn the temperature control dial clockwiseor counterclockwise to the desired tempera-ture. Select the desired blower speed to fityour needs.

N00731201376



3. Push the air conditioning switch.4. Change the temperature by turning the

control dial clockwise or counterclock-wise.

5. Set the desired blower speed.

CAUTIONUsing recirculated air for a long time may


Air conditioning switch

Operating the air conditioning system

Heating

NOTE For quick heating, set the blower speed at the

3rd position.

Cooling

CAUTION The engine speed may increase when the air

conditioning (cooling or heating) is operat-ing.Since creeping will occur strongly if theengine speed becomes high while the vehiclewith a CVT is stationary, fully depress thebrake pedal to prevent the vehicle fromcreeping.




7

N00731301292

Set the mode selection dial to the positionsshown in the illustration and set the air selec-tion lever to the outside air position.

The air flow will be directed to the leg areaand the upper part of the passenger compart-ment. Set the desired blower speed.Warm air flows to the leg area and unheatedor slightly warm air (depending upon theposition of the temperature control dial) flowsto the upper part of the passenger compart-ment.

N00731401596

Set the mode selection dial (between “ ”and “ ”) to remove frost or mist from thewindshield and door window.



NOTE If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in

some way, set the air selection lever to therecirculation position. Let in some outsideair from time to time for good ventilation.

To cool the leg areas, set the mode selectiondial to the “ ” position.

Combination of unheated air and heated air







7


3. Select your desired blower speed by turn-ing the blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by turn-ing the temperature control dial.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.





tion.5. Push the air conditioning switch.

NOTE To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the

side vents toward the door windows.

When defrosting, do not set the temperaturecontrol dial near the maximum cool position.This would blow cool air on the windowglass and fog it up.

NOTE


Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)


7

N00731501353

The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.

N00711801624


Control panel

Type 1

Type 2

1- Temperature control switch2- Air conditioning switch3- MODE switch4- Air selection switch5- Blower speed selection switch6- Defogger switch7- AUTO switch8- Electric rear window defogger switch

P.5-80

9- OFF switch10- Temperature display11- Mode selection display12- Air selection indicator13- Air conditioning indicator14- AUTO indicator15- Blower speed display

NOTE There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.Never place anything over the sensor, sincedoing so will prevent it from functioningproperly.




7

N00736900179

Press of the blower speed selectionswitch to increase the blower speed.Press of the blower speed selectionswitch to decrease the blower speed.The selected blower speed will be shown inthe display (A).

N00737001406

Press or of the temperature controlswitch to the desired temperature.The selected temperature will be shown in thedisplay (A).

A sound will be made every time you pushany of the switches.

Blower speed selection switch

NOTE

1- Increase2- Decrease

Temperature control switch

NOTE The temperature value of air conditioning is

switched in conjunction with outside temper-ature display unit of the multi informationdisplay.Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” onpage 5-69.

While the engine coolant temperature is low,the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with theswitch.To prevent the windshield and windows fromfogging up, the vent mode will be changed to“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.

When the temperature is set to the highest orthe lowest setting under the AUTO opera-tion, the air selection and the air conditioningwill be automatically changed as follows.• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set

to the highest setting)Outside air will be introduced and the airconditioning will stop.If the air selection and the air conditioningare operated manually after an automaticchangeover, manual operation will beselected.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is setto the lowest setting)Inside air will be recirculated and the airconditioning will operate.




7

The above indicates the factory settings. Youcan personalize the air selection switch andair conditioning switch to match your per-sonal preferences.Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice for assistance.Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioningswitch (Changing the function setting)” onpage7-16.Refer to “Personalizing the air selection(Changing the function setting)” onpage7-15.

N00737100208

To change the amount of air flowing from thevents, press the MODE switch. Each time theMODE switch is pressed, the mode changesto the next one in the following sequence:“ ” “ ” “ ” “ ” “ ”.The selected mode is shown in the display(A). Refer to “Changing the mode selection”on page 7-2.

N00703400015

When this switch is pressed, the modechanges to the “ ” mode. The indicatorlight (A) will come on. The selected mode isshown in the display (B). Refer to “Changingthe mode selection” on page 7-2.

N00737200368


To change the air selection, simply press theair selection switch.The selected position will be shown in thedisplay (A).

Outside air: “ ” indicator is ONOutside air is introduced into the passen-ger compartment.

Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ONAir is recirculated inside the passengercompartment.

MODE switch Defogger switch

NOTEWhen the defogger switch is pressed, the air

conditioning system automatically operatesand outside air (as opposed to recirculatedair) is selected.Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-shield, door windows)” on page 7-17.

Air selection switch




7When the air conditioning turns on, the airselection is controlled automatically. Whenthe air conditioning turns off, the air selectionautomatically goes back to the outside airposition.If high cooling performance is desired, or ifthe outside air is dusty or contaminated insome way, use the recirculation position.Switch to the outside air position every nowand then to keep the windows from foggingup.

N00760000089

You can change the following functions tomatch your preference.

Enable automatic air control:When the AUTO switch is pressed, the airselection switch will also be automaticallycontrolled.

Disable automatic air control:Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,the air selection switch will not be auto-matically controlled.

Changing the settingsPress the air selection switch for about 10seconds or longer.When the setting has changed, the systemwill beep and the “ ” indicator willflash.• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled,

the system will beep three times and theindicator will flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-abled to enabled,the system will beep two times and theindicator will flash three times.

CAUTIONUsing recirculated air for a long time may


NOTE If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-

matic control after manual operation, the airselection switch will also be automaticallycontrolled.

Personalizing the air selection (Changing the function setting)

NOTE The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

control”.When the defogger switch is pressed, the air

selection will automatically change to theoutside air position, even if the system is setto “Disable automatic air control”, in orderto prevent windows from fogging up.




7

N00737301409

Push the switch, and the air conditioningcompressor will turn on. The “ ” indicatorwill be shown in the display (A).

Push the switch again and the air condition-ing compressor will stop and the indicatorgoes off.

N00759800090

You can change the following functions tomatch your preference.

Enable automatic air conditioning control:

When the AUTO switch is pressed, orwhen the temperature control switch hasbeen set to the minimum temperature, theair conditioning switch is automaticallycontrolled.

Disable automatic air conditioning con-trol:The air conditioning switch is not auto-matically controlled, unless the air condi-tioning switch is used.

Changing the settingsPress the air conditioning switch for about10 seconds or longer.When the setting has changed, the systemwill beep and the “ ” indicator willflash.• When the setting has changed from

enabled to disabled,the system will beep three times and theindicator will flash three times.

• When the setting has changed from dis-abled to enabled,the system will beep two times and theindicator will flash three times.

N00703500016

When the AUTO switch is pressed, the modeselection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-lated/outside air selection, temperatureadjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-tus are all controlled automatically.The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in thedisplay (A).

Air conditioning switch

Personalizing the air conditioning switch (Changing the function set-ting)

NOTE The factory setting is “Enable automatic air

conditioning control”.

When the defogger switch is pressed, the airconditioning will run automatically, even ifthe system is set to “Disable automatic airconditioning control”, in order to preventwindows from fogging up.

AUTO switch

NOTE




7

N00703600017

Push the switch to turn off the air condition-ing system.

N00731701485

In normal conditions, use the system in theAUTO mode and follow these procedures:

1. Push the AUTO switch.2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature canbe set within a range of around 61 to 89(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2).

The vents, recirculation/outside air, blowerspeed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFFof air conditioning will be controlled auto-matically.

N00731801138

Blower speed and vent mode may be con-trolled manually by setting the blower speedselection switch and the MODE switch to thedesired positions. To return to automaticoperation, press the AUTO switch.

N00732401522

To remove frost or mist from the windshieldand door windows, use the MODE switch ordefogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).

OFF switch

Operating the air conditioning system (automatic mode)



NOTE Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or

24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.

Operating the air conditioning system (manual mode)







Important air conditioning operating tips


7


1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-tion.

2. Set the air selection switch to the outsideair position.

3. Select your desired blower speed bypressing the blower speed selectionswitch.

4. Select your desired temperature by press-ing the temperature control switch.

5. Push the air conditioning switch.


1. Push the defogger switch to change to the“ ” position.


tion.

N00733700336

1. Park the vehicle in the shade wheneverpossible. Parking in the hot sun makes thevehicle interior extremely hot which thenrequires more time to cool. If it is neces-sary to park in the sun, open the windowsfor the first few minutes of air condition-ing to expel the hot air.

2. Afterwards, keep the windows closedwhen the air conditioning is in use. Theentry of outside air through open windowswill reduce cooling efficiency.

3. When running the air conditioning, makesure the air intake, which is located infront of the windshield, is free of obstruc-tions such as leaves. Leaves collected inthe air-intake chamber may reduce airflow and plug the water drains.

If the air conditioning seems less effectivethan usual, the cause might be a refrigerantleak.

NOTEWhile the mode selection is set “ ” posi-

tion, the air conditioning compressor will runautomatically. The outside air position willalso be selected automatically.

If the mode selection is set “ ” position,you cannot turn the air conditioning off orselect the recirculation position. This pre-vents the windows from fogging up.

To defog quickly, direct the air flow from theside vents toward the door windows.

When defrosting, do not set the temperatureto the maximum cool position. This willblow cool air on the window glass and fog itup.

Important air conditioning operating tips

Air conditioning system refrig-erant and lubricant recommen-dations


Air purifier (if so equipped)


7

Have the system inspected by your authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice.

The air conditioning should be operated for atleast five minutes each week, even in coldweather. This includes the quick defrostingmode. Operating the air condition systemweekly maintains lubrication of the compres-sor internal parts to keep the air conditioningin the best operating condition.

N00733800180

The air conditioning system is equipped withan air filter to remove pollen and dust.The air filter’s ability to collect pollen anddirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replaceit periodically. For the maintenance interval,refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-NANCE MANUAL”.

N00734302131

The audio system can only be used when theignition switch or the operation mode is inON or ACC.

CAUTION The air conditioning system in your vehicle

must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the lubricant ZXL 200PG.Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant willcause severe damage and may require replac-ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioningsystem.The release of refrigerant into the atmo-sphere is not recommended.The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehi-cle is designed not to harm the earth’s ozonelayer. However, it may contribute slightly toglobal warming.It is recommended that the old refrigerant besaved and recycled for future use.

During a long period of disuse

Air purifier (if so equipped)

NOTEOperation in certain conditions such as driv-

ing on a dusty road and frequent use of theair conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-vice life of the filter. When you feel that theair flow is lower than normal or when thewindshield or windows start to fog up easily,replace the air filter.Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice for assistance.

AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)

NOTE To listen to the audio system while the

engine is not running, turn the ignitionswitch to the “ACC” position or put the oper-ation mode in ACC.For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,if the operation mode is left in ACC, theaccessory power will automatically turn offafter a certain period of time and you will nolonger be able to use the audio system. Theaccessory power comes on again if theengine switch is operated with it in the“ACC” position. Refer to “ACC power auto-cutout function” on page 5-14.

If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,it may create noise in the audio equipment.This does not mean that anything is wrongwith your audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far awayas possible from the audio equipment.

If foreign objects or water get into the audioequipment, or if smoke or a strange odorcomes from it, immediately turn off theaudio system and have it checked at anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice. Never try torepair it yourself. Avoid using the audio sys-tem until it is inspected by a qualified per-son.

If the audio system is damaged by foreignobjects, water, or fire, have the systemchecked by a qualified Mitsubishi Motorstechnician.




7

N00711901742

N00712001421

Turn the VOL switch clockwise to increasethe volume; counterclockwise to decrease thevolume.The status will be displayed in the display.

N00712101709

1. Press the /MENU button to selectBASS TREBLE FADER BAL-ANCE Sound control mode off.

2. Turn the SEL switch either clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the tone/bal-ance setting.The status will be displayed in the display.

To select the desired bass level.

To select the desired treble level.

To balance the volume from the F (front) andthe R (rear) speakers.

To balance the volume from the L (left) andthe R (right) speakers.

N00734901925

Volume and tone control panel

1- PWR (On-Off)/VOL (Volume con-trol)/SEL (Select) switch

2- Display3- /MENU (Mode change) button4- SEL (Select) indicator5- (Return) button

To adjust the volume

To adjust the tone

BASS (Bass tone control)

TREBLE (Treble tone control)

FADER (Front/Rear balance con-trol)

BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)

NOTEWhen operation of turn of the SEL switch is

enabled, the SEL indicator will appear on thedisplay.

When set to “0”, it will beep.When the following operation is performed,

this mode will be canceled.

• The button is pressed.• The another mode is selected.• The any adjustment is not performed for

more than 10 seconds. In a two-speakers vehicle, keep the FADER

setting in the middle position. Since no rearspeakers are connected, adjusting theFADER setting toward the “R” (rear) sidewill result in a loss of sound output.

Radio control panel and display

1- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button




7

N00735000926

1. Press the PWR switch or the RADIO but-ton to turn on the radio.Press and hold the PWR switch for 2 sec-onds or longer to turn off the radio.

2. Press the RADIO button to select thedesired band (AM/FM1/FM2).

3. Press the seek button to tune to a station,or press one of the memory select buttonsto tune in to a station memorized for thatbutton.Refer to “Automatic tuning”, “Manualtuning” or “To enter frequencies into thememory”.

The frequency changes every time the seekbutton is pressed. Press the button to selectthe desired station.

After keeping the seek button depressed untilit beeps, release the button, and the selectedstation reception will start.

As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can beentered into the memory.

To store a frequency in the memory, followthese steps:

1. Press the seek button to tune to the fre-quency you wish to keep in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttonsuntil it beeps.The sound will be momentarily inter-rupted while the frequency is beingentered into the memory. The number ofthe button matching the entry in the mem-ory as well as the frequency is displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved bypressing the button and then releasing itwithin 1 second.

N00735301766

2- PWR (On-Off) switch3- Display4- Seek (Down-seek) button5- Seek (Up-seek) button6- Memory select buttons

To listen to the radio

To tune the radio

Manual tuning

Automatic tuning

To enter frequencies into the mem-ory

CD control panel and display

1- MEDIA button2- RADIO button3- INFO button4- CD eject button5- CD indicator6- Disc-loading slot7- FOLDER indicator8- TRACK indicator9- Display

10- RPT (Repeat)/F-RPT (Folder repeatmode) indicator

11- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folderrandom mode) indicator

12- SEL (Select) indicator13- PAGE (Title scroll) button14- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button15- (Fast-forward/Track up) button16- (Return) button17- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch




7

N00735502114

1. Insert the disc with the label facing up.When a disc is inserted, the CD indicatorwill come on and the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.The CD player will also start playbackwhen the MEDIA button is pressed with adisc in the player or with a disc set in theDisc-loading slot, even if the radio isbeing used.

2. To stop the CD, turn off the power bypressing the PWR switch for 2 seconds orlonger, or change over to the radio modeby pressing the RADIO button, or ejectthe disc by pressing the eject button.

When the CD eject button is pressed, the discautomatically stops and is ejected.

Press the MEDIA button if a disc is already inthe CD player. The CD player will enter CDmode and start playback. The track numberand the playing time will appear on the dis-play. The tracks in the disc will be playedcontinuously.

This CD player allows you to play MP3(MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded onCD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), andCD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Eachdisc can hold up to 255 files in up to 100 fold-ers, up to a maximum of 16 levels. The ID3tag information can be displayed during MP3playback. For information concerning ID3

tags, refer to “CD text and MP3 title display”on page 7-24.

1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into theslot.

2. Press the MEDIA button if a disc isalready in the CD player.The display shows “READING”, thenplayback will begin.

18- RPT (Repeat) button19- RDM (Random) button

To listen to a CD

To set a disc

NOTE For information on adjusting the volume and

tone, refer to “To adjust the volume” on page7-20 and “To adjust the tone” on page 7-20.

3 inches (8 cm) compact disc cannot beplayed on this CD player.

For information concerning the handling ofcompact discs, refer to “Handling of com-pact discs” on page 7-42.

To eject a disc

NOTE If you do not remove the disc before 15 sec-

onds have elapsed, the CD player will auto-matically reload the disc and stop.

To listen to a music CD

To listen to an MP3 CD

NOTEWhile listening to a disc on which CD-DA

(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have bothbeen recorded, you can switch between read-ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,and the external audio input mode by press-ing the MEDIA button for 2 seconds or lon-ger (until you hear a beep).For information on the external audio input,refer to “To use the external audio inputfunction” on page 7-28.

With a disc that contains both CD-DA andMP3 files, the CD-DA files are automati-cally played first.

The playback sound quality differs depend-ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.For details, refer to the user manual of yourencoding software.

Depending on file/folder configurations on adisc, it may take some time before playbackstarts.

MP3 encode software and writing softwareare not supplied with this unit.




7

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)

The disc is fast-forwarded while the but-ton is held down.Playback will begin once the button isreleased.

The disc is fast-reversed while the buttonis held down.Playback will begin once the button isreleased.

The disc will skip as many songs as the num-ber of times the button is pressed.The display window will display the tracknumber of the track selected.

The disc will skip as many songs as the num-ber of times the button is pressed.The display window will display the tracknumber of the track selected.

Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.When this mode is activated by pressing theSEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appearon the display.

You may encounter trouble in playing anMP3 or displaying the information of MP3files recorded with certain writing softwareor CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

If you record too many folders or files otherthan MP3 onto a disc, it may take some timebefore playback starts.

This unit does not record MP3 files. For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to

“Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 7-43.

CAUTIONAttempting to play a file not in the MP3 for-

mat which has the “.mp3” file name mayproduce noise from the speakers and speakerdamage, and can damage your hearing.

NOTE

Folder selectionin the order

File selectionin the order

To fast-forward/reverse the disc

Fast-forward

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 1 Level 3 Level 4Level 2

Fast-reverse

To select a desired track

Track up

Track down

To find a file (MP3 CDs only)




7

Press the RPT button to repeat the same track.If the RPT button is pressed, the RPT indica-tor will come on.To exit this mode, press the button again.

While a song is playing, press the RPT buttonfor 2 seconds or longer (until you hear abeep). The F-RPT indicator will come on andthe disc will repeat all the songs in the folderthat contains the song currently playing.To exit this mode, press the button again.

If the RDM button is pressed, the RDM indi-cator will come on and the tracks that areplayed will be selected at random.To exit this mode, press the button again.

If the RDM button is pressed, the F-RDMindicator will come on and the tracks that areplayed will be selected at random from thefolder that is currently selected.To exit this mode, press the button again.

Press the RDM button for 2 seconds or longer(until you hear a beep). The RDM indicatorwill come on and the tracks that are playedwill be selected at random from all folders onthe disc currently selected.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00752101189

This CD player can display CD text and MP3titles, including ID3 tag information.

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode orto select the folder orfile.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder orfile.

NOTE To cancel the selection, press the button

to return to the previous step. If no operation is performed for 10 seconds

or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been turned, searching of thedesired file is canceled.

If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the file is displayed, playbackstarts.

When the SEL indicator is not appear on thedisplay and the SEL switch is operated, thevolume adjustment is activated.

To repeat tracks

To repeat a track

To repeat songs in the same folder (MP3CDs only)

NOTEWith a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only filesof the same format (CD-DA only or MP3files only) to be repeated.

To change the order of tracks for playback

Random playback for a disc (music CDsonly)

Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDsonly)

Random playback for all folders on adisc (MP3 CDs only)

NOTEWith a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the random mode causes onlyfiles of the same format (CD-DA only orMP3 files only) to be played in a randomsequence.

CD text and MP3 title display




7

The CD player can display disc and tracktitles for discs with converted disc and tracktitle information. Press the INFO buttonrepeatedly to make selections in the followingsequence: disc name track name normaldisplay mode.

The CD player can display folder and filetitles for discs with converted folder and fileinformation. Press the INFO button repeat-edly to make selections in the followingsequence: folder name file name nor-mal display mode.

The CD player can display ID3 tag informa-tion for files that have been recorded withID3 tag information.

1. Press the INFO button for 2 seconds orlonger to switch to the ID3 tag informa-tion.

2. Press the INFO button repeatedly to makeselections in the following sequence:album TAG track TAG artist TAG normal display mode.

N00702600010

Press the button to switch the clock mode.To exit the clock mode, press the button.

CD text

NOTE The display can show up to 11 characters. If

a disc name or track name has more than 11characters, press the PAGE button to viewthe next 11 characters.

When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “•”.

MP3 titles

ID3 tag information

NOTE To return from ID3 tag information to the

folder name, press the INFO button again for2 seconds or longer.

When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

The display can show up to 11 characters. Ifa folder name, track name, or item of ID3 taginformation has more than 11 characters,press the PAGE button to view the next 11characters.

Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “•”.

To display the clock

A- (Clock) button

NOTEWhile the clock mode is selected, the display

will switch to the applicable operation dis-play whenever the CD player, external audioinput mode or radio, etc. is operated. Then, ifno entries are made for 7 seconds, the dis-play will automatically return to the clockmode.

ExampleCD player mode Clock mode




7

N00702701034

1. Press and hold the button and the clockdisplay flashes.

2. Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “hours”digit.

3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, pressthe button to flash the “minutes” digit.Turn the SEL switch to adjust the “min-utes” digit.

4. When the time is set, press the buttonto stop the clock display from flashing.

N00702801035

1. Press and hold the /MENU button for 2seconds or longer.

2. Turn the SEL switch or press the/MENU button several times to select

“Gracenote DB” and then press the SELswitch.

3. Turn the SEL switch to select “DB Ver-sion” and then press the SEL switch. TheGracenote DB version is displayed.

To adjust the clock

A- (Clock) buttonB- SEL (Select) switchC- SEL (Select) indicatorD- (Return) button



When the following operation is performed,this mode will be canceled.

• The button is pressed until you hear abeep.

• The button is pressed.• The another mode is selected.

Reset the time after the battery terminals aredisconnected and reconnected.

Seconds do not appear in the clock display,but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, theclock begins to operate from 0 seconds.

To confirm the version number of the Gracenote DB (vehicles with a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)

A- /MENU buttonB- SEL (Select) switchC- SEL (Select) indicatorD- (Return) button




7

N00702901036

It is possible to set the language used forvoice control.



“PHONE SET” and then press the SELswitch.

3. Turn the SEL switch to select “LAN-GUAGE” and then press the SEL switch.

4. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangChgYES” and then press the SEL switch.

5. Turn the SEL switch to select languageand then press the SEL switch.

6. Turn the SEL switch to select “LangSetYES” and then press the SEL switch.

N00755400027

It is possible to change the position of thespeaker of the output sound during cellularphone voice cut-in.





• The button is pressed.• The any operation is not performed for

more than 10 seconds.• The EXIT “MENU” is selected.

To change the language (vehi-cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face)

A- /MENU button

B- SEL (Select) switchC- SEL (Select) indicatorD- (Return) button






To change the position of the speaker of the output sound (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)

A- /MENU buttonB- SEL (Select) swicthC- SEL (Select) indicatorD- (Return) button




7


“PHONE SET” and then press the SELswitch.

3. Turn the SEL switch to select “PHONE IN ” and then press the SELswitch.

4. Turn the SEL switch to select “IN-L”(output sound from the left side speaker)or “IN-R” (output sound from the rightside speaker) and then press the SELswitch.

N00703001021

You can listen to commercially availableaudio equipment, such as a portable audiosystem, from your vehicle’s speakers, by con-necting the audio equipment to the auxiliaryaudio connector.

1. Connect the headphone port of the porta-ble audio system to the auxiliary audioconnector using a commercially availableconnection cord.

2. Press the MEDIA button several times toswitch to the AUX mode. The display willshow “AUX” and then the external audioinput mode will be activated.

3. To deactivate the external audio inputmode, press the MEDIA button to switchto another mode.NOTE

When operation of turn of the SEL switch isenabled, the SEL indicator will appear on thedisplay.




To use the external audio input function

A- Auxiliary Audio connector (Mini-jack)B- MEDIA buttonC- Display

NOTEUse a stereo mini-jack connector to connect

the audio equipment to the auxiliary audioconnector.

To activate the external audio input mode

CAUTIONDo not operate the connected audio equip-

ment while driving.This could distract you and an accidentmight occur.

NOTE The connected audio equipment cannot be

adjusted using the vehicle’s audio system.Depending on the connected audio equip-

ment, it may produce noise from the speak-ers.


To play tracks from USB device (if so equipped)


7N00762200056

You can connect your iPod or USB memorydevice to the USB input terminal and playmusic files stored in the iPod or USB mem-ory device.See the following section for the types ofconnectable devices and supported files.Refer to “Types of connectable devices andsupported file specifications” on page 5-104.See the following sections for the connectingmethods, “How to connect an iPod” on page5-103 and “How to connect a USB memorydevice” on page 5-102.If your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth®

2.0 interface, you can play music files in youriPod or USB memory device via voice opera-tion.Refer to “To play iPod tracks via voice opera-tion” on page 7-31 and “To play USB mem-ory device tracks via voice operation” onpage 7-37.

N00762301070

Use the connected audio equipment’s ownpower source, such as its battery.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifthe connected audio equipment is used whilecharging it using the accessory socket of thevehicle.

Do not activate the external audio inputmode when no audio equipment is con-nected.Otherwise, noise may be produced from thespeakers.

Connect audio equipment when the externalaudio input mode is deactivated or lower thevehicle’s speaker volume before connectingit.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifaudio equipment is connected after the exter-nal audio input mode is activated.

Compared to the CD player mode and radiomode, the vehicle’s speaker volume will belower in the external audio input mode.Therefore, be careful when switching fromthe external audio input mode to the CDplayer mode or radio mode since the speakervolume will be higher.

Do not use excessive force on the connectioncord. Otherwise, the cord and connectorsmay be damaged.

If the connection cord alone is left connectedto the auxiliary audio connector, noise maybe produced from the speakers.

NOTE For information on how to connect and oper-

ate the commercially available audio equip-ment, refer to the owner’s manual for thecommercially available audio equipment.


NOTE NOTEA file protected by copyright might not be

able to playback. It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of

the connected device to 0 db or neutral.

iPod control panel and display

1- MEDIA button2- RADIO button3- INFO button4- (USB device active) indicator5- iPod indicator6- Display7- TRACK indicator8- RPT (Repeat mode) indicator9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder

random mode) indicator10- SEL (Select) indicator11- PAGE (Title scroll) button




7N00762401097

1. Press the PWR switch to turn on the audiosystem. The system turns on in the lastmode used.

2. Connect your iPod to the USB input ter-minal.Refer to “How to connect an iPod” onpage 5-103.

3. Press the MEDIA button several times toswitch to the iPod mode. The input modechanges as follows every time theMEDIA button is pressed: CD mode iPod mode Bluetooth® mode (if soequipped) AUX mode CD mode.The iPod indicator are illuminated andthen the iPod mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playbackstarts and indicator appears on the dis-play.

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIObutton or MEDIA button to switch to adifferent mode.

N00762500033

To fast-forward/reverse the current track,press the button or button.

To fast-forward the current track, press the button. While the button is kept pressed,

the track will be fast-forwarded.

To fast-reverse the current track, press the button. While the button is kept pressed, thetrack will be fast-reversed.

N00762600034

Press the button repeatedly until thedesired track number appears on the display.

Press the button repeatedly until thedesired track number appears on the display.

N00762701087

You can select desired tracks from the “Playl-ists”, “Artists”, “Albums”, “Songs” or

12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button13- (Fast-forward/Track up) button14- (Return) button15- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch16- RPT (Repeat) button17- RDM (Random) button

To play from an iPod

NOTEDepending on the condition of your iPod, it

may take a longer time before the playbackstarts.

NOTEButtons on the iPod are disabled while the

iPod is connected to the audio system. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “Toadjust the tone” on page 7-20.

To fast-forward/reverse the track

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a desired track

Track up

Track down

NOTE Pressing the button once during the song

will cause the audio system to restart play-back from the beginning of the song.

To find a track from the iPod menu




7

“Genre” (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face) menus on your iPod.

Operate the SEL switch to select desiredtracks.The selected menu or category or track isshown in the display.When this mode is activated by pressing theSEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appearon the display.

N00762800023

Press the RPT button during playback toshow “RPT” in the display.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00762900024

Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in thedisplay.The iPod randomly selects tracks from thecurrent category and plays the selected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00763000035

Press and hold the RDM button until you heara beep to show “F-RDM” in the display.The iPod randomly selects tracks in thealbum from the current category and play theselected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00763101059

You can display the track titles, artist names,genre and album titles recorded in the iPod.The display changes as follows every timethe INFO button is pressed during playback:

Album title Track name Artist name Genre (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face) Normal display.

N00763200040

Desired tracks can be selected and playedfrom your iPod by “Artist”, “Album”, “Playl-ist” and “Genre” using voice commands.For information concerning the voice recog-nition function or speaker registration func-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” onpage 5-81.The following explains how to prepare forvoice operation and play the tracks.

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode orto select the menu orcategory or track.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the menu orcategory or track.



or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been pressed, searching ofthe desired tracks is canceled.

If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the track is displayed, playbackstarts.


To play the same track repeatedly

To play tracks in random order

To play tracks in each album in random order

To switch the display

NOTEUp to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,press the PAGE button. The next charactersare displayed every time this button ispressed.

If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown inthe display.

Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-stituted by “•”.

To play iPod tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Blue-tooth® 2.0 interface)




7

N00763300067

To use the voice operation, press theSPEECH button (A) first.

N00763400039

1. Say “Play” on the main menu.

2. After the voice guide says “Would youlike to play by Artist, Album, Playlist orGenre?,” say “Artist”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Artistwould you like to play?,” say the artistname.

4. If there is only one match, the system pro-ceeds to step 6.

5. If there are two or more matches, thevoice guide will say “More than onematch was found, would you like to play<artist name>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-tem proceeds to step 6.If you say “No,” the next matching artistis uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing <artistname>,” the system creates a playlistindex for the artist.

7. The system exits the voice recognitionmode and starts playback.

N00763500030


2. After the voice guide says “Would youlike to play by Artist, Album, Playlist orGenre?,” say “Album”.

Preparation for voice operation

To search by artist name

NOTE The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recogniz-

ing the connected device.If the connected device cannot be recognizedor a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth®

2.0 interface starts an appropriate voiceguide. Follow the voice guide.

NOTE If you say “Artist <name>,” you can skip

step 3.

NOTE If you say “No” to three or all artist names

uttered by the system, the voice guide willsay “Artist not found, please try again” andthe system returns to step 2.

Search time depends on the number of songson your connected device. Devices contain-ing a large number of songs may take longerto return search results.

NOTE If the confirmation function is active, the

voice guide confirms if the artist name iscorrect. If the artist name is correct, say“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guidesays “Artist not found, please try again,” thesystem returns to step 2.

To search by album title







7

3. After the voice guide says “What Albumwould you like to play?” say the albumtitle.


5. If there are two or more matches, thevoice guide will say “More than onematch was found, would you like to play<album title>?” If you say “Yes,” the sys-tem proceeds to step 6.If you say “No,” the name of the nextmatching album is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing<album title>,” the system creates a playl-ist index for the album title.


N00763600031


2. After the voice guide says “Would youlike to play by Artist, Album, Playlist orGenre?,” say “Playlist”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Playlistwould you like to play?,” say the playlistname.


5. If there are two or more matches, thevoice guide will say “More than onematch was found, would you like to play<playlist>?” If you say “Yes,” the systemproceeds to step 6.If you say “No,” the next matching playl-ist name is uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing<playlist>,” the system creates an indexfor the playlist.

NOTE If you say “Album <title>,” you can skip

step 3.

NOTE If you say “No” to three or all album titles

uttered by the system, the voice guide willsay “Album not found, please try again” andthe system returns to step 2.


voice guide confirms if the album title is cor-rect. If the album title is correct, say “Yes”.If not, say “No”. After the voice guide says“Album not found, please try again,” the sys-tem returns to step 2.

To search by playlist




NOTE If you say “Playlist <playlist>,” you can skip

step 3.If the device has no playlist, the voice guidewill say “There are no playlists stored ondevice” and the system returns to step 2.

NOTE If you say “No” to three or all playlist names

uttered by the system, the voice guide willsay “Playlist not found, please try again” andthe system returns to step 2.




77. The system exits the voice recognition

mode and starts playback.

N00763700032


2. After the voice guide says “Would youlike to play by Artist, Album, Playlist orGenre?,” say “Genre”.

3. After the voice guide says “What Genrewould you like to play?,” say the musictype.


5. If there are two or more matches, thevoice guide will say “More than onematch was found, would you like to play<genre>?” If you say “Yes,” the systemproceeds to step 6.If you say “No,” the next matching genreis uttered by the system.

6. After the voice guide says “Playing<genre>,” the system creates an index forthe genre.


N00763901073


voice guide confirms if the playlist name iscorrect. If the playlist name is correct, say“Yes”. If not, say “No”. After the voice guidesays “Playlist not found, please try again,”the system returns to step 2. Refer to “Con-firmation function setting” on page 5-84.

To search by genre




NOTE If you say “Genre <type>,” you can skip step

3.

NOTE If you say “No” to three or all genres uttered

by the system, the voice guide will say“Genre not found, please try again” and thesystem returns to step 2.


voice guide confirms if the genre is correct.If the genre is correct, say “Yes”. If not, say“No”. After the voice guide says “Genre notfound, please try again,” the system returnsto step 2. Refer to “Confirmation functionsetting” on page 5-84.

USB control panel and display

1- MEDIA button2- RADIO button3- INFO button4- (USB device active) indicator5- USB indicator6- Display7- TRACK indicator8- RPT (Repeat mode)/F-RPT (Folder

repeat mode) indicator9- RDM (Random mode)/F-RDM (Folder

random mode) indicator10- SEL (Select) indicator11- PAGE (Title scroll) button12- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button13- (Fast-forward/Track up) button14- PWR (On-Off)/SEL (Select) switch




7

N00764001097


2. Connect your USB memory device to theUSB input terminal.Refer to “How to connect a USB memorydevice” on page 5-102.

3. Press the MEDIA button several times toswitch to the USB mode. The input modechanges as follows every time theMEDIA button is pressed: CD mode USB mode Bluetooth® mode (if soequipped) AUX mode CD mode.The USB indicator are illuminated andthen the USB mode will be activated.

4. Once the device is selected, playbackstarts and indicator appears on the dis-play.

5. To stop the playback, press the RADIObutton or MEDIA button to switch to adifferent mode.

N00764100105

This audio can play MP3, WMA and AACfiles recorded in a USB memory device. Thisaudio supports up to 65,535 files in 700 fold-ers on 8 levels.

The folder and file hierarchy in the USBmemory device is shown below.

N00764200034


15- RPT (Repeat) button16- RDM (Random) button

To play from a USB memory device

NOTEDepending on the condition of your USB

device, it may take a longer time before theplayback starts.

NOTE To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To

adjust the volume” on page 7-20 and “Toadjust the tone” on page 7-20.

Supported compressed music files

Folder selection order/file playbackorder (example)

Folder selection In the order

File selectionIn the order

NOTE If a file protected by copyrights is played, the

file will be skipped.

To fast-forward/reverse the track

Root folder (Root directory)

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4




7




N00764300035

Press the button repeatedly until thedesired file number appears on the display.


N00703101022

Operate the SEL switch to select desired file.When this mode is activated by pressing theSEL switch, the SEL indicator will be appearon the display.

N00764500024

Press the RPT button to show “RPT” in thedisplay. To cancel this mode, press the buttonagain.

N00764600038

Press and hold the RPT button until you heara beep to show “F-RPT” in the display.All tracks in the current folder are playedrepeatedly.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00764700039

Press the RDM button to show “F-RDM” inthe display.The audio randomly selects tracks from thecurrent folder and plays the selected tracks.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00764800030

Press and hold the RDM button until you heara beep to show “RDM” in the display.The audio randomly selects tracks from allfolders and plays the selected tracks.

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a file

Track up

Track down


will cause the audio system to restart play-back from the beginning of the file.

To find a file

Press the SEL switch :To start this mode orto select the folder orfile.

Turn the SEL switch :To show the folder orfile.



or more or other button is operated after theSEL switch has been turned, searching of thedesired file is canceled.

If no operation is performed for 5 seconds ormore after the file is displayed, playbackstarts.


To play the same file repeatedly

To play the files in the same folder repeatedly

To play a folder in random order

To play all folders in random order


To play tracks from a Bluetooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)


7

To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00765101053

You can displays titles with tag information.

The display changes as follows every timethe INFO button is pressed during playback:Folder name File name Normal display.

1. Press and hold the INFO button until youhear a beep.

2. The display changes as follows every timethe INFO button is pressed briefly: AlbumTAG Track TAG Artist TAG Genre TAG (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0interface) Normal display.

N00765200073

Desired tracks can be selected and playedfrom your USB memory device by “Artist”,“Album”, “Playlist” and “Genre” using voicecommands.For information concerning the voice recog-nition function or speaker registration func-tion, refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” onpage 5-81.

The playback sequence of tracks is the sameas when an iPod is connected. Refer to the“To play iPod tracks via voice operation” onpage 7-31.

To use the voice operation, press theSPEECH button (A) first.

N00765300104

You can wirelessly connect a digital audioplayer or cellular phone supporting Blue-tooth® to listen to the tracks on the connecteddevice.

Refer to “Bluetooth® 2.0 interface” for theconnecting method, etc. on page 5-81.

The following explains the basic playbackmethod.

To switch the display

Folder title

Tag information

NOTE Press and hold the INFO button again until

you hear a beep, and the tag information dis-play returns to the folder title display.

Up to 11 characters are shown in the displayat once. If the title is cut off in the middle,press the PAGE button. The next charactersare displayed every time this button ispressed.


Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-stituted by“•”.

To play USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehi-cles with Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-face)

Preparation for voice operation

NOTE

To play tracks from a Blue-tooth® device (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)




7

N00765401072

N00765501099


2. Press the MEDIA button several times toswitch to the BT-A (Bluetooth®) mode.The input mode changes as follows everytime the MEDIA button is pressed: CDmode iPod mode Bluetooth® mode(if so equipped) AUX mode CDmode.The BT indicator are illuminated and thenthe BT-A mode will be activated.

3. Connect your Bluetooth® device.Refer to “Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0interface and Bluetooth® device” on page5-87.

4. Playback starts automatically.

N00765600035

To stop the playback, press the Stop button.To restart the playback, press the Play/Pausebutton.

N00765700036

To pause the playback, press and hold thePlay/Pause button until you hear a beep.To restart the playback, press the Play/Pausebutton.

N00703200013


NOTEDepending on the connected device, opera-

tion of the connected device is limited to itsavailable functions.

Depending on the connected device, thedevice may not operate correctly.

A file protected by copyright might not beable to playback.

It is recommended to adjust the equaliser ofthe connected device to 0 db or neutral.

The voice operation is not available to accessmusic files on the connected Bluetooth®

device.

Bluetooth® device control panel and display

1- MEDIA button2- PWR (On-Off) switch3- BT (Bluetooth®) indicator

4- TRACK indicator5- Display6- PAGE (Title scroll) button7- (Fast-reverse/Track down) button8- (Fast-forward/Track up) button9- INFO button

10- Play/Pause button11- Stop button12- RPT (Repeat) button13- RDM (Random) button

To listen to tracks from a device connected via Bluetooth®

NOTEDepending on the connected device, the

playback may not start automatically.In this case, operate the connected device tostart the playback.

To stop the playback (if supported by the device)

To pause the playback (if sup-ported by the device)

To fast-forward/reverse the track (if supported by the device)




7




N00765800037



N00765900038

Press the RPT button several times to switchto show “RPT” in the display.The mode changes as follows every time theRPT button is pressed:No display (not repeat) RPT (repeat sametrack) F-RPT (repeat all tracks) No dis-playTo exit this mode, press the button again.

N00703300014

Press the RPT button several times to switchto show “F-RPT” in the display.The mode changes as follows every time theRPT button is pressed:No display (not repeat) RPT (repeat sametrack) F-RPT (repeat all tracks) No dis-playAll tracks in the Bluetooth® device are playedrepeatedly.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00766000023

Press the RDM button to show “RDM” in thedisplay.The system randomly selects and plays tracksfrom all tracks in the Bluetooth® device.To exit this mode, press the button again.

N00766201051

The system can display tag information.

1. Press the INFO button.2. The display changes as follows every time

the INFO button is pressed:Album title Title name Artist name Genre Normal display

Fast-forward

Fast-reverse

To select a track (if supported by the device)

Track up

Track down


will cause the audio system to restart play-back from the beginning of the file.

To play the same track repeatedly (if supported by the device)

To play the all tracks repeatedly (if supported by the device)

To play tracks in random order (if supported by the device)

To switch the display (if supported by the device)

NOTEUp to 11 characters are shown in the display

at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,press the PAGE button. The next charactersare displayed every time this button ispressed.


Characters that cannot be displayed are sub-stituted by “•”.


Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped)


7

N00714800484

The remote control switches are located onthe left side of the steering wheel.These switches can be used when the ignitionswitch or the operation mode is in ON orACC.

Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped)

1- Vol + key, - keyAdjust audio functions and the mobilephone function volume.

2- CH key, keySelect CD and other audio sourcetracks and radio stations.Hold down to skip up and downthrough tracks.

3- MODE keyHold down to turn the audio functionON/OFF. Additionally, each time thisis pressed, this switches the audiosource.The order of switching is as shownbelow.

*1: An iPod cable (available separately) isrequired.

*2: Requires a separately-purchased Blue-tooth-capable audio device (vehicleswith a Bluetooth® 2.0 interface).


Error codes


7

N00736100780

If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.

Error codes

Audio system

Error display Item Repair

CHECK DISC Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on disc.

Insert disc with label facing up.Remove moisture from disc.

DISC ERROR Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces-sive vehicle vibration. Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations stop.

INTERNAL E Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-ity of your choice for repair.

HEAT ERROR Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.

ERROR DC Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier. Bring your vehicle to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for repair.

iPod (if so equipped)

Error display Item RepairNO SONG There are no playable music files. Record music files in the iPod.VER ERROR The iPod or its software cannot be recognized. Connect a supported iPod.


Handling of compact discs


7

N00734100340

Use only the type of compact discs thathave the mark shown in the illustrationbelow. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RWdiscs may cause problems.)

The use of special shaped, damaged com-pact discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped discsor burrs on the discs) such as those shownwill damage the CD player.

USB memory device (if so equipped)

Error display Item Repair

FILE ERROR The file cannot be played. The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayedfor several seconds, and then the next playable file is playedautomatically.

UNSUPPORTED (first) DEVICE (after) The USB memory device cannot be recognized. Remove the USB memory device.

UNSUPPORTED (first) FORMAT (after)

The USB memory device format cannot be rec-ognized. Remove the USB memory device.

USB BUS PWR An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.

Remove the USB memory device.Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

LSI ERROR Internal device errors Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.





7

In the following circumstances, moisturecan form on compact discs and inside theaudio system, preventing normal opera-tion.• When there is high humidity (for exam-

ple, when it is raining).• When the temperature suddenly rises,

such as right after the heater is turned onin cold weather.

In this case, wait until the moisture hashad time to dry out.

When the CD player is subjected to vio-lent vibrations, such as during off-roaddriving, the tracking may not work.

When storing compact discs, always storethem in their separate cases. Never placecompact discs in direct sunlight, or in anyplace where the temperature or humidityis high.

Never touch the flat surface of the discwhere there isn’t a label. This will damagethe disc surface and could affect the soundquality. When handling a compact disc,always hold it by the outer edge and thecenter hole.

To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, drycloth. Wipe directly from the center holetoward the outer edge. Do not wipe in acircle. Never use any chemicals such asbenzine, paint thinner, a disc spraycleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.

Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pen-cil, etc. to write on the label surface of thedisc.

Do not put additional labels or stickers oncompact discs. Also, do not use any com-pact disc on which a label or sticker hasstarted to peel off or any compact disc thathas stickiness or other contamination leftby a peeled-off label or sticker. If you usesuch a compact disc, the CD player maystop working properly and you may not beable to eject the compact disc.

N00751900066

You may have trouble playing back someCD-R/RW discs recorded on CD record-ers (CD-R/RW drives), either due to theirrecording characteristics or dirt, finger-prints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.

CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to hightemperatures and high humidity than ordi-nary music CDs and can therefore bedamaged and rendered unplayable if leftinside your vehicle for a long time.

Depending on the combination of thewriting software, the CD recorder (CD-R/RW drive), and the disc used to create aCD-R/RW, the disc might not play suc-cessfully.

This player cannot play the CD-R/RWdiscs if the session is not closed.

This player cannot play CD-R/RW discswhich contain data other than CD-DA orMP3 data (Video CD, etc.).

Be sure to observe the handling instruc-tions for the CD-R/RW disc.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWs


Antenna


7N00734201524

Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.

Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base(B) until it is securely retained.

N00733901537

Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM andFM stations.The quality of your reception is affected bydistance, obstacles, and signal interference.

FM signals do not follow the earth surfacenor are they reflected by the upper atmo-sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannotbe received over long distances. AM signalsfollow the earth’s surface and are reflected bythe upper atmosphere. For this reason, AMbroadcasts can be received over longer dis-tances.

Because of the limited range of FM signalsand the way FM waves transmit, you mayexperience weak or fading FM reception.When the broadcast is blocked by mountainsor similar obstructions, reception can be dis-turbed.

WARNINGOperating the CD player in a manner

other than specifically instructed hereinmay result in hazardous radiation expo-sure. Do not remove the cover and attemptto repair the CD player by yourself. Thereare no user serviceable parts inside. Incase of malfunction, contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-ity of your choice.

Antenna

To remove

To install

NOTEBe sure to remove the roof antenna in the

following cases:• When using an automatic car wash• When covering your vehicle with a car

cover• When driving into a structure that has a low

ceiling.

General information about your radio

Signal transmission

Weak reception (fading)

FM AM

25 to 40 mile radius(40 to 64 km)

100 mile radius(160 km)


General information about your radio


7

The reason why one can hear FM but not AMin parking garages, under bridges etc., is thatFM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflectedby solid objects such as buildings, etc.Because FM signals are easily reflected bybuildings, this can also cause reception dis-turbances.The direct signal from the broadcast stationreaches the antenna slightly before thereflected signal. This time difference maycause some reception disturbance or flutter.This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.

If one listens to a weak station and is in thevicinity of another strong station, both sta-tions might be received simultaneously.

Stereo reception requires a high qualitybroadcast signal. This means that types ofdisturbances mentioned previously becomemore marked and the reception range issomewhat diminished during stereo recep-tion.

FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially

those without an electronic noise suppressiondevice. The disturbance is even greater if thestation is weak or poorly tuned.FM reception is not as sensitive to electricaldisturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-tive to electrical disturbances such as powerlines, lightning and other types of similarelectrical phenomena.

Reflection Cross modulation

FM stereo reception

Causes of disturbances



8

For emergencies

If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6Towing ...........................................................................................8-12Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-14


If the vehicle breaks down

8-2 For emergencies

8

N00836300233

If your vehicle breaks down on the road,move to the shoulder and turn on the hazardwarning flashers. If there is no shoulder, orthe shoulder is not safe, drive in the right laneslowly with the hazard lights flashing untilyou come to a safe stopping place. Keep theflashers flashing.

If the engine stops, there will be no powerassist to the steering and brakes, making thesedifficult to use.

The brake booster will not work, so thebrakes will not grip well. The brake pedalwill be harder to press than usual.

Since there is no power steering assist, thesteering wheel will be hard to turn.

Get help from your passengers, bystanders,etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safearea.

N00836401837

If the engine cannot be started because thebattery is weak or dead, you can start it withthe battery from another vehicle using jumpercables.

1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might create anaccidental electrical contact.

2. Position the vehicles close enoughtogether so that the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehicles aren’ttouching each other.

3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in“P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”(Neutral).


5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is atthe proper level. (Refer to “Battery” onpage 9-10.)

If the vehicle breaks down

If the engine stops/fails

When the engine fails at the intersection

Jump-starting the engine

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of igniting flammable

gas that may be emitted from the battery,carefully read this section before jump-starting the vehicle.

Do not try to start your vehicle by pushingor towing. This can cause an accidentresulting in serious injury or death andcan damage the vehicle.

NOTEDo not use jumper cables if they have dam-

age or corrosion.

CAUTIONCheck the other vehicle. It must have a 12-

volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,both systems can be damaged.

NOTE Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical

loads. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries.

WARNING If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or

looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMPSTARTING!!The battery might split open or explode ifthe temperature is below the freezingpoint or if it is not filled to the properlevel.


Jump-starting the engine

For emergencies 8-3

8

6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dis-charged battery (A), and then connect theother end to the positive (+) terminalof the booster battery (B).

7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the

booster battery (B), and then connect theother end to the designated groundlocation of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery (A) at the point farthest from thebattery.

8. Start the engine in the vehicle providingthe boost. Let the engine idle a few min-utes, then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

9. After the engine is started, disconnect thecables in the reverse order from the wayyou connected them.

WARNINGMake sure that the jumper cables and

your clothing are clear of the cooling fansand drive belts. Entanglement with thefans or belts can cause serious personalinjury.

NOTEOpen the terminal cover before connecting

the jumper cable to the positive terminal ofthe battery.(Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and con-nection” on page 9-11.)

Use the proper cables suitable for the batterysize.Otherwise heat damage to the cables couldresult.

WARNINGBe sure to follow the proper order when

connecting the batteries, of:

Make sure that the connection is madeto the correct designated location (asshown in the illustration) properly. If theconnection is directly made to the negative(-) terminal of the battery, the flammablegases from inside the battery might catchfire and explode, causing personal injury.

When connecting the jumper cable, do notconnect the positive (+) cable to the nega-tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-tery explode.

NOTE

Charging the battery by using an external battery charger

WARNINGAlways remove the battery from your

vehicle when the battery is charged by anexternal battery charger.

Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames awayfrom the battery because the battery couldexplode.

Keep your work area well vented whencharging or using the battery in anenclosed space.

Remove all the caps before charging thebattery.

Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolytecomes in contact with your hands, eyes,clothes, or the painted surface of yourvehicle, thoroughly flush with water. Ifelectrolyte gets in your eyes, flush themimmediately and thoroughly with water,and get prompt medical attention.


Engine overheating

8-4 For emergencies

8

If you drive your vehicle with a low batterycharge after the engine has been started byusing jumper cables, the engine may misfire.This can cause the anti-lock braking systemwarning light to blink on and off. This is onlydue to the low battery voltage. It is not aproblem with the brake system. If this hap-pens, fully charge the battery and ensure thecharging system is operating properly.

N00836500365

If the high coolant temperature warning lightilluminates during the engine is running, theengine may be overheating. If this happens:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn onthe hazard warning flashers.

2. With the engine still running, carefullyraise the engine hood to vent the enginecompartment.

3. Check that the cooling fan is running. Ifthe fan is not turning, stop the engineimmediately and contact an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-ity of your choice for assistance.

4. If you see steam or spray coming fromunder the hood, turn off the engine.

5. If you do not see steam or spray comingfrom under the hood, leave the engine onuntil the high coolant temperature warn-ing light goes off. After the high coolanttemperature warning light has gone off,you can start driving again. If the highcoolant temperature warning light stayson, turn off the engine.

6. When you do not see any more steam orspray, open the hood. Look for obviousleaks, such as a split radiator hose. Becareful as components will be hot. Anyleak source must be repaired.

7. If there is no obvious leak source, checkthe coolant level in the engine coolantreserve tank. If there is none, or if it is toolow, slowly add coolant.

8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needscoolant, you will probably also need toadd coolant to the radiator. Do not loosenor remove the radiator cap until the enginehas cooled down.

9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,up to the bottom of the filler neck. Useplain water if you have to (and replace itwith the right coolant as soon as possible).

Always wear protective clothing and gog-gles when working near the battery.

Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-dren.

As your vehicle has anti-lock brakes

Engine overheating

WARNING

WARNINGTo avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,

jewelry and clothes away from the coolingfan. The cooling fan can start at any time.

WARNINGBefore raising the engine hood, check to

see if there is steam or spray coming fromunder the hood. Steam or spray comingfrom an overheated engine could seriouslyscald you.Do not open the hood until there is nosteam or spray.

WARNINGRemoving the radiator cap could scald

you with escaping hot water or steam.When checking the radiator level, coverthe cap with a cloth before trying toremove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-wise, without pressing down, to the firstnotch. The pressure in the system will thenbe let out. When the pressure is COM-PLETELY LET OUT, press down andkeep turning the cap counterclockwiseuntil it comes off.


Jack and tools

For emergencies 8-5

8

10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten itfully. Check the coolant temperaturewarning light. You can start driving againwhen the high coolant temperature warn-ing light does not come on.

11. Have the system inspected by your autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice.

N00836601419

The tools are stored beneath the floor boardof the cargo area. The jack is stored under thedriver’s seat.

Before removing or storing the jack, movethe driver’s seat fully forward to access thejack from the rear seat area.(Refer to “Front seat” on page 4-3.)

Jack and tools

Storage

1- Tools2- Jack

Tools

1- Tools bag2- Wheel nut wrench3- Jack bar4- Towing hook

Jack

CAUTIONNever access, remove or store the jack from

the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so coulddamage electrical wires under the driver’sseat.


How to change a tire

8-6 For emergencies

8

Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove thejack from the holder (A).

Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn theshaft end of the jack in the direction (2) byhand until the jack is firmly secured.

N00836901890

Before changing a tire, first stop your vehiclein a safe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stableground.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-

axle, stop the engine and move the gear-shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position.

On vehicles equipped with continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT), move theselector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,and stop the engine.

4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up awarning triangle, flashing signal light,etc., at an adequate distance from thevehicle, and have all your passengers exitthe vehicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling whenit is raised on the jack, place chocks orblocks (A) at the tire that is diagonallyopposite from the tire (B) you are chang-ing.

To remove

To store

WARNINGAfter storing the jack in place, make sure

the jack is securely fixed in the holder.If the jack is not fixed securely, it maymove and hit an occupant in an accidentresulting in serious injury or death. Alsothe jack may move forward during driv-ing and could interfere with driver’s pedaloperation causing an accident.


WARNINGThe jack should not be used for any pur-

pose other than to change a tire.Never get under the vehicle or put any

portion of your body under the vehiclewhile it is supported by the jack.

WARNINGBe sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. Ifthe vehicle moves while jacked up, thejack could slip out of position, leading toan accident.



For emergencies 8-7

8

6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrenchready.(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)

N00849600344

The compact spare tire is stowed beneath thefloor board of the cargo area. It is designed tosave space in the cargo area. Its lighter weightmakes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.

N00849701368

1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove

the installation clamp (A) by turning itcounterclockwise.

NOTE The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommendedthat you purchase chocks or blocks and keepthem in the vehicle for use if needed.

If chocks or blocks are not available, usestones or any other objects that are largeenough to hold the wheel in position.

Spare tire information

Compact spare tire

WARNINGTires, including spare tire, degrade over

time with age even when they are notbeing used. It is recommended that tiresover 6 years generally be replaced even ifdamage is not obvious.

CAUTIONWhile the compact spare tire is stowed, the

inflation pressure should be checked at leastonce a month to assure that it remains at therecommended inflation pressure. See the tireand loading information placard attached tothe driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load-ing information placard” on page 11-3.

Driving with an improperly inflated tire cancause an accident. If you have no choice butto drive with an under-inflated tire, keepyour speed down and avoid sudden steeringor braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to thecorrect pressure as soon as possible. Refer to“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

The compact spare tire should be used onlytemporarily. While the compact spare tire isbeing used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem will not function properly. Have the tirereplaced or repaired at an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice as soon as possible.

Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-ing with the compact spare tire.

Avoid sudden starting and braking whendriving with the compact spare tire.

Do not drive through automatic car washesand over obstacles that could possibly dam-age the underside of your vehicle. Becausethe compact spare tire is smaller than theoriginal tire, there is less clearance betweenthe ground and your vehicle.

Because the compact spare tire is designedonly for your vehicle, do not use it on anyother vehicle.

Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on thecompact spare wheel. Otherwise, you coulddamage these parts or other parts on yourvehicle.

Do not use tire chains with your compactspare tire. Using a chain could cause damageto your vehicle and loss of the chains.

To remove compact spare tire

CAUTION



8-8 For emergencies

8

N00849800447

1. On vehicles with wheel covers, firstremove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen thewheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Donot remove the wheel nuts yet.

2. Place the jack under one of the jackingpoints (A) shown in the illustration. Usethe jacking point closest to the tire youwish to change.

3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flangeportion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the topof the jack.

4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nutwrench (E). Then put the end of the barinto the shaft’s jack end, as shown in theillustration.Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench untilthe tire is raised slightly off the groundsurface.

NOTE The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot

be stored beneath the floor board. Store theflat tire in the cargo area.

To change a tire

WARNING Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,it could dent your vehicle or the jackmight fall over and cause personal injury.

Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-face.Otherwise, the jack might slip and causepersonal injury. Always use the jack on aflat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,make sure there are no sand or pebblesunder the jack base.

NOTE Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body

near the jack. This makes it safer if the jackslips out of position.



For emergencies 8-9

8

5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nutwrench, then take the wheel off.

6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-tion holes (H) in the wheel, and thenmount the spare tire. 7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered

ends facing inward, then tighten by handuntil the wheel is no longer loose.

WARNING Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the

tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-ous to raise the vehicle any higher.

Do not get under your vehicle while usingthe jack.

Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave itsitting on the jack for a long time. Bothare very dangerous.

Do not use a jack except the one that camewith your vehicle.

The jack should not be used for any pur-pose other than to change a tire.

No one should be in your vehicle whenusing the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while yourvehicle is on the jack.

Do not turn the raised wheel. The tiresthat are still on the ground could turn andmake your vehicle fall off the jack.

CAUTIONHandle the wheel carefully when changing

the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-face.

WARNINGMount the spare wheel with the valve stem

(I) facing outward. If you cannot see thevalve stem (I), you have installed thewheel backwards.Operating the vehicle with the spare wheelinstalled backwards can cause vehicledamage and result in an accident.

CAUTIONNever apply oil to either the wheel bolts or

the nuts or they will tighten too much.

Steel wheel

Aluminum wheel



8-10 For emergencies

8

8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground, by rotating the wheelnut wrench counterclockwise.

9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in theillustration until each nut has been tight-ened to the torque listed here.65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)

10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-

ommended tire pressure for your vehicleis listed on the tire and loading informa-tion placard attached to the driver’s doorsill as shown in the illustration. Refer to“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

N00850000175

Store the flat tire in the cargo area.Reverse the removing procedure when stor-ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nutwrench.Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.

CAUTIONNever use your foot or a pipe extension to

apply added force to the wheel nut wrenchwhen tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,you can over-tighten the wheel nuts anddamage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.

CAUTIONDriving with an improperly inflated tire can

cause an accident. If you have no choice butto drive with an under-inflated tire, keepyour speed down and avoid sudden steeringor braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to thecorrect pressure as soon as possible. Refer to“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.

After changing the tire and driving the vehi-cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten thewheel nuts to make sure that they have notcome loose.

If the steering wheel vibrates when drivingafter changing the tire, have the tire checkedfor balance at an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice.

Do not mix one type of tire with another oruse a different size from the one listed. Thiswould cause early wear and poor handling.

To store the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut wrench



For emergencies 8-11

8

N00849401248

Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert itinto the notch provided in the wheel cover,and pry the cover away from the wheel.Using the same procedure at the other wheelcover notches, work the wheel cover awayfrom the wheel to remove it completely.

1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheelcover notch (D).

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel coverinto the wheel.

3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheelcover and hold them in place with bothknees.

Wheel cover (if so equipped)

To remove

NOTE The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-

ful when prying it off.

CAUTION Trying to remove the wheel cover with only

your bare hands can seriously injure yourfingers.

To install

CAUTIONBefore installing the wheel cover to the

wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on theback of the wheel cover correctly engage thering (B) to prevent the wheel cover fromcoming off. Do not install a wheel cover thathas broken tabs.

NOTE Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E)

provided on the reverse side to show the airvalve location.Before installing the wheel cover to thewheel, make sure that the opening with thesymbol mark is correctly aligned with the airvalve.


Towing


8

4. Gently tap around the circumference ofthe wheel cover at the top (H), then pushthe wheel cover into place.

N00837001973

If towing is necessary, we recommend you tohave it done by a commercial tow truck ser-vice.When towing is required, transport the vehi-cle using a tow truck.Incorect towing equipment could damageyour vehicle.

There may be local regulations concerningtowing in your area.Obey the regulations of the area where youare driving your vehicle.Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed

CAUTIONDo not attempt to be towed by another vehi-

cle with a rope.

NOTEDo not use the tie-down hooks for towing.

These hooks are provided only for the pur-pose of transporting the vehicle itself.

Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.

Towing the vehicle by a tow truck

CAUTION This vehicle must not be towed by a tow

truck using sling lift type equipment (TypeA) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-age the bumper and front end.

Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style.


Operation under adverse driving conditions

For emergencies 8-13

8

Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)position.Secure the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a rope or tie-down strap.

Release the parking brake.Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)position (manual transaxle) or the selectorlever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position(CVT).

N00837200750

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,or mud, it can often be moved by a rockingmotion. Rock your vehicle back and forth tofree it.

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle cancause overheating and transaxle failure. Letthe engine idle for a few minutes to cool thetransaxle before trying again.If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truckservice.

Do not tow continuously variable transmis-sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheelson the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If thevehicle is towed like this, the continuouslyvariable transmission (CVT) fluid may notreach all parts of the transmission, thus dam-aging it.If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or Eequipment.

If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning ordamaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) asillustrated.

If the vehicle is towed with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position or the operationmode in ON and only the front wheels oronly the rear wheels raised off the ground(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident.When towing the vehicle with the rearwheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” position or put the operation mode inACC. When towing the vehicle with thefront wheels raised, keep the ignition switchor the operation mode as follows.[Except for vehicles equipped with theF.A.S.T.-key] The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”position.[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.

CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type B - M/T vehicles only)

Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type C)

Operation under adverse driving conditions

If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow

WARNINGWhen trying to rock your vehicle out of a

stuck position, make sure that there are nopeople nearby. The rocking motion canmake your vehicle suddenly lurch forwardor backward, and injure any bystanders.

On wet roads

CAUTIONAvoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper

than it looks, and you could be seriously hurtby driving into flood water.

When driving in rain, on water-coveredroads, or through a car wash, water could getinto the brake discs and make them fail tem-porarily. In such cases, lightly press thebrake pedal to see if they are working prop-erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightlyseveral times while driving to dry the brakepads or linings, then check them again.


Fuel Pump Shut-off System


8When driving on a road covered with

snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chainscannot be used on your vehicle. Theremay be state or local regulations aboutusing snow tires. Always check the regu-lations in your local area before usingthem. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.

Drive slowly. Do not make sudden startsor stops, sharp turns, or slam on thebrakes.

Allow extra distance between your vehi-cle and the vehicle in front of you, andavoid sudden braking.

If a skid occurs when the acceleratorpedal is depressed, take your foot off thepedal. Steer gently in the direction of theskid.

Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lockbraking system (ABS). Hold the brakepedal down firmly and keep it depressed.Do not pump the brake pedal which willresult in reduced braking performance.

After parking on snowy or icy roads, itmay be difficult to move your vehicle dueto the brake being frozen. Depress theaccelerator pedal little by little to movethe vehicle when safe to do so.

Drive as slow as possible when driving onbumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.

N00860600031

In the event of a collision causing frontal air-bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-tem will activate to stop fuel supply to theengine.

When driving in rain, a layer of water mayform between the tires and the road surface(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ gripon the road, making it difficult to steer orbrake properly. When driving on a wet road:• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.• Do not drive on worn tires.• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-

tion pressures.

On snowy or icy roads

CAUTION

CAUTIONDo not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.

The vehicle could start moving when itbreaks free from the ice, possibly resulting inan accident.

On a bumpy or rutted road

CAUTIONDriving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-

holes can damage the tires and wheels.Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-age.

The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler andother parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:

• driven over a step (for example, at theentrance or exit of a parking lot);

• parked too closely against a curb or parkingblock, or by the side of a road with curb-stones;

• driven on a steep slope.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System

WARNINGBefore attempting to restart the engine

after a collision, always inspect the groundunder the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuelleak is found or a fuel odor is detected, donot restart the engine.

Mitsubishi Motors recommends that yourvehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-subishi Motors dealer after any collision.

CAUTION


9

Vehicle care and maintenance

Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid

(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10Battery ............................................................................................9-10Tires ...............................................................................................9-12Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-18Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-18Parking brake .................................................................................9-19Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-19General maintenance .....................................................................9-20For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22Fusible links ...................................................................................9-22Fuses ..............................................................................................9-22Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-26Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-33Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-34Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-35


Service precautions

9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

9

N00937301472

Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-serve its value and appearance as long as pos-sible.

You can do some of the maintenance workyourself, and the rest should only be per-formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice.If you discover a malfunction or other prob-lem, have it corrected by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facilityof your choice.This section describes the maintenanceinspections that you can do yourself, if you sodesire. Follow the instructions and precau-tions for each procedure.

Have you purchased the Mitsubishi MotorsDiamond Care Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties.See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealerfor details.

Only use the designated positions shown inthe illustration.

Service precautions

WARNINGWhen checking or servicing the inside of

the engine compartment, be sure theengine is stopped and has had a chance tocool down.

If you need to work in the engine compart-ment with the engine running, be espe-cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,or other moving parts.

After performing the maintenance work,make sure that no tools or cloths are leftbehind in the engine compartment.If they are left behind, a fire or damage tothe vehicle may occur.

The fan can turn on automatically even ifthe engine is not running. Turn the igni-tion switch to the “OFF” position or putthe operation mode in OFF to be safewhile you work in the engine compart-ment.

Do not smoke or allow open flames aroundfuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-ble.

Be extremely careful when workingaround the battery. It contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

Do not get under your vehicle while it is ona jack.Always use properly rated automotivejack stands.

Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-als in the wrong way can injure you. Askan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealeror a repair facility of your choice if youhave questions.

WARNING

If your vehicle is raised with a garage jack


Catalytic converter

Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

9

N00937400450

The catalytic converter requires you to useunleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline willdestroy the emission-control effectiveness ofthe converter.

Normally, the catalytic converter does notrequire maintenance. However, it is importantto keep the engine properly tuned for the con-verter to continue to work properly.

To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-verter damage:

Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY ofthe type of recommended in the “Fuelselection”.

Do not drive with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of gas could damagethe catalytic converter.

Do not try to start the engine by pushingor towing the vehicle. If the battery isweak or run down, use jumper cables toproperly start the engine.

Do not idle the engine with any spark plugwires disconnected or removed, such aswhen performing diagnostic tests.

Do not idle the engine for a long time if itis idling roughly or otherwise obviouslymalfunctioning.

To prevent the catalytic converter frombeing damaged from unburned gas, do notrace the engine when stopping the engine.

Stop driving the vehicle if you think theperformance is noticeably low, or theengine has a malfunction such as with theignition, etc. If you are not able to stopdriving immediately, slow down and drivefor only a short time. Have your vehiclechecked at an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice as soon as possible.

*- Front of the vehicle

WARNING Set a garage jack only at the position

shown here. If the garage jack is set awrong position, it could damage yourvehicle and/or your vehicle might fallfrom the jack causing injury or death.

Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-face.Otherwise, the jack might slip and causepersonal injury. Always use the jack on aflat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,make sure there are no sand or pebblesunder the jack base.

Never use the rear suspensions as a jack-ing point.

Catalytic converter

CAUTIONDamage to the catalytic converter can result

if your vehicle is not kept in proper operatingcondition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,have it serviced promptly. Running yourvehicle when it is overheated may result indamage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNINGDo not park or run your vehicle in areas

where combustible materials such as drygrass or leaves can come in contact with ahot exhaust, since a fire could occur.

Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-lytic converter.


Engine hood


9

In unusual situations involving majorengine problems, a burning odor mayindicate severe and abnormal catalyticconverter overheating. If this occurs, stopin a safe place, shut the engine off and letthe vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,immediately take your vehicle to a dealeror a repair facility of your choice for ser-vice.

N00937501634

Use the engine hood release lever (locatedunder the instrument panel near the driver’sdoor) to unlock the engine hood.

Pull the lever toward you to release theengine hood latch.

Release the lever and lift the engine hood.

Support the engine hood with the hood prop.Insert the hood prop securely in the openingunder the hood marked with an arrow.

Engine hood

To open

WARNINGNever use the release lever to unlatch the

engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.Do not drive your vehicle unless the

engine hood is locked.

NOTE To prevent damage to the engine hood and

wipers, make sure the wipers are at restingposition when you open the engine hood.

CAUTIONAlways insert the support prop into the hole

specially made for it. Propping the enginehood at any other place could cause the propto slip out and lead to an accident.

The hood prop can fall out if the hood islifted by a strong wind.


View of the engine compartment


9

Unlatch the prop from the engine hood andput it back in its retainer.

Slowly lower the engine hood approximately8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its ownweight.

N00937600713

N00937702011

It is normal for an engine to use oil. You mayneed to add oil between the recommended oilchange intervals. Before starting the engine,check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.

To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.Slowly pull the dipstick straight out andcheck the oil level by checking the upper sur-face of the dipstick. The oil level must not goabove the line on the dipstick.

If the level does not reach the line whichshows the minimum amount of oil required,remove the oil filler cap on the engine valvecover, and fill to within the “Good” range.

To close

CAUTIONBe careful not to trap your hands or fingers

when closing the engine hood.Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed

before driving.If you drive without the engine hood com-pletely closed, it could open up while driv-ing.

NOTE If this does not close the engine hood prop-

erly, drop it again from a slightly higherposition.

Do not push down strongly on the enginehood. Depending on how strongly or whereyou push down, you could create a dent inthe vehicle body.

View of the engine compart-ment

1- Engine oil level dipstick2- Air cleaner filter3- Battery4- Brake fluid5- Windshield and rear window washer

fluid reservoir6- Engine oil filler cap7- Radiator cap

8- Engine coolant reserve tank

Engine oil and oil filter

To check and refill engine oil

NOTE If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe

off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait amoment and then recheck the oil level bychecking the upper surface of the dipstick.


Engine oil and oil filter


9Mitsubishi Motors recommends using onlyengine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-bol on the front of the container.

If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-fication symbol, use an API classification SNor higher oil with the following label.

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-tainer and tells you two important thingsabout the oil.

Use engine oil with the proper thickness forthe outdoor temperatures where you will bedriving.

CAUTIONOverfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of

oil pressure, which could damage the engine.

WARNINGUsed engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-

age your skin. Prolonged and repeatedcontact may cause serious skin disorders,including dermatitis and cancer. Do not letused oil touch your skin and wash thor-oughly after working with it.

Keep used oil out of the reach of children.

NOTE Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced

by payload, engine speed, etc.

Good The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the

vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (forexample, repeated operation on rough roads,in mountainous regions, on roads with manyuphill and downhill gradients, or over shortdistances). Consequently, the oil will requireearlier replacement in accordance with theschedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-TENANCE MANUAL”.

Engine oil identification mark

NOTE

ILSAC certification symbol

1- The upper part indicates the quality ofthe oil.

2- The center part indicates the SAE gradeof the oil viscosity.

Recommended engine oil vis-cosity

API service symbol


Engine coolant


9

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 SyntheticEngine Oil is recommended for optimum fueleconomy and cold weather starting.If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20grade oils displaying the ILSAC certificationcan be used.However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at thenext oil change to maintain optimum fueleconomy and cold weather starting.

The oil filter should be replaced at the time ormileage specified in the “WARRANTY ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL”.Only use high quality replacement filters onthis vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters

require that the filter can withstand a pressureof 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishioil filter is the best replacement filter.Follow the installation instructions printed onthe filter.

N00937800597

The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets youquickly see when you need to add coolant.When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-ant in the reserve tank should be between theFULL and LOW marks. The radiator usuallystays full so there is no reason to remove theradiator cap (B) except when you check thecoolant freeze point or replace the antifreezecoolant.

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant providesexcellent protection against corrosion andrust formation on all metals, including alumi-num, and prevents clogs in some parts of theengine.If you need to add coolant often, or if thelevel in the reserve tank does not drop whenthe engine cools, the cooling system shouldbe pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealeror a repair facility of your choice for testing.

To replace the oil filter

Engine coolant

To check the coolant level

FULL

LOW

To add coolant

Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super LongLife Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.*: similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with longlife hybrid organic acid technology

CAUTIONDo not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or

any engine coolants that contain them. Usingthe wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminumparts.


Air cleaner filter


9

The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-vent losing coolant, which may result inengine damage. Only use a GenuineMitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approvedequivalent.

Do not overfill the reserve tank.Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap

that stays sealed and lets the coolant flowfrom the reserve tank back to the radiatorwhen the engine cools down. If you needto change the cap, use the exact samekind.

Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-ator with the proper gauge, and only whenit is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-tents of the reserve tank must be protectedagainst freezing.

Keep the front of the radiator and con-denser clean.

If the engine coolant temperature does notrise after the engine is warmed-up, takeyour vehicle to an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice to have the thermostat checked,and replaced if necessary.

N00937900413

The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dustyfrom use and not filter properly. Replace itwith a new filter using the schedule in the“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCEMANUAL”.

1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of thecover and take out the air cleaner filter.

2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put thecover back on in its original position.

The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-fers depending on the expected ambient tem-perature.Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentrationof anti-freezeBelow -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentrationof anti-freezeYou can check the concentration level with agauge from an automotive supply store, oryour authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer orservice station can check it for you.

Do not use water to adjust the concentrationof coolant.

Do not top off the tank with plain water only.Water by itself boils at a lower temperatureand does not stop rust or freezing. If thewater freezes, it will damage your coolingsystem. Do not use tapwater. It can causecorrosion and rust.

Radiator cap

CAUTION WARNINGWait for the engine to cool down before

opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hotsteam or boiling coolant could spray upfrom the radiator and scald you.

Points to remember

Air cleaner filter

NOTEGenuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-

mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.Make sure that the connector is properly

reconnected.After replacing the air cleaner filter, make

sure that the hinges at the bottom of coverare firmly set.


Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)


9

N00938201188

Whenever the manual transaxle oil level ischecked, add oil to maintain the proper level,if necessary.Refill or change with the oil according to thetable below.

N00938101129

The continuously variable transmission(CVT) should be maintained and serviced byan authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice to obtain thebest performance and longest life. It is impor-tant that the transmission fluid is kept at thecorrect level.

Use only “Mitsubishi Motors GenuineCVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-mum transmission performance.

Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-mission.

N00938601368

The windshield and rear window washer fluidreservoir is in the engine compartment.Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-essary.Open the reservoir cap and check the level ofwasher fluid.Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm)below from the upper surface of the reservoir.

When freezing weather is anticipated, flushout the water in the reservoir by operating thepump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operatethe system for a few seconds to flush out theresidual water.

CAUTION Take care not to scratch the engine air flow

sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

Oil type

Lubricant

Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW

MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API Classifica-

tion GL-4Viscosity range SAE 75W-80

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid (if so equipped)

Fluid type

CAUTIONUsing the improper transaxle fluid may dam-

age the transaxle.

Special additives

Washer fluid

Upper surface

Full


Brake fluid


9

N00938700274

The fluid level must be between the “MAX”and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

The fluid level falls slightly with wear of thebrake pads, but this does not indicate anyabnormality.

The fluid in the master cylinder should bechecked when doing other work under theengine hood. The brake system should also bechecked for leaks at the same time.If the fluid level falls noticeably in a shortlength of time, it indicates leaks from thebrake system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 orDOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightlysealed to keep dirt and water out.

N00939100943

The condition of the battery is very importantfor quick starting and to keep the vehicle’selectrical system working properly. Check thebattery regularly.

N00901500072

The electrolyte level must be between thelimits shown on the outside of the battery. Fillit with distilled water as needed. The inside ofthe battery is divided into several compart-ments. Take the cap off of each compartmentand fill to the mark.Do not fill above the top line because a spillduring driving could cause damage.

Brake fluid

To check the fluid level

MAX

MIN

Fluid type

CAUTIONDo not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,

mix with, or get into the brake fluid. Thiswill damage the seals.

Be careful when handling brake fluid. It candamage painted surfaces.

Use only the listed brake fluid. Differentbrands of brake fluid have different addi-tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.

Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keepthe brake fluid from evaporating.

Battery

Checking battery electrolyte level

WARNING If the battery goes flat, be sure to check

the battery electrolyte level before con-necting booster cables.

After checking the battery electrolytelevel, make sure the caps are fittedsecurely.


Battery


9

N00901600060

The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.This has to do with its chemical and physicalproperties and is why a very cold battery,especially one with a low charge, will have ahard time starting your vehicle.It is recommended that you have your batteryand charging system checked by an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice before the start of coldweather. If necessary, have it charged. Thiswill provide more reliable starting, and longerbattery life.

N00901701172

To disconnect the battery cable, stop theengine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminalfirst, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,before starting the vehicle.

If any of the caps has a loose fit, replacethe battery.

During cold weather

Disconnection and connection

WARNING NOTEOpen the terminal cover (A) before discon-

necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-nal of the battery.

Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect thebattery cable from the positive (+) terminal.

WARNINGNever disconnect the battery while the

engine is running, or you could damagethe vehicle’s electrical parts.

Never short-circuit the battery. This couldcause it to overheat and be damaged.

Type 1

Type 2

Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames awayfrom the battery because the battery couldexplode.

Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills onnearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-color them. And if it gets on your skin orin your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-ness. Please observe the following han-dling instructions:• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or

other nearby parts, wipe it off with a softcloth or chamois soaked in a solution ofwater and neutral detergent then imme-diately rinse the affected parts withplenty of water.

• If electrolyte gets on your hands orclothes, rinse thoroughly with water. Ifelectrolyte gets in your eyes, flush themwith water immediately and get immedi-ate medical attention.

Open doors and windows in any closedspace where you may be charging orworking with the battery.

Always wear protective clothing and gog-gles when working with the battery, orhave a skilled automobile technician do it.

If you are quick-charging your battery,first disconnect the battery cables.

In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sureto disconnect the negative (-) terminalfirst, and reconnect it last.

WARNING


Tires


9

N00939201635

It is important to familiarize yourself with thefollowing terms:

Cold tire pressure:• The measured pressure after the vehicle

has been parked for at least three hours,or

• The measured pressure when the vehicleis driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) afterhaving been parked for three hours.

Maximum pressure: the maximum per-missible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire.

Recommended inflation pressure: theinflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-mance.

Intended outboard sidewall:• The sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears manufac-turer, brand, and/or model name moldingthat is higher or deeper than the samemolding on the other sidewall of the tire,or

• The outward facing sidewall of an asym-metrical tire that has a particular sidethat must always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Passenger car tire: a tire intended for useon passenger cars, multipurpose passen-ger vehicles, and trucks that have a grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000pounds or less.

Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated byits manufacturer as primarily intended foruse on lightweight trucks or multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Tread: portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Tread rib: a tread section running circum-ferentially around a tire.

Tread separation: pulling away of thetread from the tire carcass.

Carcass: the tire structure, except treadand sidewall rubber which, when inflated,bears the load.

Battery posts, terminals and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds.Wash hands after handling.

NOTECheck each battery terminal for corrosion.

You can stop more corrosion by washingwith a solution of baking soda and water.Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning ortightening them.

Check to see that the battery is securelyinstalled and cannot be moved. Also checkeach terminal for tightness.

If you will not be driving your vehicle for along period of time, remove the battery andstore it in a place where the battery fluid willnot freeze. The battery only should be storedwith a full charge.

Before cleaning the battery, tighten all thefiller port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.

WARNING Tires

WARNINGDriving with tires that are worn, damaged

or improperly inflated is dangerous.These type tire conditions will adverselyaffect vehicle performance.These type tire conditions can also cause atread separation or blowout which mayresult in an accident causing seriousinjury or death.

Tires, including spare tire, degrade overtime with age even when they are notbeing used.It is recommended that tires over 6 yearsgenerally be replaced even if damage isnot obvious.


Tires


9

Sidewall: portion of a tire between thetread and bead.

Section width: the linear distance betweenthe exteriors of the sidewalls of aninflated tire, excluding elevations due tolabeling, decoration, or protective bands.

Bead: the part of the tire that is made ofsteel wires, wrapped or reinforced by plycords and that is shaped to fit the rim.

Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallelcords.

Cord: the strands forming the plies in thetire.

Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tireand tube assembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Rim diameter: nominal diameter of thebead seat.

Groove: the space between two adjacenttread ribs.

EXAMPLE: P215/65R15

Tire Markings

1- Size Designation2- Service Description3- Maximum Load4- Maximum Pressure5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code

(TIN)6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature

Grades

Size Designation

P Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards

215 Section width in millimeters (mm)

65Aspect ratio in percent (%)Ratio of section height to section width of tire.

R

Construction code • “R” means radial construction. • “D” means diagonal or bias con-struction.

15 Rim diameter in inches (in)

NOTE European/Japanese metric tire sizing is based

on European/Japanese design standards.Tires designed to these standards have thetire size molded into the sidewall beginningwith the section width. The letter “P” isabsent from this tire size designation.Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is basedon U.S.A. design standards. The size desig-nation for LT-metric tires is the same as forP-metric tires except for the letters “LT” thatare molded into the sidewall preceding thesize designation.Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are high pressure com-pact spares designed for temporary emer-gency use only. Tires designed to thisstandard have the letter “T” molded into thesidewall preceding the size designation.Example: T145/80D18 103M.


Tires


9

EXAMPLE: 95H

Maximum load indicates the maximum loadthis tire is designed to carry.

Maximum Pressure indicates the maximumpermissible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire.

The TIN may be found on one or both sidesof the tire but the date code may only be onone side. Look for the TIN on the outboardside of tires as mounted on the vehicle. If theTIN is not found on the outboard side thenyou will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half(11/2) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and climate.

Service Description

95Load indexA numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.

H

Speed symbolA symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating con-ditions.The maximum speed correspond-ing to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pres-sure, vehicle loading, road condi-tions and posted speed limits)

Maximum Load

WARNINGOverloading of your tire is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affectvehicle handling, and increase your stop-ping distance. Use tires of the recom-mended load capacity for your vehicle.Never overload them.

Maximum Pressure

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT

Department of TransportationThis symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.

MA Code representing the tire manu-facturing location. (2 digits)

L9ABCD

Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)

15Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

04Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

Treadwear, Traction and Temper-ature Grades

Treadwear


Tires


9

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), Band C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performance which allpassenger car tires must meet under the Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

N00939301984

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential forthe safe and satisfactory operation of your

vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will causeproblems in three major areas:

SafetyToo little pressure increases flexing in thetire and can cause tire failure. Too muchpressure can cause a tire to lose its abilityto cushion shock. Objects on the road andpotholes could then cause tire damage thatmay result in tire failure.

EconomyThe wrong tire pressure can cause unevenwear patterns in the tire tread. Theseabnormal wear patterns will reduce thetread life, and the tire will have to bereplaced sooner.Too little pressure also makes it harder forthe tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.

Ride comfort and vehicle stabilityThe superior riding experience built intoyour vehicle partly depends on the correcttire pressure. Too much pressure gives anuncomfortable and jarring ride. Too littlepressure feels as if your vehicle is slow torespond.Unequal tire pressures can make steeringyour vehicle uneven and unpredictable.

The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor-mal driving conditions is listed on the placardattached to the driver’s door sill.(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac-ard” on page 11-3.)

The recommended inflation pressures undernormal driving conditions should be used forthe tires listed below.

Tire pressures should be checked, andadjusted if necessary, at least once a month.Pressures should be checked more oftenwhenever weather temperatures changeseverely, because tire pressures change withoutdoor temperatures. The pressures listedare always “cold inflation pressure”.Cold inflation pressure is measured after thevehicle has been parked for at least threehours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)after having been parked for three hours.Cold inflation pressure must not go above themaximum values molded into the tire side-wall. After driving several miles, your tireinflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the

Traction

Temperature

Tire inflation pressures

Item Tire size Front Rear

Normal tire

165/65R14240 kPa,

35 psi

240 kPa,

35 psi

175/55R15220 kPa,

32 psi

220 kPa,

32 psiCompact

spare wheel T115/70D14 420 kPa, 60 psi


Tires


9

specified cold pressure, or your tires will betoo low.Check your tires each time you refuel. If onetire looks lower than the others, check thepressure for all of them.You should also take the following safety pre-cautions:

Keep your tires inflated to the recom-mended pressures. (See the tire and load-ing information placard attached to thedriver’s door sill.)

Stay within the recommended load limits.Make sure that the weight of any load in

your vehicle is evenly distributed.Drive at safe speeds.After filling your tires to the correct pres-

sure, check them for damage and airleaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on thevalve stems.

N00939601466

N00939701193

The following maintenance steps are recom-mended:

Check tire pressures regularly.Have regular maintenance done on the

wheel balance and front and rear suspen-sion alignment.

Rotate your tires regularly as described inthe “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17.

N00939801237

Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-nal equipment tires on your vehicle to helpyou know when your tires should be replaced.Many states have laws requiring that youreplace your tires at this point.These indicators are molded into the bottomof the tread grooves and will appear when thetire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6mm).When the bands appear next to one another intwo or more places, replace your tires.

Replacing tires and wheels

CAUTIONAvoid using different size tires from the one

listed and the combined use of differenttypes of tires, as this can affect drivingsafety.Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-6.

If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-sure monitoring system, only MitsubishiMotors Authorized wheels should be used.Use of another type of wheel risks air leaksand sensor damage, as it will not be possibleto install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tire maintenance

CAUTION Tread wear indicator

1- Location of the tread wear indicator2- Tread wear indicator

NOTE Tire wear indicators can have different marks

and locations depending on the tire manufac-turer.


Tires


9

N00939901557

To even out the wear on your tires and makethem last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-tion recommends that you rotate your tires atthe mileage listed in the “WARRANTY ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL”.However, the timing for tire rotation mayvary according to your vehicle condition,road surface conditions, and your own per-sonal driving habits. Any time you noticeunusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-sible.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormalwear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,wheels that are out-of-balance, or severebraking.Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice tofind out the reason for uneven tread wear.

The first tire rotation is the most importantone. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

Tire rotation

CAUTIONA compact spare tire can be installed tempo-

rarily in place of a tire that has been removedduring the tire rotation. However, it must notbe included in the regular tire rotationsequence.

Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation direction

Front

Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc-tion

Front

CAUTION If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the

correct direction of rotation, swap the frontand rear tires on the left-hand side of thevehicle and the front and rear tires on theright-hand side of the vehicle separately.Keep each tire on its original side of thevehicle. When installing the tires, make surethe arrows point in the direction in which thewheels will turn when the vehicle moves for-ward. Any tire whose arrow points in thewrong direction will not perform to its fullpotential.

CAUTIONAvoid the combined use of different types of

tires. Using different types of tires can affectvehicle performance and safety.

Front


Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)


9

N00940001431

In some areas of the country, snow tires arerequired for winter driving. If snow tires arerequired in your area, you must choose snowtires of the same size and type as the originaltires provided with your vehicle. Snow tiresshould also be installed on all four wheels.Otherwise your safety and vehicle handlingcan be reduced.Even where laws may permit it, snow tiresshould not be operated at sustained speedsover 75 mph (120 km/h).

N00940100116

N00940200090

To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turnoff the engine and press the pedal until youfeel resistance.

Clutch pedal free play:.4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, takeyour vehicle to an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice for adjustment.

N00940300336

To check the brake pedal free play (A), turnoff the engine and press the brake pedal sev-eral times with your foot. Then press thepedal down with your fingers until you firstfeel resistance.

Brake pedal free play:.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)

If the free play is not within these limits, takeyour vehicle to an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice for adjustment.

Snow tires

CAUTION If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-

sure monitoring system, only MitsubishiMotors Authorized wheels should be used.Use of another type of wheel risks air leaksand sensor damage, as it will not be possibleto install the tire pressure sensor properly.

Tire chains

CAUTION Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.

The clearance between the chains and thebody is not sufficient to allow proper clear-ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-aged.

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

Brake pedal free play


Parking brake


9

N00940400252

Check the parking brake lever travel occa-sionally. To check this, pull the lever upslowly and count the number of clicks of theratchet.

Parking brake lever stroke:7 to 9 notches (clicks)(Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 200 N)

Also check to see if the lever stays gripped bythe ratchet after pulling.

N00940700138

Check the wiper blades occasionally. Cleanthem regularly to remove deposits of salt androad film. Use a sponge or cloth and a milddetergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean theblades and glass areas.Replace the blades if they continue to streakor smear.

If the blades are frozen to the windshield orrear window, do not operate the wipers untilthe ice has melted and the blades are freed,otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.

N00940800328

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-control system that meets all the requirementsof the U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyand Environment Canada. The emission-con-trol system is made of:

a positive crankcase ventilation system an evaporative emission-control system an exhaust emission-control system

To be sure the emission-control system worksproperly, have your vehicle inspected andmaintained by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice. This should be done at the time ormileage specified in the “WARRANTY ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL”.These, and all the other “general” mainte-nance services listed in this manual, need tobe performed to keep your vehicle runningproperly and reliably.You should also have an inspection and ser-vice any time you suspect a malfunction.

Parking brake

Parking brake lever stroke

WARNINGContinued operation of the vehicle with

the parking brake lever out of adjustmentmay result in the vehicle moving whenunattended.

Wiper blades

NOTEDo not run the wipers on dry glass for a long

time. This wears out the rubber and canscratch the glass.

During cold weather

Emission-control system maintenance


General maintenance


9N00940900228

Spark plugs must fire properly for goodengine performance and emission-control.Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.Change them at the mileage listed in the“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCEMANUAL”.

N00941000040

Check the hose surfaces for any heat andmechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-cial attention to the hoses closest to high heatsources such as the exhaust manifold. Checkall the hose connections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they are secure andthat there are no leaks. If you see any wear ordamage, replace the hoses immediately.

N00950100050

Have the valve clearance checked at anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at themileage specified in the “WARRANTY ANDMAINTENANCE MANUAL”.If the engine sounds abnormally loud, haveadjustments made by an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer.

N00941300173

Check these regularly for damage or leaks inthe fuel lines and connections. Check the fueltank filler cap for damage or looseness. Payspecial attention to the fuel lines closest to

high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-fold.

N00941400187

If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-luting the air.Have the system checked at an authorizedMitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-NANCE MANUAL”.

N00941500292

The next pages list the maintenance servicerecommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-ration. In addition to the general maintenancethat needs to be performed at the times listed,

NOTE To meet government regulations and pro-

mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equippedwith an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).The engine electronic control module thatcontrols OBD functions stores various data(especially about the exhaust emissions).This data will be erased if the battery cable isdisconnected, which could make a rapiddiagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect thebattery cable when the engine malfunctionindicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or“Check engine light”) is ON.

Spark plugs

NOTEUse the spark plugs listed under “Engine

specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that areexactly the same. Other plugs could causeengine damage, performance problems orradio noise.

Fuel hoses

Intake valve clearance

Fuel system (tank, pipe line and connection, and fuel tank filler cap)

WARNING If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,

do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-ing from the ignition), flame or smokingmaterial could cause an explosion or fire.Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choicefor assistance.

Evaporative emission control system (except evaporative emission canister)

General maintenance


General maintenance


9

there are other parts which do not usuallyneed regular maintenance.But, if any of these parts stops working prop-erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.Have these items checked if you notice aproblem with them.

If you have any questions, see your autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.

N00941600059

Good brakes are essential for safe driving.Check the brake pads for wear. For goodbraking performance, replace the brake padswith the same type pads as the originals.

N00941700076

Brake hoses and tubing should be checkedfor:

Severe surface cracking, scuffing or wornspots. If the fabric casing of the hose isshowing through any cracks or worn spotsin the rubber hose cover, the hose shouldbe replaced. The brakes can fail if thehose wears through.

Improper installation may cause twisting,or wheel, tire or chassis interference.

N00941800077

Check the following parts for damage andgrease leaks:

Ball joint boots of the front suspensionand steering linkage

Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft

N00942200111

The best way to keep carbon monoxide gasfrom entering inside your vehicle is to havethe engine exhaust system properly serviced.Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-plete exhaust system and nearby body areasfor broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo-sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow-ing:

A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-tem

The smell of exhaust fumes inside thevehicle

The underside or rear of the vehicle isdamaged

Also check the exhaust system each time thevehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,or required service. Any open seams or looseconnections could let dangerous exhaustfumes seep into the luggage and passengercompartments.

Check for holes or exhaust gas leakscaused by corrosion or damage.

Check the joints and connections forlooseness or exhaust gas leaks.

Check the rubber hangers and brackets fordamage.

N00942500127

The hood lock release mechanism and hoodsafety catch should be checked, cleaned, andoiled when needed for easy movement and toprevent rust and wear. Use MultipurposeGrease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all slidingparts of the hood latch and release lever.Work the grease into the hood lock mecha-

Disc brake pads

Brake hoses

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots

Exhaust system

WARNINGCarbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s

exhaust is poisonous. Breathing thesefumes can cause unconsciousness or death.

Check for any of the following conditions:

Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch


For cold and snowy weather


9

nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-ered.Also, put a light coat of the same grease onthe safety catch wherever moving parts touch.

N00942600102

The ventilation slots in front of the wind-shield should be brushed clear after a heavysnowfall so that the operation of the heatingand ventilation systems will not be impaired.

To prevent freezing of the weatherstrippingon the doors, engine hood, etc., they shouldbe treated with silicone grease.

It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in the vehicle during the win-ter so that you can clear away snow if you getstranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping

snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper forthe windshield, side and rear window are alsouseful.

N00942700305

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire ifa large current attempts to flow through cer-tain electrical systems.In case of a melted fusible link, see yourauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice for inspectionand replacement.For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuseload capacities” on page 9-23.

N00942800902

To prevent damage to the electrical systemfrom short-circuiting or overloading, each

individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. Thefuse blocks are located in the passenger com-partment and in the engine compartment.

The fuse block in the passenger compartmentis located in front of the driver’s seat at theposition shown in the illustration.

In the engine compartment, the fuse block islocated as shown in the illustration.While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up thecover.

For cold and snowy weather

Ventilation slots

Weatherstripping

Additional equipment (For regions where snow is encoun-tered)

Fusible links

WARNING Fusible links must not be replaced by any

other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,property destruction and serious or fatalinjuries at any time.

Fuses

Fuse block location

Passenger compartment

Engine compartment


Fuses


9

N00954801401

This fuse list shows the names of the electri-cal systems and their fuse capacities.There are spare fuses in the fuse block in theengine compartment. Always replace a blownfuse with one of the same capacity as theoriginal.

Some fuses may not be installed on yourvehicle, depending on the vehicle modelor specifications.

Fuse load capacities

Type A

Type B

Passenger compartment fuse loca-tion table

No. Sym-bol Electrical system Capac-

ity

1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A

2 Cigarette lighter 15 A

3 Ignition coil 10 A

4 Starter motor 7.5 A

5 — — —6 — — —

7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A

8 Outside rearview mirrors 7.5 A

9 Engine control unit 7.5 A

10 Control unit 7.5 A

11 Rear fog light 10 A

12 Door lock 15 A

13 Interior light (Dome light) 15 A

14 Rear window wiper 15 A

15 Gauges 7.5 A

16 Relay 7.5 A

17 Heated seats 20 A

18 Option 10 A

19 Heated outside rear-view mirrors 7.5 A

20 Windshield wiper 20 A

21 Back-up light 7.5 A

22 Defogger 30 A

23 Heater 30 A

24 — — —

25 Radio 10 A

26 Electronic con-trolled unit 15 A


ity


Fuses


9

The table above shows the main equip-ment corresponding to each fuse.

*: Fusible link

Engine compartment fuse location table


ity

SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A*

SBF2 Anti-lock braking system 30 A*

SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A*

SBF4 Power window control 40 A*

Type A

BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A

BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A

F1

Headlight (low

beam) (left)

Halo-gen 10 A

Dis-charge 20 A

F2

Headlight (low

beam) (right)

Halo-gen 10 A

Dis-charge 20 A

F3 Headlight (high beam) (left) 10 A

F4 Headlight (high beam) (right) 10 A

F5 Horn 10 A

F6 Front fog lights 15 A

F7 Daytime running lights 10 A

F8 — — —F9 — — —

F10 Battery current sensor 7.5 A

F11 — — —


ity

F12 Stop lights (Brake lights) 15 A

F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A

F14 Engine control 7.5 A

F15 Alternator 7.5 A

F16 Hazard warning flasher 10 A

F17 Automatic trans-axle 15 A

F18 Air conditioning 10 A

F19 ETV 15 A

F20 Starter 7.5 A

F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A

F22 Fuel pump 15 A

F23 Engine 20 A

F24 Automatic trans-axle 7.5 A

#1 — Spare fuse 20 A#2 — Spare fuse 30 A


ity


Fuses


9



*: Fusible link



The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fusesburns out, substitute with the following fuse.7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors10 A: Option15 A: Cigarette lighterWhen using a substitute fuse, replace with afuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-ble.

N00954900131

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn offthe electrical item concerned to the fuseand turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”position or put the operation mode inOFF.

2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the enginecompartment fuse block.

3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,and pull the fuse straight out from the fuseblock.


ity

SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*



Type B

Identification of fuse

Capacity Color7.5 A Brown10 A Red15 A Blue20 A Yellow

30 A Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible link type)

40 A Green (fusible link type)

Fuse replacement


Replacement of light bulbs


9

4. Use the fuse location diagrams and thematching tables, to check the fuse that isrelated to the problem. If the fuse is notblown, something else must be causingthe problem. Have the system inspectedby your authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice.

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacitysecurely into the appropriate slot.

N00942901362

Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light isoff. Do not touch the glass part of the newbulb with your bare fingers; the oil from yourskin will stay on the glass and dim or destroythe bulb when it gets hot.

B- Fuse is OKC- Blown fuse

CAUTIONNever use a fuse with a capacity greater than

the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiringto heat up and could cause a fire.

If the replacement fuse blows again after ashort time, have the electrical systemchecked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice tofind and correct the cause.


CAUTIONBulbs are extremely hot immediately after

being turned off.When replacing the bulb, wait for it to coolsufficiently before touching it. You couldotherwise be burned.

Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gasinside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching ahalogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.

CAUTIONNever hold the halogen light bulb with a bare

hand, dirty glove, etc.The oil from your hand could cause the bulbto break the next time the headlights areused. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it withalcohol and let it dry completely beforeinstalling the bulb.

CAUTIONDo not install commercially available LED-

type bulbs.Commercially available LED-type bulbscould adversely affect the operation of thevehicle, such as by preventing the lights andother vehicle equipment from operatingproperly.

CAUTION




9

N00943000132

The bulb should only be replaced with a newbulb with the same rating and type. The typeand rating are listed on the base of the bulb.

N00950302030

NOTE If you are unsure of how to carry out the

work as required, it is recommended thatthese procedures be carried out by an autho-rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repairfacility of your choice.

Be careful not to scratch the vehicle bodywhen removing a light and lens.

When it rains, or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimesbecomes temporarily foggy. This is the samephenomenon as when window glass mists upon a humid day, and does not indicate a func-tional problem.When the light is switched on, the heat willremove the fog. However, if water gathersinside the light, please have it checked by anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or arepair facility of your choice.

Bulb capacity

Outside

Type A: Halogen headlights typeType B: Bi-xenon High intensity discharge

(HID) headlights type

Front

Type A

Type B

Description Watt-age

ANSI Trade No. or Bulb

type

1 Front turn signal light 27 W #1156NA

2

Headlight/Day-time running light (if so equipped) (Type A)

60/55 W HB2

Headlight (Type B) 35 W —

3 Parking light

Type A 5 W W5W

Type B — —

4 Front side-marker light 5 W W5W

5

Front fog light (if so equipped) 19 W H16

Front fog light/Day-time run-ning light

(if so equipped)

Front fog light

35 W H8

Day-time run-ning light

13 W P13W




9

6 Side turn signal light (on fender, if so equipped)

5 W —

7

Side turn signal light (on outside rearview mirror, if so equipped)

— —

WARNINGCheck with an authorized Mitsubishi

Motors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice when it is necessary to repair theBi-xenon HID headlight or to replace thebulb.The power circuit, bulb and electrodesgenerate high voltages that may cause asevere shock.

NOTE It is not possible to repair or replace only the

bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender).Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choicewhen the light needs to be repaired orreplaced.

Description Watt-age

ANSI Trade No. or Bulb

type

The following lights use an LED instead ofthe bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubi-shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice when either light needs to be repairedor replaced.• Parking light (Type B)• Side turn signal light (on outside rearview

mirror)

Item Wattage

ANSI trade No. or bulb

type

1 High-mounted stop light — —

2 License plate light 5 W W5W

3 Back-up light 16 W W16W

NOTE

Rear

4 Rear turn signal light 21 W PY21W

5 Tail and stop light — —

6 Rear side-marker light — —

NOTE The following lights use an LED instead of

the bulb. Check with an authorized Mitsubi-shi Motors dealer or a repair facility of yourchoice when either light needs to be repairedor replaced.• High-mounted stop light• Tail and stop light• Rear side-marker light

Item Wattage

ANSI trade No. or bulb

type




9

N00950400646

N00901801199

1. Pull out the connector (A), and thenremove the sealing cover (B).

2. Unhook the spring (C), which secures thebulb, and then remove the bulb (D).

3. To install the bulb, perform the removalsteps in reverse.

N00943200352

The alignment of the headlights should bechecked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choice.

N00917301665

1. For vehicles with Bi-xenon HID head-lights, when replacing the bulb on the leftside, remove the cap (A) by turning itcounterclockwise to create enough workspace.

Inside

Item Wattage1 Cargo room light 5 W2 Dome light 8 W

Headlights/Daytime running lights (if so equipped) (Halogen headlights type)


Headlight aim adjustment

Front side-marker lights




9

2. Turn the socket (B) counterclockwise toremove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


N00943401465

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise toremove it.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.



Front turn signal lights

Type A: Halogen headlights typeType B: Bi-xenon High intensity discharge

(HID) headlights type*- Front of the vehicle

Type A

Type B




9

N00917301678

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise toremove it.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.


N00943601890

1. To create enough work space, turn thesteering wheel all the way in the directionopposite to the side you wish to replace.

2. Remove the clips/bolts (A) to turn up thecover (B).

3. While pressing the tab, pull out the con-nector.Parking lights (Halogen head-

lights type)


Front fog lights (if so equipped)/ Front fog lights and Daytime running lights (if so equipped)

Type 1- Fog light typeType 2- Fog light and Daytime running

light typeC- Fog light bulbD- Daytime running light bulb

Type 1

Type 2




9

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to removeit.


N00943701569

1. Open the liftgate.(Refer to “Liftgate” on page 5-27.)

2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lightunit.

3. Move the light unit toward the rear of thevehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C).

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise toremove it.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket as fol-lows.

NOTEWhen refitting each of the clips, first insert

part (E) of the clip into the hole and thenpress part (F) into it.

Type 1

Type 2

Rear combination lights

D- Back-up lightE- Rear turn signal lightF- Rear side-marker light, and tail and

stop light (LED) - Do not touch thesocket because replacing this light iscarried out by an authorized MitsubishiMotors dealer or a repair facility ofyour choice.

NOTE The rear side-marker light, and tail and stop

light use an LED instead of the bulb.Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motorsdealer or a repair facility of your choicewhen the light needs to be repaired orreplaced.


Vehicle care precautions


9

• Back-up light bulbPull the bulb out.

• Rear turn signal light bulbTurn the bulb counterclockwise whilepressing in.


N00944001426

1. Push the light unit (A) toward the left sideof the vehicle to remove it.

2. Turn the socket (B) counterclockwise toremove it, and then pull the bulb out fromthe socket.


N00945100166

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,perform regular maintenance using the propermaterials and procedures. Be sure to use onlythose materials and procedures that meet yourlocal environmental pollution control regula-tions. Choose the materials you will use care-fully, to be sure that they do not containcorrosives. If you are not sure, contact anauthorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for helpin choosing these materials.

NOTEWhen mounting the lamp unit, align the

notch (G) and pin (H) on the lamp unit withthe clip (I) and hole (J) in the body.

Back-up light bulb Rear turn signal light bulb

License plate lights

NOTEWhen installing the light unit, first insert the

tab (C) into the hole on the body, and thenpush on the light unit to fit it into place.

Vehicle care precautions


Cleaning the inside of your vehicle


9

These can all be dangerous, and they all candamage your vehicle.

N00945200095

After washing the inside of your vehicle withany cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-lated area.

N00945300142

1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft clothsoaked in a 3% solution of gentle soapand water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,wring it out well, and wipe off all thesoap.

N00945500128

1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-cle, maintain the upholstery carefully andkeep the interior clean.Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to cleanthe seats. If stained, vinyl and syntheticleather should be cleaned with an appro-priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can becleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarmwater.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuumcleaner and remove any stains with carpetcleaner. Oil and grease can be removed bylightly dabbing with a clean white clothand spot remover.

CAUTIONCleaning products can be dangerous. Some

are poisonous and others are highly flamma-ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe theirfumes in a closed space. When you use any-thing in a container to clean your vehicle, besure to follow the instructions. Always openyour vehicle doors or windows when you’recleaning the inside. Never use the followingchemicals to clean your vehicle:• Gasoline• Carbon Tetrachloride• Benzine• Kerosene• Naphtha• Acetone• Turpentine• Paint Thinner• Lacquer Thinner• Nail Polish Remover

Cleaning the inside of your vehicle

CAUTIONDo not use organic substances (solvents,

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) oralkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discoloring,staining or cracking of the surface.If you use cleaners or polishing agents, makesure their ingredients do not include the sub-stances mentioned above.

NOTEAlways read the instructions on the cleaner

label.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts

NOTEDo not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-

tectants containing silicones or wax.Such products, when applied to the instru-ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-tions on the windshield and obscure vision.Also, if such products get on the switches ofthe electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-ure of these accessories.

Upholstery


Cleaning the outside of your vehicle


9

N00945600187

1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with asoft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-tle soap and water.

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,wring it out well, and wipe off all thesoap.

3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-face.

N00945700058

To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it oftenand thoroughly. If desired, you may wax yourvehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.

N00945800033

Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,tree sap, insect remains, sea water and otherforeign matters can damage the finish on yourvehicle.Generally, the longer any foreign materialstays on the finish, the worse the damage.Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-ever the finish gets soiled.

N00945900630

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dustpicked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-faces can damage the paint and body of yourvehicle if left on.Frequent washing and waxing is the best wayto protect your vehicle from this damage.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it withwater to remove dust. Next, using plenty ofclean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,wash the vehicle from top to bottom.Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,carefully clean the joints and flanges of thedoors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely toremain.

NOTE If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat

upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brushover the surface in one direction.

Genuine leather (if so equipped)

NOTE If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it

with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildewmay grow.

The genuine leather surface can be damagedif brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiberbrush.

Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solventscan discolor the genuine leather surface andshould not be used.

Genuine leather can mildew if not keptclean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.

The genuine leather surface may harden andshrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlightfor long hours. When your vehicle is parked,place it in the shade as much as possible.

When the temperature of the vehicle interiorrises in summer, vinyl products left on thegenuine leather seat may deteriorate andstick to the seat.


Foreign material

NOTE Washing

CAUTIONWhen washing the underside of your vehicle

or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-tect your hands.

Never spray or splash water on the electricalparts in the engine compartment. This maydamage them. Be careful also when washingthe underbody to ensure that water does notenter the engine compartment.




9

Salt and other chemicals spread on winterroads in some geographical areas can have a

detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.You should flush the underbody with a highpressure hose every time you wash the out-side of your vehicle.Take special care to remove mud or otherdebris which could trap and hold salt andmoisture.After washing your vehicle, wipe off allwaterdrops from the rubber parts around thedoors to prevent the doors from freezing.

N00946000234

Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, orwhen water does not bead up on the paint.Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of waxon the painted surfaces. After the wax hasdried, polish with a dry soft cloth.Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.You should wax when the painted surfacesare cool.

N00946100046

If painted surfaces have been severely dam-aged and lost their original luster and colortone, polish the surface lightly with a finepolishing compound. Avoid limiting yourpolishing to the damaged surface only; polisha somewhat wider area, moving the polishingcloth in one direction. After polishing, flushthe compound from the surface and apply acoat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.

Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-ing brushes. These brushes may scratch thepaint surface and make it dull.Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-ored vehicles.

Some hot water washing equipment useshigh pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.Because hot water can damage plastics partsand seep inside your vehicle, make sure youdo the following when using such equip-ment:• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches

(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.• When washing around the door glass, hold

the nozzle at a distance of more than 28inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to theglass surface.

Make sure to do the following when using anautomatic car wash, with help from eitherthis manual or the car wash operator, toavoid damaging your vehicle:• Fold the outside rearview mirrors.• Remove the antenna.• Tape the wiper arm assembly.• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear

spoiler, check with the car wash operatorbefore using the car wash.

During cold weather

CAUTION

NOTEWhen the door is frozen, opening it by force

may tear off or crack the rubber gasketinstalled around the door. Pour warm waterto melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipeoff the water after opening the door. To pre-vent freezing of the weatherstripping on thedoors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-cant.

Waxing

CAUTIONWaxes containing high abrasive compounds

should not be used. These waxes remove rustand stain effectively from the paintwork, butare harmful to the finish of the paint, becausethey also remove paint/clearcoat.They are also harmful to other glossy sur-faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene orpaint thinners to remove road tar or other dirtfrom the vehicle surface.

Do not put wax on the areas having blackmatte coating because it can cause unevendiscoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these getwax on them, wipe the wax off right awaywith a soft cloth and warm water.

Polishing




9

N00946200092

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coatshould be touched up as soon as possible withtouch-up paint to prevent corrosion.Check body areas facing the road or the tirescarefully for damage to the paint caused byflying stones, etc. The paint code number foryour vehicle can be found on the vehicleinformation code plate on the front passengerdoor sill.

N00946300194

Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or blackrough surface of the bumper, molding orlights, the surface may appear white in color.In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm waterand a soft cloth or chamois.

N00946400052

To prevent spots and corrosion of chromeparts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, andapply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If thechrome is severely damaged or pitted, use acommercially available chrome polish.

N00946500183

1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-

not be removed easily with water.Rinse off the detergent after washing thewheel.

3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamoisleather or a soft cloth.

N00946600054

The window glass can usually be cleanedusing only a sponge and water. Glass cleanercan be used to remove wax, oil, grease, deadinsects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe itdry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.

N00946700068

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to removegrease, dead insects, etc., from the wiperblades.Replace the wiper blades when they no longerclean the windshield and rear window prop-erly.

Damaged paint

Cleaning plastic parts

CAUTIONDo not use a scrubbing brush or other rough

scrubber as these may damage the plasticsurface.

Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-ishing powder) which may damage the plas-tic surface.

Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,cracks, or discoloration.If any of these get on a plastic part, wipethem up with a soft cloth or chamois and amild solution of soap and water. Then rinsethem immediately with water.

Chrome parts

Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)

CAUTION CAUTIONDo not use a brush or other hard implement

on the wheels.Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-

sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doingso could cause the coating on the wheels topeel or become discolored or stained.

Do not directly apply hot water using a steamcleaner or by any other means.

Contact with seawater or road salt used forde-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off suchsubstances as soon as possible.

Window glass

Wiper blades




9

N00947000071

Never spray or splash water on the electricalaccessories in the engine compartment. Thisputs the engine at risk of being damaged.Do not bring the circumferential parts, theplastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-ric acid (battery electrolyte) which maycrack, stain or discolor them.If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,chamois or the like and an aqueous solutionof neutral detergent then immediately rinsethe affected parts with plenty of water.

Engine compartment


10

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4


Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

10

N01047101194

This information is provided in compliancewith the requirements of the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-ment of Transportation. It provides thepurchasers and/or prospective purchaserswith information on reporting safety defects.

DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicletires must conform to Federal Safety Require-ments in addition to these grades. The spe-cific grade rating in each grade category isshown on the side wall of the tires on yourvehicle.

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half(11/2) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi-cantly from the norm due to variations indriving habits, service practices and differ-ences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), Band C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performance which allpassenger car tires must meet under the Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

N01047201528

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying Mitsubishi MotorsNorth America, Inc.

Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Uniform tire quality grading

Treadwear

Traction AA, A, B, C

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B, C

WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive load-ing, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

Reporting Safety Defects


Reporting Safety Defects

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3

10

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mit-subishi Motors North America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

You can also obtain other informa-tion about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

To contact Mitsubishi Motors NorthAmerica, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 orwrite to:

If you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has a safetydefect, you should immediatelynotify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying Mitsubishi Motor Salesof Canada, Inc. You may write to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales ofCanada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 orwrite to:

To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales ofCaribbean, Inc.call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

NHTSA Headquarters 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SEWest BuildingWashington, DC 20590

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-ica, Inc.Customer Relations DepartmentP.O. Box 6400Cypress, CA 90630-0064

For vehicles sold in Canada

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-ada, Inc.Customer Relations DepartmentP.O. Box 410094141 Dixie RoadMississauga, ON L4W 5C9

For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico

Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-bean, Inc.Customer Service DepartmentP.O. Box 192216SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216

For vehicles sold in Guam


Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

10

call (671)649-3673 or write to:

To contact Triple J Motorscall (670)234-7133 or write to:

To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.call 684(699)9140 or write to:

N01047300232

We hope you will never be involved in anaccident, but there is always that potentialdanger. So, please be sure to buckle up anddrive safely.

Remain calm.Check for injuries. Report all injuries to

the police, and, if necessary, call for anambulance.

Record all the details of the accident. Thiswill provide you with accurate records ofthe accident for discussions with yourinsurance company and other personswho may be acting on your behalf.

Understand your repair estimate beforeapproving repairs.

Choosing the repair shop and the brandsof parts that they use on your vehicle isyour decision.

Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.Many times, to save money, your insur-ance company will recommend imitationparts that do not meet the original specifi-cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistanceor workmanship.

The strength and integrity built into yourMitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specificdesign referred to as “Energy Management”.Individual body parts are designed to act asone unit in the event of an accident. Shockwaves are absorbed by protective panels orare channeled around the passenger compart-ment. This important feature is possiblebecause high tensile steel is used inMitsubishi panels and structural parts, some-thing that cannot be guaranteed by the manu-facturers of imitation parts. All GenuineMitsubishi body panels and support bracketsare designed and constructed as importantprotection features in the event of an acci-dent. By replacing body parts with non-Genu-ine Mitsubishi Motors parts, your vehiclemay no longer meet original equipment spec-ifications.

Triple J Enterprises, Inc.P.O. Box 6066TAMUNINGGUAM 96931

For vehicles sold in Saipan

Triple J MotorsP.O. Box 500487SAIPAN, MP96950-0487

For vehicles sold in American Samoa

Pacific Marketing, Inc.P.O. Box 698PAGO PAGO,AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799


In the event of an accident

Key information to discuss with your insurance company

Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-tection



Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

10

As a consumer requesting repair on yourvehicle, you have consumer rights. Across thecountry, State Insurance Commissioners havebegun considering rules on the use of non-OEM parts. This could mean that repair shopswill have to disclose to the consumer whenthey intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-ulations are not consistent on this point,remember you have a choice. So, if you wantgenuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you mayhave to specifically request them. Make cer-tain your insurance company understandsimitations are not to be used in the repair ofyour vehicle. You deserve the best genuineMitsubishi Motors parts.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are builtwith the high quality and durability standardsyou expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motorsreplacements parts are your guarantee thatyour vehicle will have all the technologicaladvantages and maintain the style and protec-tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.

Remember to ask for genuine MitsubishiMotors parts.Consumer rights (For vehicles

sold in U.S.A.)




11

Specifications

Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5Battery ............................................................................................11-6Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-6Capacity .........................................................................................11-7


Vehicle labeling

11-2 Specifications

11

N01147401824

Keep a record of the chassis number andvehicle identification number. Such informa-tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.

The vehicle emission control informationlabel is affixed on the underside of the enginehood.

The vehicle identification number is stampedon the plate riveted to the left front corner ofthe vehicle body. It is visible from outside ofthe vehicle through the windshield.

The air conditioning label is affixed on theinside panel of the engine hood.

The vehicle information code plate is locatedon the front passenger door sill.

The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-head as shown in the illustration.

Vehicle labeling

1 - Vehicle emission control information label

2 - Vehicle identification num-ber plate

3 - Air conditioning label

4 - Vehicle information code plate

Chassis number


Vehicle dimensions

Specifications 11-3

11

The engine model and serial number arestamped on the cylinder block as shown inthe illustration.

N01148100616

The tire and loading information placard islocated on the driver’s door sill.

N01148200242

The certification label is located on thedriver’s door sill.

N01147501649

Engine model/serial number


Tire and loading information placard

Certification label

Vehicle dimensions

Overall length 149.4 in (3,795 mm)Overall width 65.6 in (1,665 mm)Overall height 59.4 in (1,510 mm)Wheel base 96.5 in (2,450 mm)


Vehicle weights

11-4 Specifications

11

N01147601972

GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicleGAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axleSeating capacity: the maximum number of occupants

Vehicle weights

Item M/T CVTGross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 2,910 lb (1,320 kg) 3,020 lb (1,370 kg)

Gross axle weight rating (GAWR)

Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)Rear 1,477 lb (670 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)Seating capacity 5 personsMaximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)

NOTERoof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.


Engine specifications

Specifications 11-5

11

N01147701566

Engine specifications

Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3)No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)Compression ratio 10.5:1Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)Firing order 1-3-2


Battery

11-6 Specifications

11

N01147801349

Battery is a 12 volt type.

N01147901845

PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installationholes)

Battery

55D23L (356CCA/99RC)

Tires and wheels

Tire 165/65R14 79S

175/55R15 77V

WheelSize 14 x 4 1/2J 15 x 5 JPCD 3.93 in (100 mm)Offset 1.81 in (46 mm)

NOTEContact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors

dealer for details on the combination used onyour vehicle.

These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditionsdescribed in this owner’s manual.


Capacity

Specifications 11-7

11

N01148002215

*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-nology

Capacity

Item Capacity LubricantsFuel (approximate) 9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2

Engine oil

Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-burst” symbol) on the container.If these oils are not available, an API classification SN or higher can be used.

Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L)

Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO API classification GL-4 SAE 75W-80

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L) Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on page 9-9.

Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2Engine coolant{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve tank}

M/T 4.2 qt (4.0 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or equivalent*CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L)

Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —

Refrigerant (air conditioning)Refer to the “Air con-

ditioning label” on page 11-2.

HFC-134a



Alphabetical index

12-1

12

AAccessory (installation) ......................... 3-5Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-50Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning .............. 7-12Important air conditioning operating tips..

7-18Manual air conditioning .................... 7-7

Air purifier ......................................... 7-19Airbag ............................................... 4-21Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-37Antenna ............................................. 7-44Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-47Assist grip ........................................ 5-111Audio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio withCD player .................................... 7-19

Error codes..................................... 7-41Handling of compact discs............... 7-42

Automatic air conditioning .................. 7-12

BBack-up lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27Replacement .................................. 9-32

Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots ....................................... 9-21

Battery .............................................. 9-10Charging system warning light ........ 5-73Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-10Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11During cold weather ....................... 9-11Specification.................................. 11-6

Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-81Bottle holders.................................... 5-109Brake

Fluid ............................................. 11-7Brake assist system............................. 5-46Braking ............................................... 6-5

Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-47Hose ............................................. 9-21Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-45Parking brake................................. 5-31Pedal............................................. 5-44Pedal free play ............................... 9-18Power brakes ................................. 5-44Service brake ................................. 5-44Warning lights ............................... 5-71

Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-27

CCalifornia Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ..................................... 3-7

Capacities .......................................... 11-7Card holder ...................................... 5-106Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10Cargo room light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29Catalytic converter ................................ 9-3Certification label ............................... 11-3Charging system warning light ............. 5-73Child restraint systems ........................ 4-14Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-26Cleaning

Inside of your vehicle ...................... 9-34Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-35

ClutchPedal free play................................ 9-18

Consumer information......................... 10-2Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...

5-39Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-7Selector lever operation ................... 5-39Selector lever positions.................... 5-41

Convenience hook............................. 5-110Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-7Cruise control ..................................... 5-52Cup holders ...................................... 5-109


Alphabetical index

12-2

12

DDaytime running lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27Replacement ......................... 9-29, 9-31

Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-80Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door

windows) .......................... 7-6, 7-10, 7-17Dimensions ........................................ 11-3Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-76Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21Dome light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-73Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-73Doors

Lock.............................................. 5-24Power door locks ............................ 5-25

Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2

EElectric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-49Electric rear window defogger switch ... 5-80Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting

system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-19Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-19

EngineCompartment ................................... 9-5Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-7Engine model.................................. 11-3High coolant temperature warning light....

5-73Hood............................................... 9-4Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-7Overheating ..................................... 8-4Serial number ................................. 11-3Specification................................... 11-5

Engine hood ........................................ 9-4Engine switch ..................................... 5-13Error codes ......................................... 7-41Exhaust system ................................... 9-21

FFloor mat............................................. 6-2Fluid

Brake fluid ..................................... 11-7Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-7Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-7Manual transaxle...................... 9-9, 11-7Washer fluid ............................ 9-9, 11-7

Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-7Free-hand advanced security transmitter

(F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9Front fog lights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27Indicators....................................... 5-71Replacement .................................. 9-31Switch ........................................... 5-77

Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3Front side-marker lights


Front turn signal lightsBulb capacity ................................. 9-27Replacement .................................. 9-30

FuelFilling the fuel tank........................... 3-3Fuel economy................................... 6-2Fuel hoses ...................................... 9-20Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-65Fuel selection ................................... 3-2Tank capacity ................................. 11-7

Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-14Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-65Fuses ................................................. 9-22Fusible links....................................... 9-22

GGeneral maintenance

Maintenance................................... 9-20General vehicle data............................ 11-3Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6Glove compartment........................... 5-109


Alphabetical index

12-3

12

HHazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-77Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-71Head restraints...................................... 4-7Headlights

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27Dimmer ......................................... 5-76Headlight flasher ............................ 5-76Replacement .................................. 9-29Switch ........................................... 5-74

Heater without air conditioning function . 7-4High beam indicator............................ 5-71High coolant temperature warning light 5-73High-mounted stop light

Bulb capacity ................................. 9-27Hill start assist .................................... 5-45Hood lock release mechanism and safety

catch................................................ 9-21Hook

Convenience hook ........................ 5-110Horn switch........................................ 5-80

IIf the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2Ignition switch.................................... 5-34Important facts to know in case of an accident

10-4

Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-70Indicators .......................................... 5-71Information display ............................ 5-62Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-32Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-63Interior lights .................................... 5-107

JJack

Garage jack up position..................... 9-2Storage............................................ 8-5

Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2

KKey slot............................................. 5-18Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-21Keys ................................................... 5-2

LLabeling ............................................ 11-2License plate lights


Liftgate ............................................. 5-27Link System....................................... 5-81Loading information ............................. 6-6

Lubricants .......................................... 11-7

MMalfunction indicator light .................. 5-72Manual air conditioning......................... 7-7Manual transaxle................................. 5-37

Oil.......................................... 9-9, 11-7Shift points..................................... 5-38

Manual window control ....................... 5-28Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..

3-5Multi-information display ........... 5-60, 5-61

OOctane rating ........................................ 3-2Oil

Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-7Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-7

Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-73Operation mode .................................. 5-13Operation under adverse driving conditions ..

8-13Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-33Overheating.......................................... 8-4

PParking ................................................ 6-5


Alphabetical index

12-4

12

Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-19Parking brake ............................ 5-31, 9-19Parking lights


Polishing............................................ 9-36Power brakes...................................... 5-44Power outlet ..................................... 5-107Power windows .................................. 5-28Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6

RRadio

AM/FM electronically tuned radio withCD player .................................... 7-19

General information about your radio 7-44Rear combination lights


Rear seats ............................................ 4-5Rear shelf panel................................ 5-110Rear side-marker lights


Rear turn signal lightsBulb capacity ................................. 9-27Replacement .................................. 9-32

Rearview mirror

Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-32Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-33

Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-26Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2

SSafe driving techniques......................... 6-4Seat belts............................................. 4-8

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-12Child restraint systems..................... 4-14Front passenger seat belt warning light.....

4-11Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-21Seat belt extender ............................ 4-12Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-14Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-9Seat belt pre-tensioners .................... 4-13Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-13

Seats ................................................... 4-2Front seats ....................................... 4-3Head restraints ................................. 4-7Heated seats..................................... 4-4Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2

Service brake ...................................... 5-44Service precautions .............................. 9-2Side turn signal lights

Bulb capacity.................................. 9-27Snow tires .......................................... 9-18

Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20Starting the engine .............................. 5-36Steering

Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-49Steering wheel height adjustment ..... 5-32

Stop lightsBulb capacity ................................. 9-27Replacement .................................. 9-32

Storage spaces .................................. 5-108Sun visors ........................................ 5-106Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-21

How the Supplemental Restraint Systemworks .......................................... 4-24

Maintenance service ....................... 4-36

TTail lights


Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-56Tires.................................................. 9-12

Inflation pressures .......................... 9-15Maintenance................................... 9-16Quality grading .............................. 10-2Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-16Rotation......................................... 9-17Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-6Snow tires ...................................... 9-18


Alphabetical index

12-5

12

Tire and loading information placard 11-3Tire chains ..................................... 9-18To change a tire ................................ 8-6Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-16

Tools ................................................... 8-5Storage ............................................ 8-5

Towing .............................................. 8-12Trailer towing..................................... 6-11Turn signal lights

Indicators ....................................... 5-71Lever ............................................. 5-76

UUSB input terminal ........................... 5-102

How to connect a USB memory device ....5-102

How to connect an iPod................. 5-103

VVanity mirror ................................... 5-106Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-33Vehicle dimensions ............................. 11-3Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4Vents ................................................... 7-2

WWarning lights ................................... 5-71Washer

Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-7Rear window washer ...................... 5-79Switch................................... 5-77, 5-78

Washing ............................................ 9-35Waxing ............................................. 9-36Weights ............................................. 11-4Wheel

Covers........................................... 8-11Specification.................................. 11-6

WiperRear window wiper ........................ 5-79Switch................................... 5-77, 5-79Wiper blades.................................. 9-19



Documents

Mirage 2017 OWNER’S MANUAL Mirage - Mitsubishi Motors ...origin.static.mitsubishicars.com/pdf/owners/owners...Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon